Home

E2 Host Manual

1. Figure 4 30 SS7 Link Set Attributes screen activation Page 138 Note The SS7 Card screen with Link Sets selected shows a green icon in the leftmost column when an adjacent link set is in service A red icon displays when a link set is not in service An X icon displays when a link set has been in service but its card has been taken out of service or when the Host was not able to configure a link set for some reason The following information appears in the SS7 Link Set Attributes screen APC fields These fields indicate the unique three part APC Adjacent Point Code of either an STP or a voice switch terminating this SS7 link set of your EXS Switch Your required input is limited to the point code assigned the STP or voice switch by your SS7 network provider Note In SS7 networks subject to ANSI specification the leftmost field designates a specific network such as AT amp T numbered between 000 and 255 the center field designates a cluster of voice switches and packet switching STPs signal transfer points numbered between 000 and 255 the rightmost field designates a specific voice switch or STP numbered between 000 and 255 In SS7 networks subject to ITU specification the leftmost field designates a world zone such as Europe or Asia numbered between 0 and 7 the center field designates an region country or network in the world zone numbered between 000 and 255 the rightmost field designates a specific SS7 n
2. 12 06 04 14 52 18 None NA 12 06 04 14 52 18 NA yl gt Figure 5 20 Channel Details screen layout You may click on the Refresh key to refresh the display or press close to exit Page 246 Raw Command screen The Raw Command screen enables you to send an individual raw command to the Excel switch that may not be included in the Host This function should be used only under the supervision of Dynamis Customer Engineering Warning Anyone using the Raw Commands function should be familiar with the Dynamis switching platform and software programming This function should only be used under the supervision of the Dynamis Customer Engineering staff Certain commands will render the switch or a specific application non functional Raw Command Figure 5 21 Raw Command screen layout On the Maintenance menu click Raw Command to activate this screen E2 Connected to E2 Host LOCALHOST File Equipment ME ia System Admin 557 Switch Status View Alarms Span Channel state oO Carrier Answer Query Raw Command My Documents pe System Update EXNET Management Logs Figure 5 22 Raw Command screen activation Page 247 Sending Raw Commands In the Raw Command screen s Raw Command field enter the raw command you want to send to the Excel Switch then click the SEND button Raw Command field This field indicates the raw command you want to send to the switch When en
3. Page 217 Limit field Option list Incoming Number Number il ANI CLI Effect of Sent with network Xlate Translation Destination supplied Number 006032246511 55 6035551212 Invalid II digits added to and 556035551212 ANI CLI replaced in sent number Host does not validate outgoing II digits 446032246511 55 6035551212 Invalid II digits and ANI CLI 556035551212 replaced in sent number Host does not validate outgoing II digits Figure 4 99 Network supplied Incoming Numbers Translated to Numbers Accompanying Destination Numbers This field indicates the maximum number of concurrent calls that can find a route resulting from a match of their incoming numbers with this digit lookup entry Your required input is limited to a number between zero default no limit and 99 This list indicates call processing or routing options for this digit lookup entry Your required input is limited to one of the following choices Digit Table New for versions 4 7 This incredibly powerful feature allows the system to after translating send the translation to ANOTHER digit table for further translation This can occur for up to 15 levels before an error will occur 108 Test Number Used to perform loopback tests with telcos This function sets up the incoming channel into a loop back state by calling the cross connect channel command This field may not be displayed in all versions ANI PIN
4. ISDN SS7 CC Routing Yes SS7 ISDN CAUSE CODE ROUTING Figs 4 27 amp 4 43 Connect Call No Release Busy Reorder with Cause VRU Play Prompt based on Cause Route Advance to Next Available Calls Resource Groups Y RESOURCE GROUP Fig 4 45 Channel Hunt Order Completion Type CPA Gain SS7 Parameters ACD Queue Specified Play VRU Message Upon No Answer Timeout Network oe T1 Configuring amp Putting T1 Channels in Service Channels in T1 Spans Activating a T1 Span The Host can route calls through the EXS Switch only after you put into service the channels in the spans you have connected to the EXS Switch s line cards Channels put into service are called channels You must know what kind of equipment terminates these channels at their far end regardless of whether they will carry calls to or from the EXS Switch so you can configure them accordingly Presently the EXS Switch can hold T1 and El line cards to support calls carrying their routing information Accordingly the Host can collect a call s digits then route that call whether these digits are signaled tonally DTMF MFR1 or MFR2 or in digital messages ISDN SS7 Your channel configurations are sent to and stored in those line cards of the EXS Switch supporting the channels you have configured Configuring T1 channels requires you to specify the T1 span that holds one some or all of
5. in Channel Features ri M Xlate DNIS Set Keep NOA lt No y CHANNEL FEATURES ookup Typ NPA TABLE Fig 4 69 Intra Inter Yes gt Fig 4 67 Determine Inter Intra State Digit Table Lbokup Type State Determine Inter Intra State Routing MES era NS Routing based y Routing based Trunk Acct on Specific Digit CHANNEL amp ANIPIN App No Table FEATURES Specified Route Listor a terin ra State Nee Server App_ lt Master No Digit Table Se Yes Yes MASTER TABLE Fig 4 67 Ma a DNIS ANI II Xlate ig 4 NPANXX Inter Intra Determine Inter Intra State Routing State Routing y NOE DIGIT TABLE Hsing based on Fig 4 96 Specific Digit DNIS ANI II Xlate Table Route List E Y gt DNIS ANI based Routing or Server App fe N XS ae Routing based on MASTER TABLE Yes Ga ra a No j O AP SERVER APPS Route List Specified TAC Phone Card Callback amp Menu ANI PIN LD Resale lt __No ANIPIN TAC or CALLBACK specified Yes 96 Continued from Previous Page TOD Table Yes Specified Ne TOD DOW ROUTE TABLE Fig 4 76 Y ROUTE LIST Fig 4 93 Route Group Hunt Order ost Routing No Specified Yes POST ROUTE TABLE Fig 4 83 Replace Add Prefix Suffix to ANI DNIS II Set Calling Called Party Info
6. If the cause code number is not in the list a second out going attempt is made After the second out dial attempt is made the incoming trunk is released with the Out Going trunk s return cause code The ISDN VRU Branding is configured under the Option menu selection of VRU Branding The user configures the Route List and the digits to be sent to the VRU The amp character in the Announcement Number will cause the substitution of the Cause Code number into the digit string Page 133 SS7 Configuring and Putting SS7 Channels into Service Procedure To enable the Host to a route call for which routing information is signaled through an SS7 network rather than within either its inbound leg or its outbound leg you must complete the following steps Step 1 Configure SS7 Stack Configure SS7 stack s that is the message handler controlling interpreting SS7 messages exchanged over its links with an SS7 network on the SS7 card see Creating SS7 Stacks Step 2 Configure SS7 Link Sets Configure an SS7 stack s set of links into an SS7 network see Creating SS7 Link Sets Step 3 Assign SS7 Links to Link Set You must associate the channels you have in service with link sets see Configure SS7 Links Step 4 Configure SS7 Network Routes Configure destinations to other switches in the voice network through an SS7 network see Creating SS7 Network Routes Step 5 Group SS7 Channels into CICs Grou
7. Provided you have two SS7 cards in adjacent slots of the same chassis connected by an SS7 redundant I O device you can make one card active and the other standby This relationship assures that one card the standby card can assume control of SS7 messaging should the other card the active card fail Unlike EX CPU and ISDN PRI card redundancy however the standby SS7 card can loadshare subject to your configuration SS7 messaging with the active SS7 card through its own links The SS7 Card screen enables you to determine the status of an SS7 card as well as to configure SS7 stacks link sets links and routes destinations for communication with an SS7 network and to establish SS7 card redundancy BS Card x Model 557 PQ 16 Links Node 0 Slot 1 Last Card Status 10 15 04 11 55 13 Card Status Reset by Software In service Redundancy Status Non edundant Memory Test OK Artwork Revision C 018 Serial Number 11693 Software ROM 173002 Build 0 C Stacks Link Set Links e Routes Destination Route RouteSt DPC DestID DestSt Pri LinkSet Combined Remarks Add E ooo A 243 127 000 oo A 24 00 NEW HAVEN Moor a 243 126 000 0 A 24 01 sie WATERBURY EE Moo a 001 016 159 03 A 24 00 QWEST 1ST 004 A 001 016 159 03 A 24 M con QWEST 2ND 005 A 005 014 204 04 A 24 00 TCAST 1ST D06 A 005 014 204 04 A 24 M oe TCAST 2ND 007 A 001 039 001 05 A 24 m GLOBAL CROSSING 008 A 001 039 001 05 A 24 00 GLO
8. Ringing Timer field This field indicates how many seconds of ringing can occur before billing starts on the T1 channel Your required input is limited to 0 99 Hookflash list This list indicates whether this channel supports the momentary depression of a receiver button to signal for service for example a call to an operator or the transfer of a call Your required input is limited to the following choices e OFF default This value indicates this channel does not support hookflash e ON This value indicates this channel supports hookflash Notification Tone list This list indicates how calls on this T1 channel are made distinctive to an operator so that operator can respond with an appropriate brand Your optional input is limited to the following choices e Beep default This value indicates the operator hears a beep tone e Zip This value indicates the operator hears a zip tone Note This list is meaningful only when this channel s Completion Type is set to Operator see Completion Type list Viewing attributes of all T1 channels Once you click the T7 Tone Channel Attributes screen s OK button the T1 channel attributes you have added or changed will display in the Tone Channels screen scrollable if the screen is more than full across the row of the Span Chan identifying this T1 channel This row divides into columns that incorporate the meanings if not the exact labels of Page 106 the T7 Tone Ch
9. Stage 1 Collects dialed number Stage 2 Collects up to 9 digits First String Contains up to 11 digits Second String Contains up to 9 digits Incoming digits of Stage 1 will be displayed in String 1 of the Host s debugging screen incoming digits of Stage 2 will be displayed in String 2 String 1 will be sent as the dialed number Page A 12 Inseize Control Instructions stages 2 strings 2 digit type MFR2 method compelled Inseize Control Instructions Generate inseize acknowledgment Receive stage 1 digits Receive stage 2 digits Generate backward A6 Report incoming call with digits Wait for host control message El R2 3 This incoming type may be supported in countries outside North America Incoming Digit Format Stage 1 Collects up to 6 digits Stage 2 Collects up to 30 digits Stage 3 Collects up to N digits First String Contains up to 6 digits Second String Contains up to 30 digits Third String Contains as many digits as sent Incoming digits of Stage 1 will be displayed in String 1 of the Host s debugging screen incoming digits of Stage 2 will be displayed in String 2 incoming digits of Stage 3 will be tacked onto Stage 1 s digits in String 1 String 1 will be sent as the dialed number Incoming Rule stages 3 strings 3 digit type MFR2 method compelled Inseize Control Instructions Generate inseize acknowledgment Receive stage 1 digits Receive stage 2
10. e HDB3 High Density Bipolar 3 This value indicates a coding method that does not allow three consecutive zeros Note If you select ISDN in the leftmost Format 2 list If you select El in the leftmost Format 2 list to support SS7 traffic you must select HDB3 If this El span connects to an VIC VR U you must select HDB3 Format 1 list rightmost This list indicates how signaling occurs on this El span Your required input is limited to the following choices e CAS Channel Associated Signaling default This value indicates that CAS occurs on this El span Note TIf this El span connects to an VIC VRU you must select CAS e CLEAR Clear Channel This value indicates that CAS does not occur on this El span Note If you select ISDN in the leftmost Format 2 list you must select CLEAR If you select El in the leftmost Format 2 list to support SS7 traffic you must select CLEAR Format 2 list leftmost This list indicates how transmission occurs on this El span Your required input is limited to the following choices e All Os This value indicates only zeros are sent on this El span e None default This value indicates transmission occurs normally on this El span Page 114 Note If this El span connects to an VIC VRU you must select None If you select El in the leftmost Format 2 list to support SS7 traffic you must select None Format 2 list rightmost This list indicates how the
11. Edit Sig Rev Filters Edit Sig Rev Timers Edit Sig Xmit Timers 8 03 Collect Digits ERM Figure 4 11 Signaling Transmission Timer Attributes screen activation Page 111 E1 Configuring amp Putting E1 Channels into Service Activating an El span Configuring El channels requires you to specify the El span that holds one some or all of this span s 30 voice channels internally numbered 00 through 29 you want in service then to assign tone attributes to channels you select in the specified span The El Span Attributes screen enables you to specify an El span one span at a time holding channels you want to put into service El Span Attributes crc OFF FEBE OFF El amo E Figure 4 12 E1 Span Attributes screen layout Page 112 Clicking the Mopiry button in the El Card screen itself activated by clicking View by Type View by Slot ID or View by Node in the Main Menu Tool Bar s Equipment menu then a specific El card will activate this screen El Card HDB3CAS _ None El CRC OFF FEBE G 703ITU HDB3CAS None El CRC OFF FEBE G 703ITU Figure 4 13 El Span Attributes screen activation The following information appears in the El Span Attributes screen Offset field This field indicates the physical El span or offset you selected in the El Card screen that holds channels you want to put in service Note Excel Switching numbers its
12. law on up to 30 channels if DSP ONE model or 13 channels if MFDSP model per node of your EXS Switch MFR2 Ru DSP can simultaneously receive MFR2 signals subject to u law on up to 30 channels if DSP ONE model or 13 channels if MFDSP model per node of your EXS Switch Monitor All DSP supports up to 34 simultaneous Conferences bridging four seven speakers listeners and a channel limited number of listeners if DSPONE model or only one Conference bridging four seven speakers listeners and a channel limited number of listeners if MFDSP model subject in part to A law and in part to p law Page 54 Note Receivers handle only a limited number of channels you must add receivers in a quantity that will match the total number of incoming channels of your EXS chassis or your switch will drop calls for want of a receiver Generators of each kind handle all channels of your EXS chassis you need not add more than one kind of receiver unless you require redundancy of that kind for redundancy you should put the second generator of a given kind on another DSP card in the same chassis or at least on a different SIMM of the same card MFR2 RA MFR2 GAB and MFR2 GAF must be on same DSP card if on different SIMMs MFR2 Ru MFR2 GuB and MFR2 GuF must be on same DSP card if on different SIMMs Page 55 T1 Card The T1 card s purpose is to convey up to 24 sampled and quantized voice calls and perhaps call control data over each T
13. Digit Lookup field Digit Xlate 1 field Attributes in the Digit Tables screen s Attributes menu will activate the Digit Table Attributes screen The following information appears in the Digit Table Attributes screen This line indicates the digit table s name This field indicates a pattern of digits against which the incoming number either dialed by the calling party or translated previously in the Pre Translation table associated with this digit table is matched to determine e the call s outgoing leg specified in this digit lookup entry s Route list from your EXS Switch to the next switch working to complete the call and if the incoming number is not directly sent over the outgoing leg as the destination number e the incoming number s translation specified in this digit lookup entry s Digit Xlate 1 or Digit Xlate 2 fields to be sent over the outgoing leg as the destination number Your required input is limited to 23 characters including only digits 0 9 and symbols and without quotes Note The channel s Incoming Type determines the number of digits actually collected on this channel s seizure Digit patterns are matched in a descending order of specificity within a descending order of magnitude Regarding magnitude the matching process for incoming number 6032553066 would pass over all digit patterns beginning with digits 9 8 or 7 to start matching at digit patterns beginning with the di
14. In Exnet configurations click the node ID of the switch that will receive the System Software If the configuration is not Exnet the default node ID is 255 For CPU versions 1 09 and lower the download files must be located in the location excel_4X with a PSOS4X BIN file For CPU versions 1 10 and higher use of BootP and TFT server is required refer to your E2 Software representative License Download screen The License Download screen enables you to download the LICENSE CFG file to the EXS Switch The LICENSE CFG file determines what functionality Excel Switching provides in your EXS Switch When you start the Host to communicate with an Excel Switch that is running Switch Software version 5 4 or higher the startup process reads the LICENSE CFG file in the Host Computer s files subdirectory This file determines what functionality the EXS Switch will offer you If you do not find expected functionality on completion of the startup process or if you contract for additional functionality after starting and configuring Switch Software version 5 4 or higher you must download the LICENSE CFG to the EXS Switch E2 x A Do you really want to load the license e coma Figure 2 25 License Download screen layout Page 29 On the System Admin menu point to Software Download then click License Download to activate this screen E2 Connected to E2 Host LOCALHOST File Equipment Maintenance SAn 557 ISDN Routing Opti
15. KP INX CIC CCC ST Stage 2 e String 1 KP II ANI 7 10D ST e String 2 KP Dialed Number 7 10D ST First Stage First String e INX is the international routing code 011 e CIC is the carrier identification code e CCC is the country code Page B 3 FGD SS7 ISDN IEs MF ANI CIC Outgoing Digit Format MF ANI DN Outgoing Digit Format MF DN Outgoing Digit Format MF Second Stage e String 1 Contains the information ID digits and the 7 to10 digit ANI e String 2 Contains the 7 to 10 digit dialed number This ANI CLI type is used only for ISDN controlled channels The ANI and dialed number are inserted into the SETUP message as the calling party number and called party number respectively There are no MFDSP resources required for address signaling This ANI CLI type is the same as MF ANI DN with the exception that if a 3 or 4 digit CIC Carrier Identification Code is received as part of the dialed number field on the incoming digits the CIC is propagated out with the outgoing digits Digits are outpulsed using MFR1 Stage 1 e String 1 KP I ANI CIC 10D ST First String Contains the information II digits 10 digit ANI 3 or 4 digit CIC code that came in from the incoming and 10 digit dialed number This ANI CLI type conforms to the Bellcore TR NPL 000258 Specification for Exchange Access North American Signaling Feature Group D Digits are outpulsed using MFR1 only Stag
16. Limit 4g Nature of Address spare no interpretation X Cancel Figure 4 56 Pre Translation Table Attributes screen layout Selecting a specific Pre Translation table by double clicking it and first displaying all digit tables by clicking the Pre Translation Table s sign then clicking Add Table Attributes in the Digit Table screen s Attributes menu will activate the Pre Translation Table Attributes screen E2 Connected to E2 Host localhost File Equipment Maintenance stem Admin 55 ISDN Routing Options Window Help oOo BA ese Digit Tables Fie Tables ENIES 1 Figure 4 73 Pre Translation Table Attributes screen activation The following information appears in the Pre Translation Table Attributes screen Name line This line indicates the Pre Translation Table s name Page 171 Digit Lookup field Digit Xlate 1 field Limit field This field indicates a pattern of digits against which an incoming number dialed by the calling party is matched to determine the incoming number s translation for another digit lookup in the Pre Translation table s associated digit table Your required input is limited to 23 characters including only digits 0 9 A B C D and symbol amp without quotes Note Digit patterns are matched in a descending order of specificity within a descending order of magnitude Regarding magnitude the matching process for incoming number 6032553066 would pass over all d
17. MUSIC DAT Contains trunk assignments for Music On Hold OUTGRP4X DAT Contains user definable outgoing Resource Group information QUEUE1 DAT Contains user definable queue list table information ROUTELS1 DAT Contains user definable route list table information STAGE_ILDAT Contains ANI xlate stage II digit information maximum of 30 available Note This is an enhancement as previous versions only allowed 10 TAC4NAME DAT If using the TAC application now marketed as Smart Calling Card contains user definable TAC accounts TOD_GRP DAT Contains user definable Time of Day group information VRU900 DATC Contains the VRU route list and branding number information for 900 completion type Page 31 Log files System files Log files are identified by the LOG filename extension Some log files can become very large and use up valuable hard disk space The log files within the Host are as follows ADMIN LOG Contains critical error information ALARM LOG Records switch and VRU alarm events CDR LOG Records critical events regarding Call Detail Records CALLPROC LOG Records critical events regarding call processing DHI LOG Records critical events regarding routing EXIT LOG Records software exit information FUNCT LOG Records critical events regarding the Host tasks HARDWARE LOG Records critical events regarding physical aspects of the EXS Switch LAUNCHER LOG Records critical events regarding the
18. The fields are defined as follows Post Routing Options Setup Record Name The name of the Post Routing rules each name must be unique Nature of Address Valid selections are No Preference National number operator requested International number operator requested No number present operator requested No number presnt cut though call to carrier 950 call from LE Carrier public station or end office Test line test code Completion Type Refer to Appendix C for valid Completion Types Page 200 Post Routing Options Translations DNIS Translation There is the option to add a prefix or suffix of digits to the DNIS by using the amp wild card For example if the DNIS is 8005551212 and the value of this field is 01 amp then the DNIS presented will be 018005551212 If the DNIS is 8005551212 and the value of this field is amp 9 then the DNIS presented will be 80055512129 ANI Translation There is the option to add a prefix or suffix of digits to the ANI by using the amp wild card For example if the ANI is 8005551212 and the value of this field is 01 amp then the ANI presented will be 018005551212 If the ANI is 8005551212 and the value of this field is amp 9 then the ANI presented will be 80055512129 Info Translation There is the option to add a prefix or suffix of digits to the Info Digits by using the amp wild card For example if the Info Digit is blank and the value of this field is 27 amp
19. This checkbox when checked deletes the specified span after you click the OK button Page 99 Cable ID field Carrier ID field Framing list Line Coding list Clear Channel buttons This field indicates an identity of this T1 span s physical cable Your optional input is limited to 14 alphanumeric characters Note A label on the cable matching this Cable ID will help you locate the cable if you need to move or replace it This field indicates an identity of the carrier providing service to this T1 span Your optional input is limited to 14 alphanumeric characters Note The Carrier ID will help you determine who to call if you need to troubleshoot a problem on this Tl span Note New Feature The full Carrier ID and Cable ID is now displayed in the upper left corner of the Span Channel State screen This list indicates what framing technique occurs on this T1 span Your required input is limited to one of the following choices e D4 default This value indicates a framing technique that uses a 12 bit frame and robs the eighth least significant bit of each of 24 eight bit time slots to signal voice related information for example on hook off hook per channel e ESF Extended Superframe Format This value indicates a framing technique that uses a 24 bit frame and the 193rd bit as a framing bit Note TIf this TI span supports ISDN or SS7 signaling you must select ESF This list indicates how line coding
20. Write Alarms to TCP IP Port This field indicates when checked Yes that the Host will write alarms to a TCP IP port Click Yes to write alarms to a TCP IP port or click No if you choose not to write alarms to a TCP IP port Logged alarms maximum age This field indicates the number of days that alarm records will be archived on the Host computer s hard drive The Host archives alarm records on a daily basis automatically deleting the oldest files after the specified number of days has been reached This feature prevents the Host Computer s hard drive from running out of disk space by maintaining only the most current records in the system The alarm log file names are files alarm dbf and files alarm txt Your required input is limited to 0 90 days Archived records remain stored on the hard disk until the number of days has been reached or you manually delete the records Keep Major Minor Informational Alarms By checking these boxes you may have these types of alarms displayed or ignored Page 22 Redundancy setup screen This screen enables you to select a communications port that allows an active running Host to communicate with a second Host acting as a standby System Setup x Alarm Setup CDA Setup Application Server Link Switch Setup Node Setup Redundancy Setup Hostis Server port 9602 Host is Client IP Address of the redundant host Pass configuration changes in real time WARNING
21. based on ANI DNIS or Inter Intra State XNET ONE Hardware Support The E2 Host supports the one card Cantata Excel XNET 1 CPU card ISDN NI 2 Support Refer to NI 2 Configuration for details Improved Backup and Restore Virtually all configuration tables can be exported and imported except for card configuration Page 4 Support for Large Digit Tables The digit table import process is improved to efficiently import large digit tables quickly i e 20 000 records in less than 2 minutes instead of over an hour with earlier versions In addition a status screen displays to show progress and identify errors Enhanced Billing Capabilities Easy Upgrade The system has been enhanced to support tandem and postpaid billing capabilities without needing the server software e ANI Tables can configured by ANI either requiring a PIN for validation using Index Tables or requiring a non validated PIN for billing purposes only e Default ANI and or DNIS can be specified when none is provided This allows for billing and tracking in these cases especially used for FXS amp FXO lines and VolP billing for third world countries e Time Synchonization for Hosts One can easily set the active and standby hosts to the system date thus synchronizing their time essential for accurate billing during switchover e CDR fields have been extended for more complete billing records The system is set up so it can easily import dat
22. below e CARD FAILURE This standby EX CPU card failed for an unspecified reason If resetting this card does not remove this message you must call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Memory Test line This line indicates the result of a self test at the last status update of the integrity of ROM and RAM devices on this EX CPU card The following messages can occur e OK Test proved memory was reliable e ROM CHECKSUM FAILED Test proved read only memory was unreliable You must swap this card and call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately e RAM TEST FAILED Test proved random access memory was unreliable If resetting this card does not remove this message you must call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Artwork Revision line This line indicates the revision level of this EX CPU card s circuit design Serial Number line This line indicates the serial number of this EX CPU card Software ROM line This line indicates the major then the minor revision of the ROM software that is the BIOS installed on this EX CPU card Build line This line indicates the build number of the RAM software that is the System Software sometimes called pSOS downloaded to this EX CPUcard Note The Switch Status screen displays the actual version of this software Page 71 Updating Card Status Clicking the EX CPU Card screen s UPDATE STATUS button queries this EX CPU card to determine its current s
23. for that DPC until receipt of an MTP Resume indication for that DPC from an SS7 network Page 136 Viewing attributes of all SS7 stacks Once you click the 557 Stack Attributes screen s OK button the SS7 stack attributes you have added or changed will display in the SS7 Card screen across the row of the Stack ID identifying this SS7 stack This row divides into columns that incorporate the meanings if not the exact labels of the SS7 Stack Attributes screen s parameters for the selected SS7 stack Page 137 Creating SS7 Link Sets Having created one or more SS7 stacks see Creating SS7 Stacks to exchange messages with the SS7 network over channels you have put into service see Putting Channels to from Switch into Service you must create a group or set that will hold these channels or links Note You can assign up to 64 SS7 link sets per EXS Switch whether you have one or two SS7 cards Assigning attributes to SS7 link sets The SS7 Link Set Attributes screen enables you to create an SS7 link set with which SS7 links and also SS7 network routes will be associated 557 Link Set Attributes a CN CN o orco00o Y Figure 4 29 SS7 Link Set Attributes screen layout Selecting Link Sets then clicking the App button in the S 7 Card screen itself activated by clicking View by Type View by Slot ID or View by Node in the Main Menu Tool Bar s Equipment menu then a specific SS7 card will activate this screen
24. numbered 29 for ISDN PRI service on an El span channel 30 is timeslot 16 on an actual El span Note Channels in the span not specified as a D Channel automatically become B Channels Assigning attributes to D Channel Once you have associated a D Channel with a span that will support ISDN PRI service you must assign attributes to this channel The ISDN D Channel Parameters screen enables you to assign these attributes to the selected channel ISDN D Channel Parameters x For D Channel Span 012 Channel 23 RFS Format BCD ES E 01 Connection Type 09 NI 2 User Side z E 02 Options 00 Enable DPNSS Virtual Channel DLC Initialization E 03 D Channel Physical Medium Ol 64KBPS TIEI tt ti ststi S S C YW E 04 HDLC Bit Polarity 00 Noma a E 05 Network Side Layer 2 00 User Side e E 06 B Channel Selection Mode 01 Linear Clockwise sts lt sS E 07 Location E 08 Release Request On ISDN 00 Do not send host Release Request on ISDN disconnect y E 09 Protocol Discrim For Maint Message 3 Nomal sss E 04 B Channel Encoding for Transmission 00 Channel Number ssti i s Cancel Figure 4 19 ISDN D Channel Parameters screen layout Clicking the CONFIGURE button in the SDN Card screen itself activated by clicking View by Type View by Slot ID or View by Node in the Main Menu Tool Bar s Equipment menu then a specific ISDN card will activate this screen for the selected D Channel Page 122
25. or suppression occurs on this T1 span Your required input is limited to one of the following choices e AMI Alternate Mark Inversion default This value indicates a coding method that alternately inverts the polarity of successive ones that is marks e B8ZS Binary 8 Zero Substitution This value indicates a coding method that inserts two violations rather than a one for every seven zeros Note If this TI span supports ISDN or SS7 signaling you must select B8ZF These buttons indicate whether this T1 span provides full 64 Kbps per channel Your required input is limited to one of the following choices e default This value indicates this T1 span permits robbed bit signaling and therefore cannot provide full 64 Kbps per channel e Yes This value indicates this T1 span provides full 64 Kbps per channel and therefore does not permit robbed bit signaling Page 100 Note If this TI span supports ISDN or SS7 signaling you must select Yes Line Build Out list This list indicates the length of this T1 span for which attenuation must be compensated Your required input is limited to one of the following choices e 0 133 ft default e 134 166 ft e 167 299 ft e 300 533 ft e 534 665 ft Page 101 Viewing T1 span attributes Once you click the 77 Span Attributes screen s OK button the T1 span attributes you have added or changed will display in the TZ Card screen scrollable if the screen is more
26. s answer to the Host so the Host can trigger the EXS Switch s billing clock This list indicates how the Host treats this channel called Channel A for discussion and another channel called Channel B for discussion on their disconnection Your required input is limited to the following choices e Brdcast This value indicates the Host will park Channel A if Channel B both terminates the connection and is set to Brdcast Park or Release the Host will release Channel A if Channel A terminates the connection and will park Channel B whether Channel B is set to Brdcast Park or Release Note Brdcast is typically used to support Dynamis Switching s Music on Hold feature An incoming call on Channel A is connected to music on Channel B while waiting for an available voice channel to an operator When the operator becomes available Channel B will disconnect from Channel A and Channel A will be parked to wait for the operator Channel B will be parked for another incoming call requiring music while waiting for an operator e Park This value indicates the Host will release Channel A if Channel B both terminates the connection and is set to Release or will park Channel A if Channel B both terminates the connection and is set to Brdcast or Park the Host will release Channel A if Channel A terminates the connection and will park Channel B whether Channel B is set to Brdcast Park or Release Note Park is often
27. service Making ISDN PRI cards non redundant Clicking the ISDN PRI Card screen s NON REDUNDANT button takes this ISDN PRI card out of redundant mode Making ISDN PRI cards redundant Clicking the ISDN PRI Card screen s REDUNDANT button puts this ISDN PRI card in redundant mode if a second ISDN PRI card has been installed in an adjacent slot and Page 78 both cards are connected to the SS7 redundant I O device Page 79 SS7 Card The SS7 card s purpose is to control calls in the voice network that pass through selected T1 and or El spans of your EXS Switch This control occurs through the setting up and eventually the tearing down of these calls through a separate SS7 data network rather than through the voice network itself To communicate with an SS7 network the SS7 card must create data messages for and interpret data messages from this network Software resident in the SS7 card called an SS7 stack effects this communication Each of four SS7 stacks on the SS7 card currently comprises an ISDN User Part ISUP and several Message Transfer Parts MTPs and provides the call control and messaging functions associated with these parts You can configure these stacks along with associated link sets links and routes destinations to conform either to ANSI or to ITU specifications Because up to four SS7 stacks can operate at the same time per node your EXS Switch can work concurrently in both the ANSI and ITU worlds
28. this span s 24 channels internally numbered 00 through 23 you want in service then to assign tone attributes to the channels you select in the specified span The T7 Span Attributes screen enables you to specify a T1 span one span at a time holding channels you want to put into service T1 Span Attributes GU ASSIGHEG Figure 4 1 T1 Span Attributes screen layout 98 Clicking the MopirY button in the T7 Card screen itself activated by clicking View by Type View by Slot ID or View by Node in the Main Menu Tool Bar s Equipment menu then a specific T1 card will activate this screen D4 AMI 0 133 ft ESF B825 Clear 0 133 ft ESF BZS Clear 0 133 ft D4 AMI 01331 Offset field Span ID list Not Assigned checkbox Figure 4 2 T1 Span Attributes screen activation The following information appears in the T1 Span Attributes screen This field indicates the physical T1 span or offset you selected in the T7 Card screen that holds channels you want to put in service Note Excel Switching numbers its offsets from zero An eight span El card for example has eight offsets numbered 0 through 7 This list indicates the logical identity of the selected physical T1 span or offset holding channels you want to put into service Your required input is limited to the span IDs in this list Note Only Span IDs not already associated with an offset are listed
29. 07 8SpanSTILC 0001 02 NA NA NA NA NA E 1 09 T ONE 16 Span NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA in KN 1 14 T ONE 16 Span NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA Figure 3 17 T1 Card screen activation H 4 H 4 E E 2 E L g 1 15 T ON _ Span NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA Note The above figure shows redundant TI cards The highlighted card is active A one of the other Tl cards is standby S remaining Tl cards are paired with standard I O cards and cannot be redundant The following information appears in the T Card screen Model line This line indicates the model of this T1 card Current models include e 4 Span STILC This model supports 96 digital voice channels at 64 Kbps each e 8 Span STILC This model supports 192 digital voice channels at 64 Kbps each e T ONE 8 Span This model supports 192 digital voice channels at 64 Kbps each e T ONE 16 Span This model supports 384 digital voice channels at 64 Kbps each Node Slot line This line indicates the node in the EXS Switch and slot in the node s chassis where this T1 card resides Note In a single node EXS Switch Node does not display in a multinode EXS Switch Node will display together with an automatically generated number identifying the node Last Card Status line This line indicates in MM DD YY HH MM SS format when this T1 card s status
30. 10 Sec DTMF 7 3 Sec DTMF X Term DTMF 10 3 Sec DTMF 16 12 Sec DTMF 20 20 Sec DTMF 21 12 Sec Feature Grp B Feature Grp B1 Feature Grp D Feature Grp D2 Feature Grp D3 FGB AMA Intl Ftr Grp D Intl Ftr Grp D INC Tandem ISDN MID Tandem MF Lucent Network Agent Operator Sprint TERM Tandem Page A 2 Valid E1 Incoming Types The following Incoming types are only valid when the signaling type is T1 Tone Note that the list of incoming types displayed by the software may differ if a type listed below is missing there may need to be additional development to support that type ANI 10 DNIS 7TL default Auto Terminating DID 4 10 Sec DNIS 7 ANI 10 DTME 3 2 Sec DTMF 4 2 Sec DTMF 4 10 Sec DTMF 7 3 Sec DTMF X Term DTME 10 3 Sec DTMF 16 12 Sec DTME 20 20 Sec DTMF 21 12 Sec El R2 1 E1 R2 2 El R2 3 El R2 4 ISDN Network Agent Operator Incoming Types not presently supported The following incoming types are not presently supported but can be developed as an enhancement if needed Contact your E2 Eagle technical representative for details Attendant Cell Tandem In DB Agent LAN Agent LAN Supervisor Ercsn Cell Page A 3 Tandem Switching Incoming Types Incoming Types List ACD Agent ACD Monitor The three tandem Incoming Types Inc Tandem Mid Tandem Term Tandem must be used in conjunction with each other and other
31. 11 alphanumeric characters Page 193 Dragging amp Dropping route list into TOD table To select the appropriate route list and to assign it to a specific TOD table highlight the route list you want then drag and drop it into the Time column of the named time of day table displaying in the TOD Table name Time of Day Table screen TOO List Time Route Lee mes ba 101113194 Figure 4 75 Drag and drop of route list into TOD table After you drop the route list into the Time column the following screen will display Configure Time Monda JE Figure 4 76 Configure Time screen layout The following information occurs in the Configure Time screen Day of list This list indicates the day of the week that this time of day table will begin controlling the route lists you have associated with it Time list This list indicates the time of day that this time of day table will begin controlling the route lists you have associated with it Note Clicking the up or down arrow after selecting the hour or minute value will increase or decrease this value When you have the route lists you want in the time of day table click Save in the File menu of the TOD Table screen Page 194 ACD Queues Use this function to configure ACD Automatic Call Distribution conditional call routing A queue is a stack for holding calls waiting to be handled when a trunk becomes available When an ACD queue is added to a
32. 14 User Attributes Secre Mini duna ti da errada caes 15 AS O A o a ca e al aetna 17 RN screeni as sene e E a N E A N 21 ALA SUP Sereen ipi narina ere AE a 22 R d ndancy setup Sis 23 Note It is recommended that you NOT use this feature ooooonnnococnoncccnoncnononcnononcninananinnnos 24 EN 25 Ns A A tad aucaaducetahs EA ee sn pede ma auni veka caus 26 Software Download ts 27 Backing up System Related Piles A A Ra a AA 31 MONITORING EQUIPMENT Guindos 35 MPRA ELON Acs ee tal ed Dae A tale Biles oc het A ts ad A uc che ag 35 Equipment Distri ads 35 ard related ICDS A a as iy ese dae 35 Powersupply Cardin Ad 42 Updating Card AUS viii e E RE AEA E RERE ARS 44 O A A E Satay Sessa E Ra EE TEES 45 A NR 47 A ore conn suseadlst ai aean ca RN oath NNN a Cat Sek hha oa 49 Puttine SIMIMinto BEL y 10 miis iii 52 Putting SIMM Out OF SCryicevcciacscadecess piro aedesacacedscecuanedcuds SEEK TE REEERE 52 COMI SUTIN DISPO ina 52 EECa nen OS 56 Updating Card ds rato 61 DI e aunts ee hdl ce uch 61 Cia Fault A e od Eno e a 61 Putting Tl card In SERVICE ind da an adidas 61 Putting TA card to e a e de R 61 Returning TI Gard t0 acu ve aa 62 BN A ose essed A A 63 Updating card stats dsd 67 Querying Fault LOG iii leia a Ee ds 67 Cleans Fault Lordi losa iii terio eses 67 Putting E lSEard i Service A truaseca tens aaah eh taste tle de 68 Putting El Card o t of SErViCe siii diria 68 Returning El card to active SAUS air r n 68
33. 24 Span 009 24 Span 010 24 Span 011 24 Span 012 24 Span 013 24 e Span 014 24 see Span 015 24 Close Figure 5 18 Carrier Answer Query Screen Under Maintenance click Carrier Answer Query to activate this screen E2 Connected to E2 Host LOCALHOST File Equipment PE System Admin 557 Switch Status View Alarms Span Channel state Carrier Answer Query Raw Command My Documents pd System Update EXNET Management Logs Figure 5 19 Carrier Answer Query screen activation Page 245 The following fields are displayed Spans From To All in service spans are displayed During Previous Days Hours Minutes Valid values are 1 48 days 1 24 hours or 1 60 minutes Span s with one or more unanswered channels All applicable channels are displayed View Details By highlighting a span then clicking on the View Details button you will see the following screen l Channel Details x Query results for span 10 at 12 07 04 11 06 58 Channel Details Moo 12 06 04 14 52 18 None NA Mo 12 06 04 14 52 18 None NA Mo 12 06 04 14 52 18 None NA Mos 12 06 04 14 52 18 None NA Mos 12 06 04 14 52 18 None NA Mos 12 06 04 14 52 18 None NA Mos 12 06 04 14 52 18 None NA Mo 12 06 04 14 52 18 None NA Mos 12 06 04 14 52 18 None NA Mos 12 06 04 14 52 18 None NA Mio 12 06 04 14 52 18 None NA Mi 12 06 04 14 52 18 None NA Mr 12 06 04 14 52 18 None NA Mi 12 06 04 14 52 18 None NA Refresh
34. 2H O 3 40 z If the host software is NOT running then click on the E2 Host icon to begin Figure 2 2 E2 Host Icon for launching host Page 11 Launching the E2 GUI The E2 GUI should be launched on a separate computer from the E2 Host Click on the E2 GUI icon to begin 17 E2 GUI Figure 2 3 E2 GUI Icon You will be prompted to enter the name or IP address of the host computer Connecting to E2 Host ES Name or IP address of the E2 Host localhost coca Figure 2 4 Name IP Address Screen Page 12 The E2 Eagle launch screen will then appear Loading Route Lists Li AO ooo Figure 2 5 E2 Launching Screen Then you will be prompted to login by entering your Name and Password Name Password Disconnect Figure 2 6 Login Screen At this point the main E2 GUI menu will appear E2 Connected to E2 Host LOCALHOST File Equipment Maintenance System Admin 557 ISDN Routing Options Window Help ERA A A EA A AA A A A EA Figure 2 7 E2 GUI Main Menu Page 13 Password Management Screen Under System Admin select Password Management The Password Management screen displays the user names and access privileges that you assign in the User Attributes screen see Figure 2 3 User Attributes screen layout Password Management xi User Name Figure 2 8 Password Management screen layout Clicking Password Management in the System Admin menu
35. A B C D and symbol amp without quotes Note The same translation principles apply here as for a digit table s Digit Xlate 1 field see Digit Xlate 1 field This field indicates the maximum number of concurrent calls that can use the translation resulting from a match of their incoming numbers with this digit lookup entry Your required input is limited to a number between zero default no limit and 99 Nature of Address field The Nature of Address is used to change the nature of address to match the carrier s requirements Typically do not use or use Spare Spare no indications 950 call form LE Carrier public station or end office International number International number operator requested National number operator requested National significant number Page 172 No number present cut through call to carrier No number present operator requested Subscriber number Subscriber number operator requested Test line test code Viewing all digit lookup entries in a Pre Translation table Once you click the Pre Translation Table Attributes screen s OK button the digit lookup entry you have added or changed will display in the Digit Tables screen scrollable if the screen is more than full across the row of the Digit Lookup representing that digit lookup entry This row divides into columns that incorporate the meanings if not the exact labels of the Digit Table Attributes screen s attributes for Di
36. CICs menu will activate the SS7 CIC Options screen the SS7 CIC screen itself is activated by clicking the SS7 CICs button in the Main Menu Tool Bar SS7 Channels File as CIC Management Create CIC Group Delete CIC Group 01051 003 047 001 01052 003 047 001 E 000 04 T1 01053 003 047 001 5000 05 T1 01054 003 047 001 BEB nnn ae trad mar anan man ana Figure 4 39 CIC Options screen activation Note Double clicking a specific CIC will also activate the SS7 CIC Options screen Dragging a box around specific CICs will select all CICs within the box that is the range of CICs will be continuous Start this box to the right of text in the window s leftmost column then drag it leftward up or down if the entire window is filled with columns if the window does not have columns extending to the right side of the window start this box beyond the rightmost column then drag it leftward up or down Also pressing SHIFT and clicking on specific CICs will select these CICs and all CICs in between that is the range of CICs will be continuous Alternatively pressing CTRL and Page 150 For Span line For Channel line RFS Format list clicking on specific CICs will select only these specific CICs that is the range of CICs will be discontinuous Right clicking a selected CIC then selecting Configure Options will also activate the SS7 CIC Options screen The options you select in the SS7 CIC Op
37. Conf Bridge indicates that only seven connections to the conference can have both speaking and listening privileges VRU No Answer Timeout field and used checkbox CPA buttons This field and box when checked indicates the number of seconds that must pass before a caller hears a VRU message saying the call cannot be completed Your optional input is limited to a number between 18 and 120 zero displays when this feature is not used Note This feature requires a Host compatible VRU computer and applies only to channels having a Type 3 completion type Note This feature requires a Host compatible VRU computer and applies only to channels having a Conf Bridge completion type These buttons indicate whether this resource group is subject to CPA Call Progress Analysis The CPA feature uses the VIC switch DSP CPA resource for call progress analysis While many users have not had successful results with this resource and it is recommended that it is disabled there may be instances where it is found useful If it is used perform extensive testing Your required input is limited to one of the following choices e Enable This value indicates this resource group is subject to CPA e Disable default This value indicates this resource group is not subject to CPA Page 167 Play ANI 900 Prompt to Conference Bridge This new feature gives you the capability of playing an announcement before entering a conference bridge If this b
38. DSPn lists DSP Simm Configure DTMF Gu Figure 3 15 DSP SIMM Configure screen layout The following information appears in the DSP SIMM Configure screen These lists indicate how a selected digital signal processor handles bong CPA CPG DTMF MFR1 and MFR2 tone signaling or how it handles conferences of callers who can both speak and listen as well as callers who can only listen Your required input is limited to the following choices Bong A DSP can simultaneously generate a bong tone prompt subject to A law on up to 16 channels if DSP ONE model or six channels if MFDSP model per node of your EXS Switch Bong u DSP can simultaneously generate a bong tone prompt subject to u law on up to 16 channels if DSP ONE model or six channels if MFDSP model per node of your EXS Switch Conf Mixed DSP can support up to 34 simultaneous Conferences bridging four seven speakers listeners if DSP ONE model or only one Conference bridging four seven speakers listeners if MFDSP model subject in part to A law and in part to u law Conxfer u DSP can support up to 14 simultaneous Conferences bridging four seven speakers listeners and a channel limited number of listeners if DSP ONE model or only one Conference bridging four seven speakers listeners and a channel restricted number of listeners if MFDSP model subject to u law Conxfer A DSP can support up to 14 simultaneous Conferences bridging four seven speaker
39. Day Routing e Uses an Application Programming Interface API over an Ethernet network for seamless integration with database applications Several pre packaged database applications such as Smart Calling Card a k a TAC for Total Access Card Smart Callback a k a International Callback and Smart Long Distance a k a as ANI PIN integrate with E2 for delivery and management of enhanced services e Offers an open flexible API for implementing new enhanced services applications The message set allows database access and call processing decisions external from the Host e Uses multiple network protocols that allow you to build call processing applications Several types of call routing capabilities are available in the Host Basic call routing uses a digit matching process on incoming dialed digits Dialed digits are collected by means of incoming parameters and Inseize Control The Host supports DTMF MFR1 and MFR2 digit collection and generation as well as ISDN PRI D Channel signaling e Provides a digit match operation that points each incoming call to a Route List The Route List can be a Time of Day route Each Route List can contain up to 20 Resource Groups Digit translations are available for both called ANI and calling party digits received on the incoming call Digits can be added changed or deleted from the match Page 3 What s New 2006 7 Version 4 7 The following are enhancements made since the previous
40. E EEn ESR ERE 160 VRU Cas Code Prompts esatea wide ev sidan e ue pala eae a aay 161 Resource Groups Grouping Channels iniciadas sates suaedeacta sedes codicia 162 Dragging amp dropping channels CICs into a resource grOUP ccoconnoccnoccnonnnonnnononcnonennonccnnnnnnnon 163 Changing hunt order it A eee 163 Exporting and Importing Resource Group Configuration ooooconnoccconononnnonnnononcn conan nona nono ncnns 164 Assigning attributes to a resource QTOUP eecceesseceeseceeseceeaeeceeaeeceeaeeceeceeceeeeeceeeeecsteeeeeaeee 165 Pre Translation Tables dao 170 ANI Tables for ANI Code Valdano a 174 Index Tables torANU Code Y ad OO ri dida 177 The NPA Table for Inter Intra State Determination ooooonocccnoncccnononnononcnononcnnnnncconnnccononcconnnccnnnos 180 The Master Route Table for NPA NXX Routing occoocccnoncccnoncnononcnononcnnnnncnononocnnnnononnnanonnnccnnnos 181 Displaying only NPA NXXSs with ENTES ii A ii 183 Inter Intra State Routing Menu sanidad sans sadaa seagate Vania insi ei 184 Channel Features Assigning Features to ChamnelS oooonnocccnncccconcccnonnnononcnonnncncnnncnonnnccnnnnccnnnnos 186 Overview New Pe aires ts A is 186 o Mere Rene Perr pete ent Pee rr tan RET anne rsh tee S eat Pay PROORTE Pom he Crean E E en ete eh 186 Viewing cattres forall Channels rial 192 Time of Day Day Of Week ROU 8 3 cc sisccessccedcatisasteavedenecaiscanetatecs sages deb eceraseaeaansauedaataas seen nate 193 ACD OUSUS nn cdta 195 P
41. EXS Switch Node does not display in a multinode EXS Switch Node will display together with an automatically generated number identifying the node Last Card Status line This line indicates in MM DD YY HH MM SS format when this DSP card s status was last updated Page 50 Card Status line This line indicates whether this DSP card is in service has suffered faults has good memory and or has good configuration data as well as how it was last reset One or more of the following messages might occur e Reset by insertion An insertion of this DSP card in the chassis caused this card s last reset e Reset by software A taking of this DSP card out of service then putting it back in service from the Host or a powering down then up of the entire chassis or a fault in this card caused this card s last reset e Reset by button A push of this DSP card s RESET button caused this card s last reset e OUT OF SERVICE BY SWITCH An EX CPU card has reported this DSP card to be out of service If this card s dipswitch 3 is set to ON if another DSP card does not have this same message and if resetting this card does not remove this message you must swap this card and call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately In service This DSP card is in service e CONFIG DATA INVALID The configuration data for this DSP card has been lost and has not been downloaded from the Host e FAULTS LOGGED One or more faults hav
42. Hosts These Incoming Types were developed to decrease call setup time between several tandem offices that have technical discrepancies with standard Feature Group D interfaces The following figure shows how each Incoming Type is used and its relationship to the network Figure A 1 Tandem Group The incoming types detailed in this appendix are listed in alphabetical order Most of the incoming types listed include a brief description of the actual type followed by the Incoming Digit or String Format Contact your E2 technical representative if you wish to use this type This incoming type logs in with an assigned log in code The ACD Monitor supervisor accepts calls from an attendant when the attendant dials O The ACD monitor is able to take an incoming call and perform all functions of the attendant Page A 4 ANI 10 DNIS 7 This incoming type supports Feature Group D channels from MCI ANI 10 DNIS 7 also supports several PBXs not designed to handle standard MF type dialing Inseize Control Instructions Incoming Rule ANI 10 DNIS 7TL Attendant Incoming Digit Format ANI DNIS e Generates inseize acknowledgment Receives stage N address data e Reports incoming call with digits e Waits for host control message strings 2 digit type DTMF method FIXED number of digits 9 method TERM_DIGIT terminator STAR_KEY This incoming type supports Feature Group D channels from MCI Similar to AN
43. ISDN Card Figure 4 20 ISDN D Channel Parameters screen activation The following information appears in the ISDN D Channel Parameters screen RFS Format list This list indicates how a Request for Service is formatted for this D Channel Your required input is limited to the following choices e BCD Binary Coded Decimal default This value indicates a Request for Service is formatted in four bit digits on this D Channel e Formatted IE This value indicates a Request for Service is formatted as a data field in a Layer 3 message on this D Channel E 01 Connection Type list This list indicates the standard connection type to which this D channel conforms Your required input is limited to the following choices e 0l AT amp T 4ESS Q 931 PRI User Side default This value indicates the D Channel conforms to the AT amp T 4ESS standard for ISDN PRI as a user in the User Network interface and will exchange Q 931 specified call control messages at 64 Kbps with any switch conforming to this standard e 02 AT amp T SESS Q 931 PRI User Side Custom This value indicates the D Channel conforms to the AT amp T 5ESS standard for ISDN PRI as a user in the User Network Interface and will on connection exchange Q 931 specified call control messages at 64 Kbps with any switch conforming to this standard e 03 Northern Tel DMS 100 Q 931 PRI User Side Custom This value indicates the D Channel conforms to the Nort
44. ISDN PRI Card The ISDN PRI card s purpose is to control calls on voice bearing B Channels in T1 and or El spans of your EXS Switch This control occurs through the setting up and eventually the tearing down of these calls in a separate data bearing D Channel one of 32 provided by the ISDN PRI card rather than within each B Channel To communicate with ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network devices in the voice network the ISDN PRI card must create data messages for and interpret data messages from these network devices Software resident in the ISDN PRI card effects this communication You need only assign parameters for one or more D Channel s including its span and its channel in that span you need only assign attributes for remaining channels in that span which automatically become B Channels At your option you can assign a single D Channel to control up to 10 T1 spans of B Channels and assign a second D Channel to one of these other spans as a backup to the first D Channel Provided you have two ISDN PRI cards in adjacent slots of the same chassis connected by an ISDN redundant I O device you can make one card active and the other standby This relationship assures that one card the standby card can assume control of ISDN messaging should the other card the active card fail The ISDN PRI Card screen enables you to determine the status of an ISDN PRI card as well as to configure ISDN D Channels and to establish IS
45. If the host does not have redundancy enabled the host should be designated as Server Failing to do so will result in delay in establishing connection to the switch or failure to connect to the switch OK Cancel Apply Figure 2 17 Redundancy Setup screen Warning The running of two different versions of software on the active and standby Hosts is unprecedented Dynamis Switching specifically states in product manuals that the same software must be installed on both Hosts Dynamis does not provide any guarantee that a failover from the active to the standby will function properly Dynamis Switching will not provide any support if a problem should arise until both Hosts are running the same version of software and the problem occurs again Dynamis Switching only tests redundancy with the same version on both Hosts Note Hardware installation of two Matrix CPU cards is required Refer to the Installation section of the Excel Hardware Manual Only one card is active at any given time the other is in a standby state If for any reason the first card fails the EXS Switch automatically sends a changeover message to the standby Calls are not interrupted during the changeover process Client and Server once operational are always changing No one machine is designated as either the Client or the Server The Client initiates communication between the Hosts and the Server is always in a waiting state When setting up
46. Incoming Digit Format Incoming Rule Inseize Control Instructions Feature Grp D2 Incoming Digit Format Incoming Rule This incoming type indicates the North American Feature Group D terminating channel Stage 1 e String 1 KP II ANI ST e String 2 KP Dialed Number ST e First String Contains the II digits and 7 to 10 digit ANI e Second String Contains the dialed number stages 1 strings 2 digit type MFR1 method use KP and ST string 1 method use KP and ST string 2 Generate inseize acknowledgment wink 1 Receive stage 1 digits Generate wink 2 Report incoming call with address data Wait for host control This incoming type is similar to Feature Group D except for the confirmation wink Feature Group D2 uses a different wink timer enabling the user to change the duration of the wink without affecting the system flash and wink timers Stage e String 1 KP II ANI ST e String 2 KP Dialed Number ST e First String Contains the II digits and 7 to 10 digit ANI e Second String Contains the dialed number stages 1 strings 2 digit type MFR1 method use KP and ST string 1 method use KP and ST string 2 Page A 16 Inseize Control Instructions Feature Grp D3 Incoming Digit Format Incoming Rule Inseize Control Instructions Generate inseize acknowledgment wink 1 Receive stage 1 digits Generate wink 2 Report incoming call with address data Wait for host co
47. Mic Dt 08 zone2 2898928 ene fi ic De 100 Master Defar 289891 amp Dic Pt Pre translation Tables 2898898 Option Digit Table X ic EE Pa Table 289888 amp 00 new2005 v icl RE ANI Table a Route Table 00 new2005 y Ac MM index Table 2898568 Lookup Type 05 Seer are ic 2898858 ste ic 2898848 DNIS Mic 2898838 5 DISI tor E hd 100 Master Default Mic 4 gt 4 101 Master Route Table _ Figure 4 68 Selecting 101 Master Route Table Configuration To select Master Tables click on the Master Table button at the top of the screen The Master Table is loaded with all NPA NXX combinations set to default routing Thus the exceptions must either be manually or bulk loaded into the Master Table Bulk loading is performed by selecting File then Import To set the default routing select the Default Option to Digit Table and select the appropriate table from the Option list Page 181 File Tables Configure npa 213 nxx 626 _y 100 Master De v 00 new2005 Default Option Digit Table NXX Digt xlate I ANIfCLIXiate Limit Opt Route 01 Qwest Routing t Inter Route In 626 XX 0 02 new Table 627 xX 0 03 time 628 xx 0 04 DNIS 629 XX 0 Route List m Quest ka a ri 630 XX 0 631 XX 0 Master Default 632 KX 0 633 xx o 634 XX 0 635 xX 0 Route List E Paetec 636 xX 0 637 xX 0 638 xx 0 639 XX 0 640 xX 0 641
48. None is used only the dialed number is outpulsed DTMF only If there is ANI on the incoming call or data is present in the ANI Xlate field of the digit table they are not outpulsed This ANI CLI type completes calls to a TOPS Traffic Operator Position System circuit The incoming call is FGD with II ANI and dialed number The II and ANI are used for the outgoing call Stage 1 e String 1 KP Dialed Number ST2P e String 2 KP II ANI ST2P First String Contains the 7 to 10 digit dialed number Second String Contains the II digits and the 7 digit ANI Overview The ANI is only seven digits and may be translated in the Digit Table Only the last seven digits of the ANI is sent regardless of how many are received or translated Page B 5 Appendix C Completion Types Overview The Call Completion Type determines how a channel signals and outpulses to the far end on an outgoing call The signaling is any combination of seizure outpulsing and connects methods Completion Type List 900 Attendant ACD Logoff ACD Logon ACD Monitor Atten Login Attendant The following Completion types are listed in alphabetical order This completion type is similar to the Attendant Completion type except a prompt message can be played prior to the attendant receiving the call This completion type is used in conjunction with Excel Switching s ANI 900 Server Client This completion type logs off the channel The station
49. OF SERVICE button makes this EXNET ring unavailable for call processing Reconfiguring the EXNET ring Clicking the EXNET Management screen s RECONFIGURE button reestablishes this EXNET ring s existing configuration 93 4 Configuring Channels Routes amp Translations Introduction The Host s chief function is to instruct the EXS Switch to receive a call coming into the switch translate the signals and put it onto a channel leaving the switch in a manner that will cause the call to reach its intended destination For the Host to perform this function you must configure the Host not only to recognize the inbound signals that are relevant to the call but also to recognize and perhaps manipulate information that signals where and how this call should be routed CONFIGURATION SEQUENCE FOR ROUTING amp TRANSLATION IMPORTANT Once you are familiar with the following steps you will be able to effectively configure routing and translation STEP 1 Configure and Put T1 E1 ISDN SS7 Channels Into Service Configure and put into service channels in spans to from the Switch s e Tl cards see T1 C onfiguring and Putting T1 Channels into Service e El Cards see E1 Configuring and Putting El Channels into Service e Set up ISDN see ISDN Configuring and Putting ISDN Channels into Service e Set up SS7 see SS7 Configuring and Putting SS7 Channels into Service STEP 2 Group Outbound Channels Into Resource G
50. OFF Zip FRENNA 22 T1 Collect Dinits FRM Wink Start Wink Start OFF in Figure 4 3 T1 Tone Channel Attributes screen layout Selecting one or more channels of one or more T1 spans displaying in the Tone Channels screen then clicking Configure Tone Channel Attributes in this screen s Channels menu will activate the 71 Tone Channel Attributes screen the Tone Channels screen itself is activated by clicking the Tone TRUNKS button in the Main Menu Tool Bar Tone Channels File Rama EF EE in Star Dial Clear attributes wink Start Edit Sig Rev Filters IME Edit Sig Rev Timers Wink Start Edit Sig Xmit Timers Wink Start 8 04 11 Collect Digits Egem Wink Start fine008 05 T1 Collect Digits E amp M Wink Start Figure 4 4 T1 Tone Channel Attributes screen activation Note Double clicking a specific T1 channel will also activate the TI Tone Channel Attributes screen Page 103 Incoming Type list Channel Type list Dragging a box around specific T1 channels will select all channels within the box that is the range of channels will be continuous Start this box to the right of text in the window s leftmost column then drag it leftward up or down if the entire window is filled with columns if the window does not have columns extending to the right side of the window start this box beyond the rightmost column then drag it leftward up or down Also pressing SHIFT and clicking on specific T1 channels will
51. SYS Contains the trunk timer information for all span and channels TMR_4X SYS Contains information used by Startup to configure the timers XCLUE SYS Contains exclusion files and trunk assignments information E2 files are identified by the E2E filename extension The E2 files within the Host are as follows E21_NT E2E Contains task module names for message passing E22_NT E2E Contains startup messages for all tasks E23 E2E Contains operator menus for the system E24_3X E2E Contains operator text strings for the system E25_NT E2E Contains operator text popup menus for the system E26_3X E2E Contains Page 33 operator prompts for the system CALL_CMP E2E Contains call completion types information IN_GRP_4X E2E Contains incoming start dial information Page 34 3 Monitoring Equipment Introduction The Host s chief function is to instruct the EXS Switch to put a call coming into the switch onto a trunk leaving the switch in a manner that will cause the call to reach its intended destination For the Host to perform this function you must e know what resources you have in your EXS Switch e put these resources into service with required configurations o assure these resources are in a proper state and e be able to take these resources out of service for reconfiguration or replacement These resources take the form of hot swappable components including various cards of surface mounted e
52. Sequential Sequential ype 3 557 Type 3 Sequentia E Eso ISDN ISDN Boo Tone Network soz Tone Network c Eme Tone Network Eo Tone Network Tone Type3 Busy Linear 0 Sequential Sequential Sequential Sequential Sequential Linear Route List Resource Group 219213 R E E0 Ri Ea miso Figure 4 90 Drag and drop of resource groups into route list Note Dragging a box around specific channels will select all channels within the box that is the range of channels will be continuous Start this box to the right of text in the window s leftmost column then drag it leftward up or down if the entire window is filled with columns if the window does not have columns extending to the right side of the window start this box beyond the rightmost column then drag it leftward up or down Also pressing SHIFT and clicking on specific channels will select these channels and all channels in between that is the range of channels will be continuous Alternatively pressing CTRL and clicking on specific channels will select only these specific channels that is the range of channels will be discontinuous Once you have dropped resource groups into a route list you can change their listed order by dragging and dropping them one or more than one at a time to a preferred position in the list This change of order will alter the hunt for a resource group having available outgoing channels When you have the resource gro
53. This value indicates the Host treats incoming numbers matching this digit lookup entry as Smart Long Distance calls and invokes processing logic to handle such calls see Smart Long Distance User s Manual for further details Callback This value indicates the Host treats incoming numbers matching this digit lookup entry as Smart Callback calls and invokes processing logic to handle such calls CB Menu This value indicates the Host treats incoming numbers matching this digit lookup entry as calls from Smart Callback callers who want prompting to change options in their accounts Listener This value indicates the Host treats incoming numbers matching this digit lookup entry as requiring access to a conference bridge with listen only privileges Route List This value indicates the Host treats incoming numbers matching this digit lookup entry as requiring access to the entry s associated route list which contains groups of outgoing channels that can be hunted for availability see Creating Alternate Routes for Calls for further details Page 218 Route Table list Lookup Type Comment SMR This function outpulses the SMR digits to the pager equipment The desired functionality is that the caller dials the 7 digit access number and E2 routes the call to the appropriate SMR When the SMR responds answers E2 then outpulses the 4 digit PIN at which point the caller is connected to the mobile subscriber Location of the 4 digit
54. a CSV file that specifies least cost routing to the cheapest three carriers As rates change or new carriers are added they simply rerun the macro and import the new file For more details contact your E2 Eagle technical representative Others e The Stage II digit file can hold 30 entries e SS7 support for the latest signaling codes and cards e Incoming Type FGB AMA has been added e Digit table options now include 08 Test Number for loopback test to telcos and SMR to handle that type of mobile calling e The digit table now includes a field for comments of up to 64 characters which can be imported and exported Page 7 System Management Concepts Equipment Screens The telephone connection resource of the hardware switching system is commonly referred to as a trunk When using the Host each trunk in the switching equipment is composed of a span ID and a channel ID A span is a telephone facility containing a number of channels assigned to each T1 El line card 24 channels in T1 spans 30 in El spans in the EXS Switch A Span ID is referred to as a Logical Span ID and must be assigned to properly perform any configuration routing or call processing All references to the trunks in the system are identified by span and channel with the span being the Logical ID The key to the processing of calls is the interaction of tables that are created in the system Tables provide the interaction between the equipment software
55. a reminder to your personnel regarding this SS7 link set Your optional input is limited to 24 alphanumeric characters Viewing attributes of all SS7 links Once you click the 557 Link Attributes screen s OK button the SS7 link attributes you have added or changed will display in the SS7 Card screen across the row of the Link identifying this SS7 link This row divides into columns that incorporate the meanings if not the exact labels of the SS7 Link Attributes screen s parameters for the selected SS7 link In addition this row includes an ST1 an ST2 and an ST3 column together indicating in real time the state of the link The ST1 column can show the following values e A This value indicates the link is available for SS7 messaging e F This value indicates the link has failed for some reason e U This value indicates the link is not available for SS7 messaging The ST2 column can show the following values e LI This value indicates the destination is locally inhibited from exchange of SS7 messaging Note Clicking the Inu1B1T button will cause the selected link to show this status e RI This value indicates the destination is remotely inhibited from exchange of SS7 messaging The ST3 column can show the following value e RB This value indicates the link remotely blocked If the link is available for SS7 messaging it will show a green icon any other state or combination of states will create a red icon for th
56. and application The following are examples of some of the more important features in the System The use of the term equipment in this section relates to the cards installed in the switch The Host provides configuration screens for the following cards El SDN MFDSP SS7 Tl Each card installed in the EXS Switch is recognized by the Host The Host presents a configuration screen for each card The Host queries the switch during initial power up and constructs an equipment list showing each piece of installed equipment By selecting a card from the list the detailed information about that card is displayed on the screen It is from this screen that Logical Span IDs Service Circuit and ISDN information is configured The Logical ID assignment is critical to all other tables because it associates spans and channels to physical circuits Resource Group and Route List Configuration Tables You can specify how each trunk span and channel in the system operates Individual tables include Trunk Types Trunk Features Query Timers and Digit Tables each presenting a unique screen When the El option is added to the Host an additional category is displayed for configuring the El trunks The Resource Group and Route List tables are created to form hunting and trunk selection methods for routing outgoing calls A Resource Group can be a single trunk or a group of trunks up to 48 T1 60 El trunks Time of Day TOD Routing Time of Day r
57. card s Fault Log example Putting T1 card in service Clicking the 71 Card screen s IN SERVICE button makes this T1 card available for call processing Note TIf you are putting the TIcard in service after having configured it and taken it out of service the Host will download the T1 configuration data the card lost when you took it out of service Putting T1 card out of service Clicking the 71 Card screen s OUT OF SERVICE button makes this T1 card unavailable for call processing Note You will want to take this card out of service if you need to test the card or if you discover the card is faulty Taking this card out of service automatically clears all T1 configuration data and also takes voice channels out of service Page 61 Returning T1 card to active status Clicking the T7 Card screen s Active checkbox returns this once failed T1 card back to active status Page 62 E1 Card The El card s purpose is to convey up to 30 sampled and quantized voice calls and perhaps call control data over each El span of your EXS Switch to and from voice networks and perhaps data networks outside North America and Japan To be conveyed over an El span voice calls must first be setup for connection and finally torn down once completed The setting up and tearing down of a voice call can occur through an exchange within that call s channel of the tones and bit indications that make up MFR2 channel associated signali
58. change of order will alter the hunt for an available outgoing channel When you have the channels you want in the resource group and they are listed in the order you want click Save in the File menu of the Outgoing Resource Groups screen Page 163 Exporting and Importing Resource Group Configuration New in version 4 7 In addition to exporting resource groups one can now also import them To import or export all resource group data select File Import Export from the Resource Groups screen Configure Sig Completion Type Options No of Chan Span Chan Print Tone Busy Linear 0 Tone Type3 Linear 1 Export br ISDN ISDN Linear 1 Import 3 ISDN ISDN Linear o Exit Tone Network Sequential 24 egvune Tone Type3 Linear 1 Ph 00 01 Tone Type2 Linear 2 Reorder Tone Reorder Linear 0 Ei Ringing Tone Ringing Linear 0 iss Span 6 557 557 Type 3 Linear 0 iss Span 7 ss 557 Type 3 Linear 0 E Tone Span4 Tone Type3 Linear 24 Figure 4 49 Import Export Resource Groups You will then be prompted for a location for the file The default file name is ResourceGroup CSV Below is an example of an exported resource group displayed in Dynamis corresponding to the above configuration GROUP NAME SIGNALING TYPE COMPLETION TYPE OPTIONS CHANNELS Busy Tone Busy Linear In Queue Tone Type 3 Linear 0000 06 ISDN Span 3 ISDN ISDN Linear IVR Span 1 Tone Network Sequential 0010 00 0010 01 Ph 00 01 Tone Type 2 Linear 0000 03 000
59. digits Receive stage 3 digits Generate backward A6 Report incoming call with digits Wait for host control message Page A 13 El R2 4 Incoming Digit Format Incoming Rule This incoming type may be supported in countries outside North America e Stage 1 Collects dialed number e First String Contains up to 15 digits Incoming digits of Stage 1 will be displayed in String 1 of the Host s debugging screen String 1 will be sent as the dialed number stages 1 strings 1 digit type MFR2 method compelled Inseize Control Instructions Ercsn Cell Incoming Digit Format Incoming Rule Generate inseize acknowledgment Receive stage 1 digits Receive stage 2 digits Receive stage 3 digits Generate backward A6 Report incoming call with digits Wait for host control message This incoming type terminates an Ericsson Cellular channel The Feature Group D completion type must be used in order to conform to the Feature Group D specification The Excel Switch outpulses the digits and scans for a confirmation wink before connecting the call e Stage l e String 1 KP II ANI ST e String 2 KP DDDDDD XXXX ST First String Contains the II digits and 7 to 10 digit ANI Second String Contains a dummy dialed number of DDDDDD followed by a 4 digit CIC code The Host strips off the CIC code and saves for later use if required by an ANI flag The leading digits of DDDDDD are sent to the Digit Table for ro
60. displaying in the Tone Channels screen then clicking Edit Sig Rev Filters in this screens Channels menu will activate the Signaling Reception Filter Attributes screen the Tone Channels screen itself is activated by clicking the TONE TRUNKs button in the Main Menu Tool Bar Tone Channels Configure Configure Tone Channel Attributes Clear Attributes Edit Sig Rev Filters Edit Sig Rev Timers Edit Sig Xmit Timers BAnno ne iTi Callact Dinike Figure 4 7 Signaling Reception Filter Attributes screen activation Changing reception timers Dynamis Corporation configures reception timers with values specified in AT amp T Publication 43801 and Bellcore TR TSY 000506 You will need to change these default values only if networks to which your channels are connected do not follow these specifications Warning Changing timers can stop call processing Dynamis Corporation strongly advises you to consult WCS or Dynamis Customer Engineering personnel before changing timer values Page 108 Signaling Reception Timer ttributes 8 a N Q o N Q a 8 A Q a 8 a oo 5000 EEN po foo po a ooo ooo 32000 EN Figure 4 8 Signaling Reception Timer Attributes screen layout Selecting one or more channels of one or more T1 spans displaying in the Tone Channels screen then clicking Edit Sig Rev Timers in this screen s Channels menu will activate the Signaling Reception Timer Attribute
61. does not receive any calls from the ACD queue to which it is assigned This completion type is used in conjunction with Excel Switching s ANI 900 Server Client This completion type restores the station to service The station can now receive ACD calls This completion type is used in conjunction with Excel Switching s ANI 900 Server Client This completion type enables the span channel assigned to bridge on to an Attendant Must be used with the Supervisor Incoming type as described This completion type is similar to the Attendant Completion type except it allows for the attendant to log in first Must be used with the Attendant Incoming type This completion type is similar to the Operator Completion type but when the attendant goes off hook a dial tone is heard and a login code must be pulsed This completion type must be used with the Attendant Incoming type Page C 1 Auto Term Busy Conf Bridge CPA Type 1 Dlay Type 1 Dlay Type 3 FGB AMA This completion type is a ringdown or hotline circuit This completion type is used in conjunction with the incoming type of Auto Term This completion type completes the call with a busy tone It is automatically used as an overflow condition for all channels in a busy state This Completion type plays the busy tone to the caller Forward call processing does take place The busy tone is generated by the MFDSP card if at least one DSP is configured for Call Progress Generatio
62. followed by a 1 then the number from the digit table Stage 1 or XlateStagel field Stage 1 e String 1 KP I ANI ST e String 2 KP 101 XXXX 1 7 10D ST First String Contains the first string of the incoming ANI Second String Contains the dialed number which includes a 101 plus the incoming CIC code followed by a 1 then the 7 or 10 digit dialed number Incoming e Strip off CIC code e Send balance of first string to Digit Table Outgoing e Send incoming ANI string 1 e Send a 101 followed by the incoming CIC followed by a 1 then the dialed number string 2 Note Type 7 completion type should be used in order to conform with the Feature Group D specification Type 7 outpulses the digits and scans for a confirmation wink before connecting the call This ANI CLI type conforms to the Bellcore TR NPL 000258 Specification for Equal Access International Signaling International Feature Group D The international signaling is similar to the North American signaling except for a predial stage of digits The first stage to be outpulsed includes the international routing code The code signals the distant end that the call is international The distant end acknowledges the international routing with a wink After the wink is detected by the switch the last two strings are outpulsed The switch again scans for a confirmation wink Once the wink is detected the call is connected through Stage 1 e String 1
63. is required Contact Dynamis Customer Engineering if considering this feature Music On Hold does not work in all applications This completion type is similar to Type 3 in call processing The A flag in the CDRs are generated automatically with the call being answered This completion type should be used on FXO channels that do not provide answer supervision This completion type is similar to Type 4 in call processing The A flag in the CDRs are generated automatically with the call being answered This completion type should be used on FXO channels that do not provide answer supervision This completion type allows for out of band signaling through a communications port on the Host One application for this completion type would be with the use of a VRU This completion type is used with ACD and must be used with the Operator Incoming type which is described in Appendix A When the Operator port goes off hook the span channel immediately goes to an IDLE state making this span channel available for calls from queue This completion type indicates that the dialed number is set up in the resource group name Page C 3 Reorder Ringing SS7 Type 3 Tandem FGD Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 This completion type indicates that the call completes with a reorder tone This Completion type plays the reorder tone to the caller Forward call processing does take place The reorder tone is generated by the MFDSP card if at lea
64. major releases in 2004 and 2005 Enhancements include Major Routing Enhancements The E2 Host has been significantly enhanced to support advanced routing including Intrastate and Interstate least cost routing is supported either based on the combination NPAs of the ANI Dialed Number or DNIS Dialed Number Intra and Inter LATA least cost routing by NPA_NXX is supported by using a Master Routing Table to handle all combinations of NPA and NXX Routing can be based on DNIS or ANI as an alternative to the dialed number or in addition to it as routing may be directed to multiple tables Routing based on ISDN cause codes including route advance and route to a VRU to play a message Routing can be specified on the inbound channel basis including routing by ANI DNIS destination number inter intra state routing and or account code billing by ANI Major Translation Enhancements Outbound translations previously limited to primary and secondary translations are now virtually unlimited This is due to Post Routing Options in the Resource Groups and the fact that digit tables can point to other digit tables based on ANI DNIS or dialed number before finally selecting the outbound Resource Groups Translation may also be configurable by inbound port due to the addition of Pre Translation Tables associated with Feature Groups and that Feature Groups may specify the appropriate Digit Table or Master Routing Table
65. offsets from zero An eight span El card for example has eight offsets numbered 0 through 7 Span ID list This list indicates the logical identity of the selected physical El span or offset holding channels you want to put into service Your required input is limited to the span IDs in this list Note Only Span IDs not already associated with an offset are listed Not Assigned checkbox This checkbox when checked deletes the specified span after you click the OK button Page 113 Cable ID field This field indicates an identity of this El span s physical cable Your optional input is limited to 14 alphanumeric characters Note A label on the cable matching this Cable ID will help you locate the cable if you need to move or replace it Carrier ID field This field indicates an identity of the carrier providing service to this El span Your optional input is limited to 14 alphanumeric characters Note The Carrier ID will help you determine who to call if you need to troubleshoot a problem on this El span Note New Feature The full Carrier ID and Cable ID is now displayed in the upper left corner of the Span Channel State screen Format 1 list leftmost This list indicates how coding occurs on this El span Your required input is limited to the following choices e AMI Alternate Mark Inversion default This value indicates a coding method that alternately inverts the polarity of successive ones that is marks
66. power supply module is supplying power to the chassis within tolerance One of the following messages will occur e OK This module is providing power to the chassis that is within tolerance e FAILED This module is providing power to the chassis that is out of tolerance Page 43 Note If this power supply card serves an EXS 1000 chassis disregard the status of modules 2 3 Warning Not replacing a power supply card that has modules out of tolerance can damage call processing cards and cause their operation to cease Excel Switching strongly advises you to replace a power supply card with one or more defective modules immediately Updating card status Clicking the Power Supply Card screen s UPDATE STATUS button after this screen has been active for a while will query this power supply card again to determine its current status then display this status in the Power Supply Card screen Page 44 Midplane The chassis midplane s purpose is to provide various data and other buses that can distribute power from the power supply to all cards in the chassis join I O cards with the processing cards in the chassis that control them e join redundant processing cards make I O cards available to other nodes on an EXNET ring The Midplane screen enables you to view the status of the midplane Figure 3 9 Midplane screen layout You can activate this screen by clicking Midplane in the Equipment List screen s
67. prompted for a location to import the file from The default file name is RouteList CSV Assigning Post Routing to a Route List s Resource Group To assign post routing select the Route List where you wish it applied then click on the Resource Group to select it then right click to see the option to modify Page 208 Route Lists outline File Route Lists Resource Route List Resource Group Type Post Route DNIS Translation ANI Translation 1000_T5T nr O E ca 7 Add Resource Group Ecc Delete Resource Group s Els Modify Resource Group ISDN Span 3 Elie rl ima BJ outline n a Figure 4 92 Modify Resource Group Within a Route List The following dialog box appears esource Groups Route Lists SS Cause Codes File Route Lists Resource Route List Resource Group Type Post Route DNIS Translation E 1000_TsT Ecc Ho pna Add Resource Group x mci BJ outline Resource Group otie a a Post Routing Option fie 5 Ph 00 01 RL Me Post Routing Cancel Wes reorder Bl rinaina Figure 4 93 Select Post Routing for a Resource Group All applicable post routing options are in listed in the drop down box and can be selected NOTE Once the Post Routing option is selected the Post Routing button can be clicked to go directly to configuration for that option Page 209 Digit Tables Digit Tables new2005 File Tables Attributes Overview New for 2007 Digi
68. protocol layer is managed on this El span Your required input is limited to the following choices e FE default This value indicates this E1 span is subject to El protocol Note If this El span connects to an VIC VRU you must select El You must select El if this span supports SS7 e ISDN This value indicates this El span is subject to Euro ISDN protocol Error Checking list leftmost This list indicates whether this El span is subject to a cyclic redundancy check CRC Your required input is limited to the following choices e CRC OFF default This value indicates this El span is not subject to a cyclic redundancy check Note If this El span connects to an VIC VRU you must select CRC OFF e CRC ON This value indicates this El span is subject to a cyclic redundancy check Note If you select ISDN in the leftmost Format 2 list you must select CRC ON If you select El in the leftmost Format 2 list to support SS7 traffic you must select CRC ON Error Checking list rightmost This list indicates whether this El span is subject to a far end block error FEBE Your required input is limited to the following choices e FEBE OFF default This value indicates this El span is not subject to a far end block error Note If this El span connects to an VIC VRU you must select FEBE OFF e FEBE ON This value indicates this El span is subject to a far end block error Note If you select IS
69. records and cannot be deleted because it is the current file being used by the system Note When disk space on the Host Computer becomes limited older files should be copied to other media and deleted from the hard drive The number of files capable of being actively stored on the Host s hard drive depends on the size of the files and the total amount of available disk space System Setup x Switch Setup Node Setup Redundancy Setup Alarm Setup CDR Setup Application Server Link Write CDR records to TCP IP port 9601 Yes No Write CDR records to log Yes C No CDR Date and Time format C System GMT Logged CDRs maximum age days 99 M Use custom fields CDA output record configuration List of Fields Record Layout DNIS Number Up Out Span Chan Trunk Grp 557 NOA Start Time Term Cause Code Billable Time Orig Cause Code Sus Niiratinn z Down ANE Nuimher zi Add Remove OK Cancel Apply Figure 2 13 CDR Setup screen To add a field click on the field on the left hand side then press the Add button To remove a field click on the field on the right hand side then press the Remove button To change the order of the output fields click on the field on the right hand side and click on the Up or Down buttons Page 18 The fields you may select are the following e Answer State NEW to version 4 7 o A Call was answered B Operator heard zip tone and hung up before call was co
70. represent equipment that may be installed in your EXS Switch Page 35 2 icon This icon represents various models of the digital signal processing card see DSP Card for details on the functionality monitorability and configurability of this kind of card Associated with this icon is the node if a multinode EXS Switch and slot number where the specified card resides KJ icon This icon represents various models of the El card see El Card for details on the functionality monitorability and configurability of this kind of card Associated with this icon is the node if a multinode EXS Switch and slot number where the specified card resides together with this card parenthetically listed span IDs tia icon This icon represents the EX CPU card see EX CPU Card for details on the functionality monitorability and configurability of this kind of card Associated with this icon is the node if a multinode EXS Switch and slot number where the specified card resides icon This icon represents the EXNET Controller card see EXNET Controller card for details on the functionality of this kind of card Associated with this icon is the node and slot number where the specified card resides together with the ID of the ring of which it is a part the number of packets it transfers per timeslot and an indication of whether the card both transmits X and receives R or just receives x icon This icon represents various models of the fan tr
71. screen to indicate a failed state Memory Test line This line indicates the result of a self test at the last status update of the integrity of ROM and RAM devices on this SS7 card The following messages can occur OK Test proved memory was reliable ROM CHECKSUM FAILED Test proved read only memory was unreliable You must swap this card and call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately RAM TEST FAILED Test proved random access memory was unreliable If resetting this card does not remove this message you must call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Page 83 Artwork Revision line This line indicates the revision level of this SS7 card s circuit design Serial Number line This line indicates the serial number of this SS7 card Software ROM line This line indicates the major then the minor revision of the ROM software that is the BIOS installed on this SS7 card Build line This line indicates the build number of the RAM software that is the System Software sometimes called pSOS downloaded from an EX CPU card to this SS7 card Note The Switch Status screen displays the actual version of this software Updating card status Clicking the SS7 Card screen s UPDATE STATUS button after this screen has been active for a while will query this SS7 card again to determine its current status then display this status in the SS7 Card screen Querying Fault Log Clicking the SS7 Card screen
72. the ACD queue The queue full trunk group can connect to a VRU for announcement or may be a tone trunk group such as reorder tone or busy tone To modify an existing ACD queue double click on the desired ACD queue The information appears in the ACD queue attributes screen To add create a new ACD queue press A The system prompts for a queue name size and the time in seconds before overflow Type in the information and press E The new queue appears in the ACD queue screen To delete an ACD queue select the desired ACD queue and press D A verification prompts appears Press Y to continue with the deletion or N to cancel the deletion process Page 198 Post Routing Options Different carriers often require different number formats for the DNIS ANI and or called number These formats can now be specified at the Resource Group level within each Route List which often corresponds to the carrier by assigning additional post routing translations after the digit table Previously the digit table could only translate by the primary and alternate route now translations are virtually unlimited as the digit table can point to other digit tables or route lists and finally post routing is applied based on the resource group within a route list The post routing table can add a prefix or suffix to the DNIS ANI and or called number and can present various ISDN and SS7 signaling types as specified below Adding Changing Post Ro
73. the chassis must be configured using this screen In the example below there are two chassis connected via EXNET with each chassis having one CPU card System Setup x CDR Setup Application Server Link Node Setup Redundancy Setup Alarm Setup Switch Setup Node ID Chassis No CPU 1 Fl 0 8336 192 168 10 1 0 0 0 0 1 6644 192 168 10 3 0 0 0 0 z El Configure OK Cancel Apply Figure 2 19 Node Setup screen Highlight the node ID and click on the Configure button The following screen appears In this example this shows the IP address of the single CPU 192 168 10 1 in node O and the IP address of the single CPU in node 1 192 168 10 3 thus this reflects a two switch system both switches with nonredundant CPUs Note contact your E2 Eagle representative for assistance in setting up nodes Configure Node x Node ID 1 Chasis No 0 Left Matrix 192 168 1 202 Right Matrix 192 168 1 209 Figure 2 20 Configure Node screen Page 26 Software Download Under the Administration Menu there is the Software Download option which allows for El PPL download License Download and Configuration Download E1 PPL Download screen The El PPL Download screen enables you to download Programmable Protocol Language PPL signaling files to the EXS Switch Excel Switch creates PPL files to tailor signaling used with El spans to match the variations found when connecting to different kinds
74. then the Info Digit presented will be 27 Calling Party Post Routing Options Calling Number Type Valid selections are Unknown International Number National Number Subscriber Number Abbreviated Number None For additional details contact your technical representative Calling Number Plan ID Valid selections are Unknown ISDN Number Plan Recommendation E 164 E 163 Telephony numbering plan Private numbering plan None For additional details contact your technical representative Page 201 Presentation Indicator Valid selections are Presentation is allowed Presentation is restricted Number not available due to interworking None For additional details contact your technical representative Screening Indicator Valid selections are User provided not screened User provided verified and passed User provided verified and failed Network Provided None For additional details contact your technical representative Called Party Post Routing Options Called Number Type Valid selections are Unknown International Number National Number Subscriber Number Abbreviated Number None For additional details contact your technical representative Called Number Plan ID Valid selections are Unknown ISDN Number Plan Recommendation E 164 E 163 Telephony numbering plan Private numbering plan None For additional details contact your technical representative Page 202 Present
75. to the named pre translation tables in this list Lookup Type list New for 2007 The options include ANI New for 2007 if this is selected when transferring to the specified digit table that digit table will perform a lookup based on the ANI of the caller and NOT the DNIS to perform routing and translation Note that the looked up entry will translate the ANI and DNIS as usual once looked up DNIS if this is selected lookup and routing will be based on the DNIS provided with the digits submitted to the digit table This is how lookup and routing was previously done DNIS Intrastate 1 0 Use the NPA of the DNIS and Dialed Number for lookup in the NPA table If the lookup contains the same values then route using the Digit Table specified in the IntraState Digit Table field If they are NOT the same values then route using the Digit Table specified in the Inter State Digit Table field ANI Intrastate 1 0 Use the NPA of the ANI and Dialed Number for lookup in the NPA table If the lookup contains the same values then route using the Digit Table specified in the IntraState Digit Table field If they are NOT the same values then route using the Digit Table specified in the Inter State Digit Table field Inter State Digit Table list Only displays if Inter Intra State was selected in the Lookup Type field Refer to Lookup Type list above for details Only valid digit tables will be displa
76. value indicates the outgoing seizure is denied e Odd Even This value indicates the incoming seizure is denied if either the OPC value is less than the DPC value and the CIC number is odd or the OPC value is greater than the DPC value and the CIC number is even ITU T Recommedation Q 767 This list indicates how frequently outgoing calls on this CIC undergo an automatic continuity check Your required input is limited to the following choices e 1 1 This value indicates that every call undergoes an automatic continuity check e 1 10 This value indicates that one out of every 10 calls undergoes an automatic continuity check e 1 12 This value indicates that one out of every 12 calls undergoes an automatic continuity check e 1 16 This value indicates that one out of every 16 calls undergoes an automatic continuity check e 1 2 This value indicates that one out of every two calls undergoes an automatic continuity check e 1 4 This value indicates that one out of every four calls undergoes an automatic continuity check e 1 6 This value indicates that one out of every six calls undergoes an automatic continuity check e 1 8 This value indicates that one out of every eight calls undergoes an automatic continuity check e None default This value indicates that no calls undergo an automatic continuity check This list indicates what SS7 message if any the responsible SS7 stack sends when the Host takes this CIC is out of ser
77. version 4 7 Either the System s local time can be specified or GMT Logged CDRs maximum age days This field indicates the number of days CDRs will be archived on the Host computer s hard drive The Host archives CDRs on a daily basis automatically deleting the oldest files after the specified number of days has been reached This Page 19 feature prevents the Host Computer s hard drive from running out of disk space by maintaining only the most current records in the system Your required input is limited to 0 99 days The default value is 0 Archived files remain stored on the hard disk until the number of days has been reached or you manually delete the files Note The Host Software does not allow you to delete the CDRtoday ICD file This file is in use and holds the CDRs for the current day s calls Page 20 Switch Setup screen This screen enables you to assign an IP Address to the EXS Switch and configure ACD event record and call processing activity debug information output System Setup x Alarm Setup CDR Setup Application Server Link Switch Setup Node Setup Redundancy Setup ACD Event Log port 9607 C Online Offline Remote Switch Log port 9608 Online Offline Single switch Node O CPU 1 IP address port 12610 192 168 1 201 CPU 2 IP address port 12610 0 0 D D Figure 2 14 Switch Setup screen ACD Event Log field This field indicates the output o
78. voice channels out of service Returning E1 card to active status Clicking the El Card screen s Active checkbox returns this once failed El card back to active status Page 68 EX CPU Card The EX CPU card s purpose is to coordinate signaling and switching activities of other processing cards in the EXS Switch as well as to distribute system software resources and configurations to these processing cards as needed Some of this coordination occurs through the EX CPU card s interaction with the Host to which the EX CPU card reports card and other component statuses and from which it obtains interworking and routing solutions as well as card configurations you create in the Host To communicate with other components of the EXS Switch and with the Host the EX CPU card must have an Ethernet connection with the Host and must be loaded with system software downloaded from the Host Provided you have two EX CPU cards in appropriate slots of the same chassis and have dedicated a Host computer to each of them you can make one card active and the other standby This relationship assures that one card the standby card can automatically assume or be forced to assume control of signaling and switching based on interworking and routing solutions this standby card obtains directly from its own Host should the other card the active card fail or require maintenance The EX CPU Card screen enables you to determine the status of an EX CP
79. was last updated Page 58 Card Status line This line indicates whether this T1 card is in service has suffered faults has good memory and or has good configuration data as well as how it was last reset One or more of the following messages might occur e Reset by insertion An insertion of this T1 card in the chassis caused this card s last reset e Reset by software A taking of this T1 card out of service then putting it back in service from the Host or a powering down then up of the entire chassis or a fault in this card caused this card s last reset e Reset by button A push of this T1 card s RESET button caused this card s last reset e Standby I O present This T1 card is associated with an N 1 standby I O card rather than a redundant I O card and will handle traffic of a redundant I O card associated with a failed T1 card if Redundancy Status see below is Standby Note If Redundancy Status is Non redundant you can click the Our OF SERVICE button then click the In SERVICE button to change Redundancy Status to Standby e OUT OF SERVICE BY HOST Someone has taken this T1 card out of service through the Host e OUT OF SERVICE BY SWITCH An EX CPU card has reported this T1 card to be out of service If this card s dipswitch 3 is set to ON if another T1 card does not have this same message and if resetting this card does not remove this message you must swap this card and call Dynamis Custo
80. you to make these assignments Note If this El span supports SS7 you must instead give attributes to SS7 links see after Creating SS7 Stacks and Creating SS7 link sets Creating SS7 Links and SS7 channels called CICs Creating CICs or SS7 Channels E1 Tone Trunk Attributes Figure 4 14 E1 Tone Channel Attributes screen layout Selecting one or more channels of one or more El spans displaying in the Tone Channels screen then clicking Configure Tone Channel Attributes in this screen s Channels menu will activate the El Tone Channel Attributes screen the Tone Channels screen itself is activated by clicking the TONE TRUNKS button in the Main Menu Tool Bar Tone Channels File aime Configure Tone Channel Attributes Clear Attributes Edit Sig Rev Filters Edit Sig Rcv Timers Edit Sig Xmit Timers Wink Figure 4 15 E1 Tone Channel Attributes screen activation Page 117 Incoming Type list Channel Type list PPL File list Note Double clicking a specific El channel will also activate the El Tone Channel Attributes screen Dragging a box around specific El channels will select all channels within the box that is the range of channels will be continuous Start this box to the right of text in the window s leftmost column then drag it leftward up or down if the entire window is filled with columns if the window does not have columns extending to the right side of the window start this box beyond the r
81. 0 05 Reorder Tone Reorder Linear Ringing Tone Ringing Linear SS7 Span 6 ss7 SS7 Type 3 Linear SS7 Span 7 SS7 SS7 Type 3 Linear Tone Span 4 Tone Type 3 Linear 0008 00 0008 01 Figure 4 50 Exported Resource Group Data Page 164 Assigning attributes to a resource group The Outgoing Channel Attributes screen enables you to create a group to which you add channels or CICs sharing attributes assigned to the group Resource Group Configuration x Resource Group Name 557 Span 8 Signaling Type ss y Completion Type SS Type 3 hd Options Linear y YAU No Answer Timeout fo F Used CPA C Enable Disable Play NI 900 Prompt Tio Conference Bridge TF Route Only Unrestricted Digital Information T Use 57 Charge Number for CPN V T Gain Loss T Use Incoming y Dutgoing 557 Parameters IV Add TNS Parameter Circuit Code EN Network Specific ja M Add CIP Parameter Carrier Identification 7896 F Override incoming parameter s well telat IV Include Charge Number parameter Cancel Figure 4 45 Resource Group s Outgoing Channel Attributes screen Clicking Add Group in the Resource Groups menu of the Outgoing Resource Groups screen itself is activated by clicking the Resource Groups button in the Main Menu Tool Bar will activate this screen Resource Groups File Rama Add Group mpletion Type Options No of Chan Span Chan Delete Group Type 3 Sequential 144 Modify Group N Sequent
82. 0 Re Bs Pt 02 Brayton 508 E2 0 R BF Pt 03 Frank 4442 580 x 0 Ro GT 44418 508 0 Re W al 212 617 No route match the given digits 0 Ro E 209 617 81234 0 Riv Ri q 111 amp 69320 0 Tac T 1 amp amp 0 Re Gt Figure 4 103 No matching route Page 222 Exporting Digit Table Configuration Least Cost Routing It is possible to both export and import digit table configuration information for documentation review and sophisticated configuration purposes To export a specific digit table s data first select the digit table as described above then select Tables Export Table from the specified Digit Table s screen Note digit table 00 is specified below E2 Connected to E2 Host localhost File Equipm I stem Admir ISDN ptions Window He EA SS FAFAFA FAFA File E Attributes Em Add Table Digit Lookup Digit Xlate 1 Digit Xlate2 II ANI CLI xlate Limit Opt Route Comments Rename Table 823 amp 198 xx 0 R E RRL Delete Table ing 771 amp 4448 xX 0 R E 557 Span 6 557 route EE 617 amp 508 amp GE D R E 557 Span 7 You now F Import Table 603 617 cc 0 Re E ss7span 6 Th ee pan e comm MEC 508 xX 0 Re MM Phoo 01RL Deskphor Pt 03 Frank 44428 580 XX o R E ToneSpan4 Tone Rout 44418 508 XX 0 Re E IsOWSpan3 ISDNrouti 2128 6178 xX 0 R BJ ISON Span 3 209 617 amp 07 6038881234 0 R E Tone Span 4 1118 XX 6617269320 0 Tac Mi TEST 1 amp amp amp cc D Ri E Tone Span 4 Fi
83. 032253066 603 amp 11 603 deleted and 225306611 11 added to end 8005551212 800555 amp amp First six digits 1212 deleted Figure 4 98 Dialed or Translated Incoming Numbers Translated to Destination Numbers This field indicates an instruction for this digit lookup entry to handle network supplied Stage II information digits that North American telcos put in an incoming call s Feature Group D digit stream to characterize the call s origin or nature Your required input is limited to the following choices Page 214 CC This value indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent as received over the call s outgoing leg XX This value indicates the Stage II information digits will not be sent over the call s outgoing leg XC This value indicates only the second Stage II information digit will be sent over the call s outgoing leg CX This value indicates only the first Stage II information digit will be sent over the call s outgoing leg 00 This value indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only after being changed to characterize a regular line call 01 This value indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only after being changed to characterize four party or eight party call 02 This value indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only after being changed to character
84. 1 KP 7 10 D ST e String 2 KP ANI ST e First String 7 10 D is derived from incoming dialed number Xlate 1 or Xlate 2 e Second String ANI is derived from incoming ANI or ANI Xlate Seize Outpulse string 1 digits Scan for ANI off hook 02 Outpulse string 2 digits Send Host ACK Wait for host control message Page A 18 INC Tandem This incoming type is used as incoming FGD that requires connection to another Host The DTMF signaling type s default must be sent not used The incoming call is connected to the outgoing channel immediately The Host monitors the digits during call processing Once a valid FGD call is complete based on the standard protocol the Host generates the confirmation wink towards the incoming calling office Incoming Rule e digit type DTMF e method fixed Inseize Control Instructions e Report incoming call e Wait for host control message Intl Ftr Grp D This incoming type handles both North American and International FGD Complies with Bellcore Bell Communications Research specification for EAIS terminating International Format Stage 1 e String 1 KP 1nx xxx OIR ST e String 2 KP Dialed Number ST Stage 2 e String 1 KP II ANI ST e String 2 KP Dialed Number ST North American Format Stage 1 e String 1 KP II ANI ST First Stage International First String 1nx is the international routing code xxx is the carrier identification code and the 01R is the world zon
85. 1 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12131415 T ONE 16 Span 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28293031 T ONE 16 Span 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 T ONE 16 Span 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 6263 8 Span ST1LC 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 8 Span STILC 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 MFDSP DSP ONE EXNET Controller Ring OR 4P Front Fan Tray Power Supply C List by Type List by Slot ID List by Node Open d Move ME Delete Power Supply Midplane chassis serial 8336 Rear Fan Tray EX CPU 2000 OMB EX CPU 2000 OMB ISDN PRI T ONE 16 Span 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 T ONE 16 Span 96 97 98 99100101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108109110111 T ONE 16 Span 112113114115116117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 1 T ONE 16 Span 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 1421 T ONE 16 Span 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 1 NSP 0NE zl gt Figure 3 5 Equipment List screen layout View by Node mode Clicking List by Node in the Main Menu Tool Bar s Equipment menu will activate this screen and mode Page 40 E2 Connected to E2 Host 4 File Aaa Maintenance List by Type List by Slot ID List by Mode Figure 3 6 Equipment List screen activation for View by Node mode Note If you are already in the Equipment List screen in another mode you can also
86. 1 span of your EXS Switch to and from voice networks and perhaps data networks within North America To be conveyed over an Tl span voice calls must first be setup for connection and finally torn down once completed The setting up and tearing down of a voice call can occur through an exchange within that call s channel of the tones and bit indications that make up MFR1 channel associated signaling a DSP card must be present in T1 card s chassis for this kind of signaling see DSP Card Alternatively the setting up and tearing down of a voice call can occur through an exchange not in the call s channel but in a separate channel of the data messages that make up either ISDN or SS7 common channel signaling an ISDN or SS7 card must be present in T1 card s chassis for this kind of signaling see ISDN PRI Card or SS7 Card A given ISDN or SS7 data channel carries setup teardown messages that can control many voice channels at one time SS7 channels or links occur in T1 spans connected to an SS7 data network rather than to the voice network T1 cards can be paired with either a standard I O card a redundant I O card or a standby I O card Provided you have another T1 card in the same chassis paired with a standby I O card any T1 card you have paired with a redundant I O card can fail and its calls will handled by the T1 card paired with the standby I O card In this N 1 redundancy only one T1 card can fail per chassis T1 cards pa
87. 3 4 CONFIGURING CHANNELS ROUTES amp TRANSLATIONS cccccecscscccsccccccsceseces 94 A A R ne 94 CONFIGURATION SEQUENCE FOR ROUTING amp TRANSLATION 94 STEP 1 Configure and Put T1 E1 ISDN SS7 Channels Into Service n se 94 STEP 2 Group Outbound Channels Into Resource Groups ccooccnocccnoconononancnonanononononcnananonnnon 94 STEP 3 Build Inbound Pre Translation Tables Optional oooooonnnccnnoncccnnocnconaccnonancnonnccnnnnos 94 STEP 4 Build ANI Validation amp Index Tables Optional oooocoonnnccnnnnccconoccconancnonancnnnnacnnnnos 94 STEP 5 Build the NPA Table for Inter Intra State Determination Optional 95 STEP 6 Build Master Route Table for NPA NXX Routing Optional seee 95 STEP 7 Assign Channel PEA OS 95 STEP 8 Set up Time of Day Routing Optional is cc neotenic eet aa hele 95 STEP 9 Cr ate ACD Queues Optional vaina id ii 95 STEP 10 Create Post Routing Rules Optional oooconnccnnnccnoncninancnoncnonocannnona nono nononcnnnncnnnnon 95 STEP 11 Assign Resource Groups to Route Lists eseesseeeeeseeesesresseseresressessresrersessrerreesesee 95 STEP 12 Build Digit Tables ricino diaria stes 95 CALE CONTROL DIAGRAMS 0 p cde icy osste A ea aes as E ACTS aes 96 T1 Configuring amp Putting T1 Channels in Service ooooccnncccnocccnonononononnnonn non nono nonnnnnnnn cr nnncnnncnnnno 98 A E E 98 Acivaino a ESP o 98 Giving attributes to TI Channels inn illinois 103 Viewing attr
88. 4 557 557 Type 3 Sequential 4 ISDN ISDN Linear 0 Tone Network Sequential 0 Tone Network Sequential 48 Tone Network Sequential 48 Tone Network Sequential 48 Tone Type3 Sequential 0 Busy Linear 0 foe 17 T1 Collect Digits s 018 18 T1 Collect Digits Wink Start 018 19 T1 Collect Digits E amp M Wink Start Wink fine 018 20 T1 Colect Digts E amp M Wink Start man ma ewar wom o Figure 4 48 Drag and drop of channels into resource group tone channels example Note Dragging a box around specific channels will select all channels within the box that is the range of channels will be continuous Start this box to the right of text in the window s leftmost column then drag it leftward up or down if the entire window is filled with columns if the window does not have columns extending to the right side of the window start this box beyond the rightmost column then drag it leftward up or down Also pressing SHIFT and clicking on specific channels will select these channels and all channels in between that is the range of channels will be continuous Alternatively pressing CTRL and clicking on specific channels will select only these specific channels that is the range of channels will be discontinuous Changing hunt order Once you have dropped channels into a group you can change their listed Span Chan order by dragging and dropping them one or more than one at a time to a preferred position in the list This
89. 4 EXNET Controller Ring 0 XR 4P H Fan Tray ISDN Card m Midplane Power Supply Card B SS Card HE T1 Card Figure 3 1 Equipment List screen layout View by Type mode Clicking List by Type in the Main Menu Tool Bar s Equipment menu will activate this screen and mode EZ Connected to EZ Host File Equipment Maintenanc List by Type List by Slot ID List by Node Figure 3 2 Equipment List screen activation for View by Type mode Note If you are already in the Equipment List screen in another mode you can Page 38 also click the View by Type button to change the Equipment List screen to View by Type mode Viewing Equipment by Slot ID In View by Slot ID mode the Equipment List screen enables you to view equipment by the Slot ID regardless of node if in a multinode EXS Switch or type in numerical sequence Equipment List C List by Type List by Slot ID List by Node ISDN PRI 00 01 557 PQ 16 Links 00 02 T ONE 16 Span 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08091011 12131415 00 03 T ONE 16 Span 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28293031 00 04 T ONE 16 Span 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 00 05 T ONE 16 Span 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 6263 00 06 8 Span ST1LC 64 65 66 67 68697071 00 07 8 Span STILC 7273747576777879 00 08 MFDSP 00 10 DSP ONE 00 14 EXNET Controller Ring OXR 4F 00 16 Front Fan Tray 00 17 Power Suppl
90. 6617269320 0 Tac ME TEST 18 amp amp cc o R E Tone Span 4 Find Route x Digits to 444233 s ces Figure 4 102 Entering entire number to find Page 221 In this example note that Digit Lookup value 44424 is highlighted File Equipment Maintenance System Admin ISDN Routing Options Window Help Digit Tables Digit Table 00 fx File Tables Attributes Dt Digit Tables Digit Lookup Digt Xlate 1 Digit Xlate 2 ANI CLI Xlate Limit Opt Route Comments De ET 8238 198 xX 0 Ro Mier pie Dt 01 Qwest Routing 7718 4448 KX 0 Ra E 557 Span 6 557 route Pt Pre translation Table 617 508 cc 0 R E 557 Span 7 You now h Pt 01 Vince 603 617 cc 0 R E 557 Span 6 The comm Pt 02 Brayton 5088 XX 0 R E Phoo o1 RL Desk phon Pt 03 Frank 44428 580 Xx 0 Re E ToneSpan4 Tone Rout 44418 508 XX 0 Re E ISDNSpan3 ISDN route 2128 617 XX 0 R E ISDN Span 3 209 617 07 6038881234 0 Ra E Tone Span 4 1118 XX 6617269320 0 Tac BR TEST 1 amp amp amp cc 0 R Tone Span 4 Figure 4 67 Route 44428 selected Tf there is no matching route the following will display Digit Tables Digit Table 00 File Tables Attributes Dt Digit Tables Digit Lookup Digit Xlate 1 DigitXlate2 II ANMIFCLIXlate Opt Roul Dt 00 Digit Table DO 823 amp 198 xx 0 Re Gr 01 Qwest Routine 7718 444 XX 0 R Bs Pt Pre translation Table 617 508 cc 0 R Bs Pt 01 Vince 603 amp 617 amp cc
91. ANI Table s sign then click Add Table Attributes in the AN Table screen s Attributes menu which will activate the ANT Table Attributes screen ANI Table ani1 i Tables Attributes Dt Digit TIAS Verified Length Index BB Pre tr Modify Table Attribute No 4 None RE npat Table Attrib A anit At lod Find Route B o All Select Al index ooo Mo Figure 4 60 ANI Translation Table Attributes screen activation Page 175 Viewing all digit lookup entries in an ANI table ANI Table ani1 File Tables Attributes Dt Digit Tables Pt Pre translation Tables 6617269320 No 4 None DE NPA Table BH ant Table Bi 01 aniz fy Index Table Mo ANI Verified Length Index Figure 4 61 ANI Tables screen layout Once you click the ANT Table Attributes screen s OK button the entries you have added or changed will display in the ANT Tables screen scrollable if the screen is more than full across the row of the Digit Lookup representing that digit lookup entry This row divides into columns that contain the data of the ANI Table Attributes screen s attributes for the selected digit lookup entry Page 176 Index Tables for ANI Code Validation Index Tables are used to validate callers for postpaid billing without requiring the Dynamis Server If the ANI matches an entry in the ANI Table and the ANI is specified as Verified then the caller must enter a billing code correspondi
92. Attributes screen layout Based upon which options are selected different fields and drop down lists will appear Digit Xlate 1 Stage II ANI CLI xlate and Limit fields function exactly the same as the fields defined in Digit Tables Displaying only NPA NXXs with entries If you wish to only display NPAs that have values in them from the File menu select Configured Only Clicking on the NPA will only display configured NXXs Selecting File and Configured Only again will toggle this feature off File Tables Configure Default Option Digit Table y 100 Master De ANI CLI Xlate Limit Opt Route Lookup Inter Opt xX 0 Route List E Qwest 635 xX 0 Route List E Paetec Inter Route Inter Lookup Figure 4 67 Display only NPA NXXs that are configured Page 183 Inter Intra State Routing Menu If this box is NOT checked then only the Routing Option Digit Table or Route List and Route Table fields are eaaa i Master Route Attributes Digit Lookup Digit Xlate 1 Stagell ANVCLIXlte O Limit fO Inter Intra State Routing T Routing fen Pose i Route T able Paetee y Lookup Type Inter State Option py Inter Sate Route T able Inter State Lookup Type Py El Cancel Figure 4 67 Master Route Attributes screen layout Intra InterState Box NOT Checked If the Inter Intra State Routing Box IS checked then the following fields are displays Master Ro
93. BAL CROSSING 009 A 005 083 113 06 A 24 03 AAT FLINK Moo a 242 001 031 D2 A 24 0 GX NCG on A 005 014 107 07 A 24 00 QWEST ARS 15T m2 A 005 014 107 07 A 24 M Fits QWEST ARS 2ND m3 A 001 255 050 08 A 24 00 oe WILTEL 1ST m4 A 001 255 050 08 A 24 M soe WILTEL 2ND _Update Status Card Service C Out Of Service Reconfigure S57 In Service Query Fault Log Card Redundancy Clear Fault Log Non Redundant C Redundant Figure 3 26 SS7 Card screen layout Page 80 Note The SS7 Card screen with Stacks selected shows no icon in the leftmost column when the status of an adjacent stack on a card in service cannot be determined An X icon displays when a stack has been in service but its card has been taken out of service or when the Host was not able to configure a stack for some reason You can activate this screen by clicking SS7 Card in the Equipment List screen s View by Type mode then double clicking a listed SS7 card or by clicking a listed SS7 card in the Equipment List screen s View by Slot ID mode or by clicking a selected node in the Equipment List screen s View by Node mode then double clicking a listed SS7 card Equipment List px List by Type List by Slot ID List by Node DSP Card E1 Card EX CPU Card EXNET Controller Card Fan Tray ISDN PRI Card Midplane Power Supply Card 557 Card WA Ws 1 13 5SR_J6 Links T1 Card OF m Figure 3 27 SS7 Card scree
94. Controller card Node Slot line This line indicates the node in the EXS Switch and slot in the node s chassis where this EXNET Controller card resides Last Card Status line This line indicates in MM DD YY HH MM SS format when this EXNET Controller card s status was last queried and displayed in the EXNET Card screen Note This card s status is automatically updated on activation of the EXNET Card screen Card Status line This line indicates whether this EXNET Controller card is in service has suffered faults has good memory and or has good configuration data as well as how it was last reset One or more of the following messages might occur e Reset by insertion An insertion of this processing card in the chassis caused this card s last reset e Reset by software A taking of this processing card out of service then putting it back in service from the Host or a powering down then up of the entire chassis or a fault in this card caused this card s last reset e Reset by button A push of this processing card s RESET button caused this card s last reset Page 87 e OUT OF SERVICE BY HOST Someone has taken this processing card out of service through the Host e OUT OF SERVICE BY SWITCH An EX CPU card has reported this processing card to be out of service If this card s dipswitch 3 is set to ON if another EXNET Controller card does not have this same message and if resetting this card does not remov
95. DN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN Tenn Outgoing Type None None None None None None None None None None None None Once you click the Channel Feature Attributes screen s OK button the features you attributed to the channel will display in the Channel Features screen scrollable if the screen is more than full across the row of the Span Chan representing that channel This row divides into columns that incorporate the meanings if not the exact labels of the Channel Feature Attributes screen s attributes for the selected channel la bl Lookup Type Dig Tbl 1 DNIS DNIS DNIS aie DNIS DNIS sae DNIS DNIS DNIS one DNIS EE DNIS oo DNIS DNIS EE mute T AAA 2 1 Dig Tbl2 Network ANITbl pto None Mo None pto None pto None Mo None Mo None pto None M o None Mo None pto None ho None Mo None wn Mana Figure 4 71 Answer Prop Rpt Prop Rpt Prop Rpt Prop Rpt Prop Rpt Prop Rpt Prop Rpt Prop Rpt Prop Rpt Prop Rpt Prop Rpt Prop Rpt Dean tink Channel Features screen layout Rise Mode Park Park Park Park Park Park Park Park Park Park Park Park Male None None None None None None None None None None None None Mana Aud Sig Account Code Default DNIS Def pa When you have added all the channel features you want click Save in the File menu of the Channel Features
96. DN PRI card redundancy ISDN Offline Configuration New to 2007 Beginning with Version 4 7 ISDN cards may be configured offline Note that the icon in the equipment list will be different as shown in the bottom of the figure below Equipment List C List by Type List by Slot ID pe 01 MFDSP om 07 ISDN PRI HS 09 8 Span STILC 08091011 12131415 Add 10 MFDSP 11 DSP ONE Move 12 MFDSP 557 PQ 2 Links 16 Front Fan Tray 17 Power Supply 18 Power Supply 19 Midplane chassis serial 3825 33 EX CPU 2000 OMB y 100 ISDN PRI Figure 3 24 ISDN Offline Configuration Page 74 Model ISDN PRI Slot Last Card Status 03 08 07 15 28 45 Card Status Reset by Insertion In service Redundancy Status Non redundant Memory Test OK Artwork Revision C 009 Serial Number 6596 Software ROM 196 001 Build 7 Configure D Channel Parameters C Configure D Channel NFAS Groups Span Chan RFS Format E 01 02 E 09 04 AddD Chan M fos oo fo oo oo o oo oo oz 00 A elete an Configure In Service Out Of Service Update Status Card Service C Out Of Service In Service Fault Li Buey Faut Log Card Redundancy gt Clear Fault Log Non Redundant C Redundant Figure 3 24 ISDN PRI Card screen layout You can activate this screen by clicking ISDN PRI Card in the Equipment List screen s View by Type mode t
97. DN in the leftmost Format 2 list you must select FEBE ON If you select El in the leftmost Format 2 list to support SS7 traffic you must select FEBE ON Page 115 Line Build Out list This list indicates the length of this El span for which attenuation must be compensated Your required input is limited to one of the following choices 0 133 ft 134 166 ft 167 299 ft 300 533 ft 534 665 ft G 703 ITU Note If you select ISDN in the leftmost Format 2 list you must select G 703 ITU If this El span connects to an VIC VRU you must select G 703 Viewing El span attributes Once you click the El Span Attributes screen s OK button the El span attributes you have added or changed will display in the El Card screen scrollable if the screen is more than full across the row of the Offset identifying this El span This row divides into columns that incorporate the meanings if not the exact labels of the El Span Attributes screen s parameters for the selected offset In addition this row includes a Clock column that indicates whether or how the span is involved in clocking activities of the EXS Switch chassis to which the span is connected The Clock column can show the following values e blank This value indicates the span takes its network clocking from some other T1 or El span in its EXS Switch chassis e P This value indicates the span is the primary source of network clocking for its EXS Switch chassi
98. EX CPU Cardon rions an eee ert Marne ane ee Re i ean er ne ER ie Per eam A en 69 pde Card SS ias 72 A A OESE EENS 12 Clearing Fault Logs sicreti tre EEES EEE E AEEA REEE 72 SSC UMN 5 WLC IY A TNS acs EAEE EE EE nade ce avequsuoav ues E E EEA T 73 ISDN BRE E A ly lo ee ae 74 ISDN Offline Configuration New to 2007 ceescecessceceseeeceeececeeeeecseceeceeeeceeeeceteeeeneeeees 74 111 Putting ISDN PRI card in service veria ica tisina Eet ESEE E arini 78 Putting ISDN PRI card out of SEL VICE ti td t 78 Making ISDN PRI cards noOn TEdUN diia it 78 Making ISDN PRL cards AO aos 78 A qusy seve ea teqe tates a aeta sted ate e i e es hepa lorietan 80 Putting SS7 Card IM SETVICS ui ia aaa asada inclina dedicas ias 84 Putting 957 Card Out Ob serie a a acess 84 Making SS7 cards non redundant ii A 84 Making SS7 cards TU ddr raised odia 85 RGCONM SUTIN GAD ti is 85 EXNET Controller Cat Cita A A ee gd E eS ed cued 86 Updating card SUAUU Sic io dd tattaiaes 89 Cua Fault Log AS 89 Clearing Fault Le sand 89 Putting EXNET Controller Card SEVEN RR ees 89 Putting EXNET Controller card out of Service s 2 2 2 i sie A td Baud 89 Gonbiouring EXNE Pani nasa ni 89 Wpdatinig EXNET fing SAS id ii 91 Updating EXNET ring Stats cia dascedeasncdaeasecvontaavenucdessbenemtuaseanesaee 93 Putting EXNET ring I Service 2544 6 ae GE el oe RG ee Ca 93 Putting EX NET fing outor Service it AA ee Be ee 93 Reconfiguring the EX NET Time usina dicen nine diia 9
99. FAA ji dia E MI D User s Manual Version 4 7 6 May 1 2007 Important Notice General Disclaimer The contents of this document are subject to change without notice therefore the information presented herein shall not be construed as a commitment or warranty Dynamis Corporation Inc shall not be liable for any technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages resulting from the performance furnishing reliance on or use of this material Figure 3 36 missing Patents Certain equipment and software described in this document is protected by issued and pending U S and foreign patents All products and services are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturer Copyright This document contains confidential and proprietary information protected by copyright Copyright Dynamis Corporation all rights reserved Copying or other reproduction of all or parts of this document is prohibited Table of Contents 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW sois iia OVERVIOW N nn ute REEE AEE WU ESAE vad clay ata a A A a AG ates e bea bs poem oe ae Ne Saran Sets ecm ORG OR CEE ON RR MT ce ea ee IN Soe eZ Outgoing Dies id iii Software and Hardware Components ti atar A O Remote COMPputer siii aa iaa EXS SWC sn bolo Maia OS ESO WEN A A A E da Be a ae S WICH SOMWALeS arenon inea ne S EE is Whats New 2006 7 V SO a a ii Major Routing Enhancements csic ccesccdistccsisa
100. Find Route E2 Connected to E2 Host localhost File Equipment Maintenance System Admin ISDN Routing Options Add Table Attributes Digit Xlate 1 Digit Xlate 2 ANIJCLI Xlate Limit Opt Route Comments Modify Table Attributes 19B xX 0 Re R IVR RL Delete Table Attribu 444 RX 0 R E 557 Span 6 557 route Find Route 508 amp cc 0 Ra E 557 Span 7 You now h a Se 617 cc 0 Ros m 557 Span 6 The comme MN 02 Brayton 508 xX 0 Re MB Phoo 01RL Deskphon Figure 4 101 Digit Table Find Route Activation Enter the entire number in this case 444233 and click on Find to highlight the matching route E2 Connected to E2 Host localhost File Equipment Maintenance System Admin ISDN Routing Options Window Help Digit Tables Digit Table 00 File Tables Attributes Dt Digit Tables Digit Lookup Digit Xlate 1 DigitXlate2 II ANI CLIXlate Route Comments De 00 Digit Table 00 g23 198 xx 0 Ro Mier _ Dt 01 Qwest Routine 7718 4448 Xx 0 Re E ss75pan 557 route FL Pre translation Table 6178 5088 cc 0 Re E 5575pan7 Younowh Pt 01 Vince 603 amp 617 amp cc 0 R E 557 Span 6 The comm Pt 02 Brayton 5088 xx 0 R E Ph 00 01 RL Desk phon Pt 03 Frank 44428 580 amp xx o R E ToneSpan Tone Rout 4441 amp 508 amp Xx 0 Ri E ISONSpan3 ISDN route 212 amp 617 amp xx o R ISDN Span 3 209 617 amp 07 6038881234 0 R E Tone Span 4 1118 XX
101. I 10 DNIS 7 except that when a 7 digit dialed number is received the 3 digit area code from the ANI is added to the dialed number Incoming Digit Format ANI DNIS This incoming type is the same as Operator except the Attendant logs in with an assigned log in code The attendant can perform blind transfers as can the operator or hotline transfer in which the attendant remains on the line Page A 5 Auto Terminating CAMA ANI Incoming Digit Format Incoming Rule This incoming type automatically steers all calls incoming on a channel to a predetermined route list regardless of whether or not any digits are incoming on the calls Therefore this incoming type is useful when no dialed number or ANI digits are expected on a channel because the digit table is bypassed and calls are sent directly to a specific route list When Auto Terminating is specified as incoming type during channel configuration the system automatically prompts for entry of a resource group The prompt is a selection window that shows all route lists known to the system Select one resource group and click on OK associate that resource group with the channel being configured Auto Terminating Figure A 2 Auto Terminating screen layout This incoming type terminates a standard Centralized Automatic Message Accounting CAMA channel Stage contains the following e String 1 KP X CC Dialed Number ST e String 2 KP II ANI ST First String
102. Log Clearing Fault Log This line indicates the build number of the RAM software that is the System Software sometimes called pSOS downloaded from an EX CPU card to this DSP card Note The Switch Status screen displays the actual version of this software Clicking the DSP Card screen s UPDATE STATUS button after this screen has been active for a while will query this DSP card again to determine its current status then display this status in the DSP Card screen Clicking the DSP Card screen s QUERY FAULT LOG button displays this DSP card s Fault Log see Fault Log query with fault for an EX CPU card s Fault Log example Clicking the DSP Card screen s CLEAR FAULT LOG button clears this DSP card s Fault Log and resets the number of faults to zero zero also appears when no faults are detected on a query see Fault Log cleared or clear of faults for an EX CPU card s Fault Log example Putting SIMM into service Clicking the DSP Card screen s INTO SERVICE button makes the selected SIMM available for call processing A green icon indicates that the SIMM is in service Putting SIMM out of service Configuring DSPs Clicking the DSP Card screen s OUT OF SERVICE button makes the selected SIMM unavailable for call processing Selecting a displayed SIMM in the DSP Card screen then clicking the CONFIGURE button after clicking the OUT OF SERVICE button enables you to configure DSPs on that SIMM Page 52
103. OB Northern Telecom OutWats OC Northern Telecom Foreign Exchange OD Northern Telecom Tie Channel OE Northern Telecom TRO Call E 02 Outgoing Info Transfer list This list indicates this B Channel s default request for bearer service capability on outbound calls Your required input is limited to the following choices E 03 Calling Number Type list 01 Voice 02 3 1 KHz audio 03 56 KBPS 04 64 KBPS 05 64 KBPS Restricted This list indicates this B Channel s default identification a Calling Party type of number on outbound calls Your required input is limited to the following choices E 04 Calling Number Plan ID list 01 Unknown 02 International number 03 National number 04 Subscriber number 05 Abbreviated number This list indicates this B Channel s default identification of a Calling Party number plan on outbound calls Your required input is limited to the following choice 01 Unknown 02 ISDN Numbering Plan Recommendation E 164 E 163 03 Private numbering plan 04 Telephony numbering plan Page 129 E 05 Calling Presentation Indicator list This list indicates this B Channel s default indication for call presentation on outbound calls Your required input is limited to the following choices e 01 Presentation is allowed e 2 Presentation is restricted e 03 Number not available due to interworking E 06 Calling Screening Indicator list This list in
104. PENDIX Ar INCOMING TYPES iscsscccsaccicdsessdsdesssdstsseensis sacks tvesievdeduadacsssatesbaocdeacices 1 Os 1 Valid TI Incoming Types scott ii it aadecata R a asain 2 Valid El Incoming Types variada radio sa sbaseacied E E E ENE cien 3 Incoming Types not presently supported syic ceis cociecayecegesanawedespdeeedelaycnccnasanedaupbussdanasccdencdsecddnadeactaen 3 Tandem Switching Incoming Pes A O 4 MPV TARTS UPS E A sinc O 4 APPENDIX B OUTGOING TYPES 00 cos dc sic cencsas ses cedecanidecaleceaadteasenctasevessccsensdssecste 1 Dd o A edo 1 Outgoing Types Lita said 1 APPENDIX C COMPLETION TYPES oso SEa soene capa ta cones 1 Dn tn I l Compl ti n Type latas a dot A a Eee Sue RRA 1 APPENDIX D AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD EVENT LOG FORMATS 1 Sample ACD Event L0G treinar A EEEE RAAE E A EE E 1 ACD Vent Los DescriptlonS nagini nna a R a a eae 1 vii 1 System Overview Overview The E2 Eagle II Host Software Host combined with an EXS Switch allows for a highly flexible user programmable switching system The EXS Switch allows you to determine how you want to route the traffic The Host provides call control and a Graphical User Interface GUI that enables you to create routing applications quickly and easily Theory of Operation Incoming Digits Outgoing Digits The Host is a call control system that uses a digit matching process of dialed digits The main components of the Host include an EXS Switch an
105. PIN is presently in the Xlate2 field Contact your E2 Eagle technical representative for details to determine if this is applicable to your system e TAC This value indicates the Host treats incoming numbers matching this digit lookup entry as Smart Calling Card calls and invokes processing logic to handle such calls see the Smart Calling Card User s Manual for further details e Time of Day This value indicates the Host treats incoming numbers matching this digit lookup entry as requiring access to the entry s associated route list which contains groups of outgoing channels that can be hunted for availability at certain times of the day see Making Routes Time Sensitive for further details If the Option field is set to Digit Table then a list of digit tables will display See above Option Field for details If the Option field is set to Route List then a list of valid route lists will display If the Option field is set to Time of Day or Listener then a list of valid route lists will display This list indicates groups of channels that can carry the call involved in this digit lookup together with its digits translated or not from your Switch to another switch that can work to complete the call Your required input is limited to the route lists displaying in this list Note The only lists that are displayed are those compatible with the type selected in the Option list display in the Route list Thi
106. Query in the SS7 CICs screens CIC Management menu to populate these columns with statuses Pressing F5 only once per five second interval for effect while the SS7 CICs screen is active or scrolling the SS7 CICs screen or returning to the SS7 CICs screen from another screen refreshes these statuses The Local Status column and Remote Status column each can show the following values e Inc Busy Active This value indicates the CIC is busy inbound because it is active e Inc Busy Loc Block This value indicates the CIC is busy inbound because it is locally blocked e Inc Busy Rem Block This value indicates the CIC is busy inbound because it is remotely blocked e Inc Busy Loc amp Rem Block This value indicates the CIC is busy inbound because it is both locally and remotely blocked e Idle This value indicates the CIC is idle e Idle Loc Block This value indicates the CIC is idle because it is locally blocked e Idle Loc amp Rem Block This value indicates the CIC is idle because it is locally and remotely blocked e Idle Remote Block This value indicates the CIC is idle because it is remotely blocked e Out Busy Active This value indicates the CIC is busy outbound because it is active e Out Busy Loc Block This value indicates the CIC is busy outbound because it is locally blocked e Out Busy Rem Block This value indicates the CIC is busy outbound because it is remotely blocked e Out Busy Loc amp
107. Rem Block This value indicates the CIC is busy outbound because it is both locally and remotely blocked e Transient This value indicates the CIC was in a transition from one state to another at the refresh e Unequip This value indicates the CIC is out of service Page 154 Viewing CIC status Selecting one or more CICs in the same span displaying in the SS7 CICs screen then clicking Show CIC Status in this screen s CIC Management menu will insert two additional columns in the SS7 CICs screen SS7 Channels ojx File CIC Management Span Chan Block CIC s Glare Cont Svce AJA Local Status Remote Status al Unblock CIC s 5000 01 T1 Reset CIC s CEA E acmjanm Odd Even None Block ACM ANM 3000 02 T1 Circuit Query Odd Even None Block ACM ANM 5000 03 T1 ircuit A Odd Even None Block ACM ANM 5000 04 T1 Continuity Test 01 Odd Even None Block ACM ANM E 000 05 T1 Continuity Stop 01 Odd Even None Block ACM ANM E 000 06 T1 MENE Odd Even None Block ACMIANM g 000 07 T1 oroo vuorot J01 OddjEven None Block ACMJANM g o00 08 T1 01057 003 047 001 Odd Even None Block ACM ANM Figure 4 40 Status of CICs These additional columns Status 1 and Status 2 indicate the actual state of the CIC The Status 1 column can show the following values Idle This value indicates the CIC is not in use Inc Busy This value indicates the CIC is busy inbound Out Busy This value indicates the CIC is busy outbou
108. Route for a Specific Destination Number ooooocnnncocnnncccnnncccnnnnnonononononononnnnncnnncnononccinnncno 221 Exporting Digit Table Configuration cciccscessscssevsdcasscccsatssoasancvavsdendastsvedandepeaeassonscessacosantaas 223 Least Cost RODUN SS ta 223 Importing Digit Table Contra 223 WRU Branding A AE AR 225 5 MAINTENANCE 5 ec ceessssacsccccyeteeece VEDE cvavsteeced coupe sedess sendeccse ds SATa Estas S 228 DA o eS 228 SCA ASEO Oca hanes 228 Alarms Cia 232 pa a d Channel Statys SCreen rro ada 237 Wie wine PAR A al E 238 pele cias Channel rica a 238 Placing Channels 1 Service td deideayoabedbuasteerncade 239 Placing Channels Out of Service sis cieisiavasasaisdacacisseaetassavtanisdesacsasbaseseats e a a A 239 Placing Entire Spanin A e a a a E E a ETA Aa ar aE 239 Placing Entire Spam Out of Service ate artsy sn a va anne a a ean ee a 240 Query Channel Status SCreen curtido dedo E E SETAE E 240 Refresh Rate CA od 242 Changing Default Refresh Rae do 242 Span Error Monitor SEO ni anaE a E EAE EEE Aa dae 243 Carr Answer QUE aiii diia 245 NMiew Detall Sieden e TUNA Oats er E aaea a e a e a Oe eas a 246 Raw Command Cr tdci 247 O e o a a dl e i 247 Switch Debug Log MEU iii iaa bea 249 DA e e e de do 249 COSME MIT LO SA E A NS 249 Deleting Switch Log mr dic 249 E NA aa O 249 Network Debug Log Mai A aa 250 SAD 08 eire alea aUi REAA E TE E OS 251 Apply Contorno a oneei 251 Transferring les anni dd E A A D RER 251 EOTEME MECO 251 AP
109. S Switch Message Retries on Control Link line This line indicates the number of times the Host had to re transmit a message over the link Number Retries on CPU to CPU field This line indicates the number of internal messages between EX CPU cards in the EXS Switch Switch Versions area This area of the Switch Status screen enables you to view the EXS Switch s most recent firmware and software versions Page 230 The following lines appear in the Switch Versions area ROM Software Version line This line indicates the most recent Read Only Memory ROM version of the firmware in the EXS Switch RAM Software Version line This line indicates the most recent Random Access Memory RAM version of the Switch Software Dynamis operating system software Note Certain versions of the Switch Software are only compatible with specific Excel hardware versions To verify compatibility contact Dynamis Customer Engineering Build Number line This line indicates the version number of the Switch Software Active Timer Stamp This line indicates the date and time of the last Switch Software download Clock Mode Status area This area of the Switch Status screen enables you to view clock synchronization priorities as well as the status of the current clock synchronization in use The EXS Switch continuously monitors all programmed clock sources and uses the highest priority clock source available to synchronize all digital n
110. SS7 messaging The Dest St column can show the following values e A This value indicates the destination is available for SS7 messaging e U This value indicates the destination is not available for SS7 messaging If both the route and destination are available for SS7 messaging the Route will show a green icon any other combination of states will create a red icon both for the route and for the associated link set see Viewing attributes of all_SS7 link sets Page 145 Creating CICs for SS7 Channels Having created SS7 stacks SS7 link sets SS7 links and finally SS7 network routes see Creating SS7 Network Routes you must now create and group the SS7 channels called CICs that carry calls subject to SS7 control to a specific voice switch channeled in the voice network to your EXS Switch So that SS7 control messages can relate to the channels they control these channels are identified by their CICs Circuit Identification Codes and are therefore called CICs Creating CIC group The Create CIC Group screen enables you to create a group of CICs Note In an EXNET ring SS7 CICs of one node s SS7 card cannot be associated with T1 or El spans on another node Create CIC Group O 222 222 222 Figure 4 35 Create CIC Group screen layout Selecting a CIC or a continuous range of CICs in the same span displaying in the SS7 CICs screen then selecting Create CIC Group in the CICs menu of the S 7 CICs screen itself act
111. String 1 Dialed Number ANI First String ANI and dialed number digits are retrieved from the Digit Table entries Stage 1 or XlateStagel generate the dialed number ANI Xlate generates the ANI If the ANI Xlate field is left blank the system uses the same digits that are received Note The resource group must have a completion type of FGD Page B 1 DTMF FGD2 Outgoing Digit Format E1 R2 2 Outgoing Digit Format E1 R2 3 Outgoing Digit Format E1 R2 4 Outgoing Digit Format This ANI CLI type provides in band ANI to those customers not supporting MFR1 dialing This type is commonly referred to as DTMF Feature Group D Digits are outpulsed using DTMF only Stage 1 e String 1 ANI Dialed Number Note The resource group must have a completion type of FGD This ANVCLI type is El compelled two stages Stage 1 Dialed Number Stage 2 ANI This ANI CLI type is El compelled three stages Stage 1 NPA Stage 2 ANI Stage 3 Dialed Number This ANI CLI type is El compelled four stages Stage 1 6 digits of dialed number Stage 2 II digits ANI Stage 3 Remaining Dialed Number digits Stage 4 The first II digit Page B 2 Erksn Cell Outgoing Digit Format Routing FGD EAIS Outgoing Digit Format This ANI CLI type provides ANI to customers with an Ericksson Cellular channel The ANI is the same as received in the incoming call log The dialed number includes the 101 plus the incoming CIC code
112. Switch Status screen displays the actual version of this software Updating card status Clicking the E7 Card screen s UPDATE STATUS button after this screen has been active for a while will query this El card again to determine its current status then display this status in the E Card screen Querying Fault Log Clicking the El Card screen s QUERY FAULT LOG button displays this El card s Fault Log see Fault Log query with fault for an EX CPU card s Fault Log example Clearing Fault Log Clicking the E Card screen s CLEAR FAULT LOG button clears this El card s Fault Log and resets the number of faults to 0 O also appears when no faults are detected on a query see Fault Log cleared for clear of faults for an EX CPU card s Fault Log example Page 67 Putting E1 card in service Clicking the EJ Card screen s IN SERVICE button makes this El card available for call processing Note If you are putting the El card in service after having configured it and taken it out of service the Host will download the El configuration data the card lost when you took it out of service Putting El card out of service Clicking the El Card screen s OUT OF SERVICE button makes it unavailable for call processing Note You will want to take this card out of service if you need to test the card or if you discover the card is faulty Taking this card out of service automatically clears all El configuration data and also takes
113. The NFAS Span Association screen enables you to view spans whose signaling will be controlled by the same D channel Page 125 NFAS Span Association Figure 4 21 NFAS Span Association screen layout Clicking the NFAS Spans button in the SDN Card screen itself activated by clicking View by Type View by Slot ID or View by Node in the Main Menu Tool Bar s Equipment menu with this screen s Configure D Channel NFAS Groups button engaged then up to nine specific spans will activate this screen and add the selected spans to it ISDN Card Figure 4 22 NFAS Span Association screen activation The following information appears in the NFAS Span Association screen Page 126 NFAS Spans field This field indicates all T1 spans that are part of the same Non Facility Associated Signaling group Backing up NFAS group s D Channel Instead of losing an NFAS group s B Channels on failure of their one D Channel you can create a redundant D Channel on a second Tl span within the same NFAS group redundancy results in a D Channel B Channel ratio of 2 238 The Add ISDN Secondary D Channel screen enables you to select a channel in a second T1 span that will serve as a backup D channel Add ISDN Secondary D Channel 3 Figure 4 23 Add ISDN Secondary D Channel screen layout Clicking the Sec D CHAN button in the ISDN Card screen itself activated by clicking View by Type View by Slot ID or View by No
114. Trk B Date and Time Dialed Number ANI Route List Name In Seizure from Operator generated when call is routed to a queue port OQ Event Trk A Trk B Date and Time Dialed Number ANI Route List Name Out of Queue generated when call is released from a queue port and sent to an agent OV Event Trk A Trk B Date and Time Dialed Number ANI Route List Name Overflow generated when a call in queue has overflowed i e timed overflow LI Event Trk A Trk B Date and Time Agent Login Number Route List Name Agent Login generated when an agent logs in D 1 LO Event Trk A Trk B Date and Time Agent Login Number Route List Name Agent Logoff generated when an agent logs off D 2
115. Type E 04 Calling Number Plan ID e E 05 Calling Presentation Indicator 01 Presentation is allowed E 06 Calling Screening Indicator 01 User provided not screened el E 07 Called Number Type 01 Unknown type of number ss el E 08 Call E 09 Outgoing Response Enable 00 Not Used X cme Figure 4 24 ISDN B Channel Parameters screen layout Selecting one or more B Channels displaying in the ISDN B Chan s screen then selecting B Channel Configuration in this screen s B Channel menu will activate the ISDN B Channel Parameters screen itself activated either by clicking B Chan Configure in the ISDN menu in the Main Menu Tool Bar or by clicking the ISDN B CHan s button in the Main Menu Tool Bar ISDN B Chan s Fie da Booo T1 004 23 BRB aa mr trad mms an ma Figure 4 25 ISDN B Channel Parameters screen activation Page 128 The following lists appear in the ISDN B Channel Parameters screen E 01 Network Type list This list indicates the B Channel s default network for outbound calls Your required input is limited to the following choices 01 Do Not Include Network Specific Facilities NSF IE 02 AT amp T Software Defined Network 03 AT amp T Megacom 800 Service 04 AT amp T Megacom 05 AT amp T Accunet 06 AT amp T Long Distance Service 07 AT amp T International 800 08 AT amp T Multiquest 09 Northern Telecom Private Net OA Northern Telecom InWats
116. U card as well as to set the EXS Switch s time to the Host computer s clock EX CPU Card Figure 3 20 EX CPU Card screen layout You can activate this screen by clicking EX CPU Card in the Equipment List screen s View by Type mode then double clicking a listed EX CPU card or by clicking a listed EX CPU card in the Equipment List screen s View by Slot ID mode or by clicking a selected node in the Equipment List screen s View by Node mode then double clicking a listed EX CPU card Page 69 Equipment List List by Type E EX CPU Card a 00 32 EX CPU 2000 OMB ia 00 33 EX CPU 2000 OMB in 01 32 EX CPU 2000 OMB EXNET Controller Card Fan Tray ISDN Card Midplane Power Supply Card 557 Card T1 Card E E Figure 3 21 EX CPU Card screen activation View by Type mode The following information appears in the EX CPU Card screen Model line This line indicates the model of this EX CPU card Current models include e EX CPU 1000 This model supports 1 048 ports e EX CPU 2000 This model supports 2 048 ports Node Slot line This line indicates the node in the EXS Switch and slot in the node s chassis where this EX CPU card resides Note In a single node EXS Switch Node does not display In a multinode EXS Switch Node will display together with an automatically generated number identifying the node Last Card Status line This line indicat
117. View by Type mode then double clicking a listed midplane or by clicking a listed midplane in the Equipment List screens View by Slot ID mode or by clicking a selected node in the Equipment List screen s View by Node mode then doubleclicking a listed midplane Equipment List List by Type List by Slot EX CPU Card ES EXNET Controller Card Fan Tray ER ISDN Card m Midplane A E K3 soo TE EE E 00 19 Midplane chassis serial 8336 0 01 19 Midplane chassis serial 6644 Power Supply Card 557 Card T1 Card Figure 3 10 Midplane screen activation View by Type mode Page 45 The following information appears in the Midplane screen Model line This line indicates the model of this midplane Node Slot line This line indicates the node in the EXS Switch and slot in the node s chassis where this midplane resides Note In a single node EXS Switch Node does not display in a multinode EXS Switch Node will display together with an automatically generated number identifying the node A chassis midplane is associated with logical slot 19 Last Card Status line This line indicates in MM DD YY HH MM SS format when this midplane s status was last updated Chassis Serial line This line indicates the serial number of the midplane Updating midplane status Clicking the Midplane screen s UPDATE STATUS button after this screen has been active for a while will query this midpl
118. X is a steering code or routing digit CC is the dialed number country code All of the digits are sent to the digit table for a match Note The steering code should be stripped using the Digit Table Second String Contains the II digits and 7 digit ANI There may be either one or two digits in the II field therefore the Host counts back from the last digit to determine what the II digits are Overview Collects the initial stage of one 1 string After the first string is received the Host generates wink 2 and receives the second string stages 1 strings 2 digit type MFR1 method use KP and ST Page A 6 Inseize Control Instructions Cell Tandem In Generate inseize acknowledgment Receive stage n address data string 1 Generate call processing event wink Receive string n address data string 2 Report incoming call with digits Wait for host control message This incoming type is used as a Feature Group D from an AT amp T Cellular switch There is a single string of MF digits followed by the return of a confirmation wink Incoming String Format Incoming Rule Inseize Control Instructions KP I ANI 10 CIC 3 4 3 7 10 Dialed Number ST stages 1 strings digit type MFR1 method KP and ST Generate inseize acknowledgment Receive stage n address data Report incoming call with digits Wait for host control message There are six different scenarios in which the digits of an incoming c
119. a from any older version to the new version Page 5 What s New 2004 5 This was the first significant rewrite of the Host Software since the 1999 version of ADS Enhancements include SS7 Route Advance When the system attempts an outgoing call via SS7 if the call fails the system can perform any of the following based upon the cause code returned Next available route The next Resource Group will be used in the Route List If the last Resource Group has been used the incoming trunk is released with the Out Going trunk s return cause code Play Busy Tone The incoming trunk is play 10 cycles of busy tone before the trunk is released Play Reorder Tone The incoming trunk is play 10 cycles of reorder tone before the trunk is released Release with Cause The incoming trunk is release with the user define cause code Route to VRU The incoming trunk is routed to associated VRU SS7 Branding Route List If the SS7 VRU Branding is not configured the incoming trunk is released with the Out Going trunk s return cause code If the cause code number is not in the list a second out going attempt is made After the second out dial attempt is made the incoming trunk is released with the Out Going trunk s return cause code Refer to SS7 Cause Code Setup for details Integrate SS7 CPN with Smart Long Distance Application The SS7 Calling Party Number CPN can now be used for billing and is integrat
120. all using the CELL TANDEM IN incoming type can be recognized by the Host This is due to the fact that while the I digit is hard coded as and the ANI is hard coded as 10 the CIC and dialed number can contain a various number of digits The CIC can be either 3 or 4 digits The dialed number can be 3 7 or 10 digits Therefore the following figure shows the valid combinations used by the Host to collect digits ANI CIC Dialed Number Total Digits Collected 11 3 3 17 11 4 3 18 11 3 7 21 11 4 7 22 11 3 10 24 11 4 10 24 Figure A 3 CELL TANDEM IN digits If the Host receives any number of digits other than those shown in the Total Digits Page A 7 Collected column in the table above all digits collected appear in the ANI field of the CDR The DN field in the CDR contains a zero and the call is sent to reorder via the Digit Table A zero in the DN field of the CDR file indicates that the local telephone company may not be sending enough digits Page A 8 Coll Digits Anw Collect Digits DB Agent DID 4 10 SEC DNIS 7 ANI 10 This incoming type is similar to Collect Digits except the system goes off hook after collecting digits Note Selecting Coll Digits Anw activates the Collect Digit Parameters screen in which you specify the number of digits you want to collect on this channel how these digits should be signaled and how long between 4 and 20 seconds your EXS Switch w
121. and C Page 1 Software and Hardware Components Host Computer Remote Computer EXS Switch Host Software Switch Software There are various hardware and software components which comprise the basic Call Processing System The hardware components include the Host Computer and the EXS Switch The Host Computer houses the Host Software and Switch Software the operating system of the EXS Switch The switch houses the equipment items line or service resource cards installed in the card slots The equipment items are controlled by the Host Software The Host Computer is a PC on which the Host Software providing call control is installed The Host Computer is also where the E2START TXT file and E2 executable data log and system files are stored The E2 Eagle GUI should be run on a separate remote computer and NOT on the same computer as the host Otherwise performance of the host computer may degrade The Excel family of switches is non blocking digital systems with high density and Digital Signal Processing DSP technology The switches accommodate standard telephone network and line interfaces including T1 ISDN Primary Rate Interface ISDN RD El and SS7 The Host Software controls the EXS Switch The Host provides various functions such as basic call processing automatic call distribution file maintenance alarm logging and reporting backup and restore facilities operator services and remote access The Switc
122. ane again to determine its current status then display this status in the Midplane screen Page 46 Fan Tray The fan tray s purpose is to mount multiple fans in your EXS Switch chassis These fans force the chassis warm air into its environs and draw the environ s relatively cooler air into the chassis to maintain the chassis s required operating temperature The Fan Tray screen enables you to view the status of a fan tray s multiple fans Fan Tray Figure 3 11 Fan Tray screen layout You can activate this screen by clicking Fan Tray in the Equipment List screen s View by Type mode then double clicking a listed fan tray or by clicking a listed fan tray in the Equipment List screens View by Slot ID mode or by clicking a selected node in the Equipment List screen s View by Node mode then double clicking a listed fan tray List by Type List by Slot ID C List by No EXNET Controller Card Fan Tray 00 16 Front Fan Tray HE 00 22 Rear Fan Tray SE 01 16 Front Fan Tray SE 01 22 Rear Fan Tray ISDN Card Midplane Power Supply Card 557 Card T1 Card a m EX CPU Card ea 2 8 poo Noa Figure 3 12 Fan Tray screen activation View by Type mode The following information appears in the DSP Card screen Model line This line indicates the model of this fan tray Current models include Page 47 e Fan Tray This tray mounts six fans in the EXS 1000 chassis e Front Fa
123. annel Attributes screen s attributes for the selected T1 channel Note If a selected Span Chan refers instead to an El channel columns will reflect attributes for this kind of channel Tone Channels File Configure Span Chan Incoming Type Channel In Start Dial Out Start Dial Timer Flash Tone fine 008 00 T1 Collect Digits E amp M Wink Start Wink Start OFF Zip fine 008 01 T1 Collect Digits E amp M wink Start Wink Start OFF Zip Mos 02 ah Collect oi E amp M Wink Start wink Start OFF Zip REO AA COC ELECO CCE E a E Boos 04 a Collect Digits E amp M Wink Start Wink Start Zip 008 05 T1 Collect Digits E amp M Wink Start Wink Start aS Zip fate 008 06 1 Coleg Digits E amp M Wink Start Wink Start OFF Zip Figure 4 5 T1 Tone Channel screen layout Changing reception filters Dynamis Corporation configures reception filters with values specified in AT amp T Publication 43801 and Bellcore TR TSY 000506 You will need to change these default values only if networks to which your channels are connected do not follow these specifications Warning Changing filters can stop call processing Dynamis Corporation strongly advises you to consult WCS or Dynamis Customer Engineering personnel before changing filter values Page 107 Signaling Reception Filter Attributes Figure 4 6 Signaling Reception Filter Attributes screen layout Selecting one or more channels of one or more T1 spans
124. annel is a Tl or El span E 04 HDLC Bit Polarity list This list indicates the HDLC High level Data Link Control bit polarity for this D Channel Your required input is limited to the following choices e 00 Normal default This value indicates this D Channel s bit polarity is normal e OI Inverted This value indicates this D Channel s bit polarity is inverted typically used with D4 and AMI line coding on T1 spans E 05 Network Side Layer 2 list This list indicates the type of terminal equipment this D Channel emulates in exchanging data with the network Your required input is limited to the following choices e 00 User Side default This value indicates this D Channel emulates subscriber terminal equipment in an ISDN connection e 01 Network Side This value indicates this D Channel emulates the central office terminal equipment in an ISDN connection C R bit is inverted E 06 B Channel Selection Mode list This list indicates the order in which this D Channel will hunt for an available B Channel Your required input is limited to the following choices Page 124 e 00 Disable This value indicates this D Channel does not hunt for an available B Channel e 01 Linear Clockwise e 02 Linear Counter Clockwise e 03 Circular Clockwise e 04 Circular Counter Clockwise E 07 Location list This list indicates the location of your EXS Switch that will be sent on this D Channel when a call control even
125. ar end through which the call is being made Your required input is limited to the following choices Delay Dial This value indicates the EXS Switch goes off hook when a channel is seized that is receives a request for service and remains in this state until connection with a receiver then goes on hook at connection and waits for the far end to send digits Dial Tone This value indicates the EXS Switch goes off hook when a channel is seized that is receives a request for service and remains in this state through connection with a receiver through playing of dial tone to the far end and through receipt of digits sent from the far end Immediate This value indicates the EXS Switch goes off hook when a channel is seized that is receives a request for service and remains in this state through connection with a receiver and the immediate receipt of digits sent from the far end Note lIf this channel is connected to a VRU you must select Immediate None default This value indicates no method has been assigned no method is required to start an ISDN B Channel s incoming call Wink Start This value indicates the EXS Switch connects with a receiver when a channel is seized that is receives a request for service then sends an off hook on hook that is a wink to cause the far end to send its digits This list indicates how to start a channel s outgoing call that is compatible with equipment channel s far end to wh
126. ased on the out going channel s return SS7 cause code The SS7 call routing based on the out going trunk return SS7 cause code is a two part setup e Configure the SS7 Cause Code table described below e Assign the table to the Route List see Grouping Channels The SS7 Cause Code table will only be used on out going SS7 trunks that return a cause code The SS7 Cause Code table can be displayed by selecting the sub menu SS7 Cause Code under the GUI s Option heading SS7 Cause Code Routing User Defined Release W Cause y 78 Next Available Route Play Busy Tone Release W Cause Route to VRU Release W Cause Next Available Route Release W Cause Figure 4 43 SS7 Cause Code Routing screen When finished adding changing and or deleting press the Save button to save to the Close button to exit without saving To activate SS7 Cause Code Routing from the Options menu select SS7 Cause Code E2 Connected to E2 Host localhost File Equipment Maintenance System Admin 557 ISDN Routing esisi Window Help Callback TAC YRU Branding 557 Cause Code Tone Busy Linear Figure 4 44 SS7 Cause Code Activation Page 160 Add Modify an SS7 Cause Code Enter the cause code value select a cause code action from the drop down box and if a return code is applicable enter it in the User Defined field Then press the Add Modify button Delete an SS7 Cause Code Select an SS7 code by clic
127. ates the digit table s name Your required input is limited to 19 alphanumeric characters Page 211 Adding digit lookup entries to a digit table Once you have named a digit table you must assign attributes to it These attributes include the actual pattern of digits the Host will look for in the incoming call s destination number and will then associate with a route for that call All of these attributes make up a digit lookup entry each digit table is practically limited by RAM to about 7000 digit table entries per digit table The Digit Table Attributes screen enables you to create digit lookup entries Digit Table Attributes x For Digit Table Number 4 Name DNIS Digit Lookup if 876 Digit Xlate 1 li PR ANIZCLI Xlate Limit U Option Digit Tabe vw Route Table 00 new2005 y Lookup Type z yl Cancel Figure 4 96 Digit Table Attributes screen layout Selecting a specific digit table by double clicking it and perhaps first displaying all digit tables by clicking the Digit Table s sign then clicking Add Table Digit Tables Digit Table 00 Fie Tables Add Table Attributes Digit Xlate 1 Digit Xlate 2 TI ANI CLI Xle Modify Table Attributes 198 xx Delete Table Attributes 444 XX JE es fn ey Find Route 617 ce 508 XX 44428 580 XX Figure 4 97 Digit Table Attributes screen activation Page 212 Name line
128. ation Successful This message indicates the translations test succeeded and the circuit has been verified CIN comparison mismatch This message indicates a Circuit Identification Name mismatch exists in this CIC s local and remote configurations and the circuit cannot be verified This message also gives local and remote CIN numbers as well as sequenced local and remote CLLI codes You may need to confer with personnel controlling the remote switch to obtain the required matching configuration for this CIC Circuit group characteristics mismatch This message indicates a Circuit Group Characteristics mismatch exists in this CIC s local and remote configurations and the circuit cannot be verified This message also gives characteristics of the carrier glare control carrier alarm and continuity check You may need to confer with personnel controlling the remote switch to obtain the required matching configuration for this CIC Page 156 Translations verification Failed This message indicates the translations test failed and the circuit cannot be verified You may need to confer with personnel controlling the remote switch to obtain the required matching configuration for this CIC Translations verification Failed Remote CLLI This message indicates the translations test failed and the circuit cannot be verified but also gives the CLLI received from the remote switch You may need to confer with personnel controlling the remote s
129. ation Indicator For SS7 this field is displayed Valid selections are e 00 Allowed 01 Restricted e None For additional details contact your technical representative Screening Indicator For SS7 this field is displayed Valid selections are 00 Not screened 01 Verified and passed 02 Verified and failed 03 Network Provided None For additional details contact your technical representative Assigning Post Routing to a Route List s Resource Group To assign post routing select the Route List where you wish it applied then click on the Resource Group to select it then right click to see the option to modify Route Lists outline File Route Lists Resource Route List ai _ Resource Group Type Post Route DNIS Translation ANI Translation 1000_TST utii E ccr Add Resource Group Ecc Delete Resource Group s Ec Modify Resource Group ISDN Span 3 Giver RL Enci Bl outline in Figure 4 84 Modify Resource Group Within a Route List The following dialog box appears Page 203 Route Lists 57 Cause Codes File Route Lists Resource Route List Resource Group Type Post Route DNIS Translation E 1000_TsT Ecc Blc Il SoN Span 3 Add Resource Group x ive RL mcr iil outline Resource Group outline v Mi Paetec Post Routing Option Jie x ph 00 01 RL Ell Qwest Post Routin Cx o x cea Pl owestz pe Pl reorder Ml rinaina Figure 4 85 Select Post Routi
130. ay see Fan Tray for details on the functionality monitorability and configurability of this fan tray Associated with this icon is the node if a multinode EXS Switch and slot number where the specified fan tray resides etal Xv icons The first icon represents the ISDN PRI card see ISDN PRI Card for details with the card in service The second indicates the card is out of service New to 2007 out of service cards may be configured Associated with this icon is the node if a multinode EXS Switch and slot number where the specified card resides m icon This icon represents the chassis or node in a multinode EXS Switch and or the chassis s or node s midplane see Midplane for details on the functionality of this kind of card Associated with this icon is the node if a multinode EXS Switch and logical slot number of the midplane together with the chassis serial icon This icon represents the power supply card see Power Supply Card for details on the functionality monitorability and configurability of this kind of card Associated with this icon is the node if a multinode EXS Switch and slot number where the specified card resides lz icon This icon represents the SS7 card see SS7 Card for details on the functionality monitorability and configurability of this kind of card Associated with this icon is the node if a multinode EXS Switch and slot number where the specified card resides icon This icon repre
131. but its card has been taken out of service or when the Host was not able to configure a link for some reason The following information appears in the SS7 Link Attributes screen This list indicates SS7 links you can configure Your required input is limited to a link number between 00 and 31 These lists indicate the channel rightmost list in the span leftmost list that is the SS7 link you specified in the Link list above Your required input which must be coordinated with your SS7 network provider is limited to the channels and spans in these lists This list indicates the SS7 link set identified by its number and its terminating APC with which this SS7 link is associated Your required input is limited to the associations in this list This field indicates the Signaling Link Code that determines the order in which this SS7 link is hunted within its own SS7 link set for message distribution Your required input which must be coordinated with your SS7 network provider is limited to a number between zero and 15 Page 141 KB s list This list indicates the bit rate at which SS7 messages are passed across this SS7 link Your required input which must be coordinated with your SS7 network provider is limited to the following choices e 56 This value indicates this SS7 link s bit rate is 56 kilobits per second e 64 This value indicates this SS7 link s bit rate is 64 kilobits per second Remarks field This field indicates
132. c channels will select all channels within the box that is the range of channels will be continuous Start this box to the right of text in the window s leftmost column then drag it leftward up or down if the entire window is filled with columns if the window does not have columns extending to the right side of the window start this box beyond the rightmost column then drag it leftward up or down Page 238 Also pressing SHIFT and clicking on specific channels will select these channels and all channels in between that is the range of channels will be continuous Alternatively pressing CTRL and clicking on specific channels will select only these specific channels that is the range of channels will be discontinuous Placing Channels in Service Clicking In Service in the Span and Channel Status screen s Channel menu places the channels you select in service New feature By clicking on the In Service or Out Service button you can now place all the channels in the span in out of service with one click Note You must place channels out of service when configuring the channel information Once the configuration is complete the channels may be restored to service Any channel taken out of service will not be used in its respective resource group It will however become available once the channel is restored to service Span 08 Channel States File Span Error Monitor EE 008 Span Out Service In Servic
133. can simultaneously receive DTMF signals subject to u law on up to 22 channels if DSP ONE model or 13 channels if MFDSP model per node of your EXS Switch Energy Detect Review your Escel Switching Hardware Manual or contact your E2 technical representative if you wish to use this feature MFR1 GA DSP can simultaneously generate MFR1 signals subject to A law on all channels per node of your EXS Switch MFR1 Gu DSP can simultaneously generate MFR1 signals subject to u law on all channels per node of your EXS Switch MFRI RA DSP can simultaneously receive MFR1 signals subject to A law on up to 45 channels if DSP ONE model or 13 channels if MFDSP model per node of your EXS Switch MFR1 Ru default for DSPs 0 1 2 and 3 on SIMM 2 DSP can simultaneously receive MFR1 signals subject to u law on up to 45 channels if DSP ONE model or 13 channels if MFDSP model per node of your EXS Switch MFR2 GAB DSP can generate MFR2 signals subject to A law in response to signals received by its node of your EXS Switch MFR2 GAF DSP can simultaneously generate MFR2 signals subject to A law on all channels per node of your EXS Switch MFR2 GuB DSP can generate MFR2 signals subject to u law in response to signals received by its node of your EXS Switch MFR2 GuF DSP can simultaneously generate MFR2 signals subject to u law on all channels per node of your EXS Switch MFR2 RA DSP can simultaneously receive MFR2 signals subject to A
134. cast Channel is in one way use completion type of Broadcast e Busy Channel is connected to internal busy tone e Conf gt xxxx Channel is part of conference ID xxxx hex e Dialing Channel is dialing e Disabled Channel is acknowledged out of service by the user e Error Channel is experiencing an error condition and is non functional e Far End Alarm Span is out of service and is receiving alarm from the far end e On Hold Channel is on hold from a hook flash e IDLE Channel is available for use e In Queue Channel is waiting in an ACD queue for an available channel e In Seizure Channel has just been seized e Listen ID xxxx Channel is listen only to a conference ID xxxx hex e Log off Channel is associated with an ACD queue and is currently logged out e Message Channel is playing an announcement e Out of Service Channel is out of service by user but not yet acknowledged by the EXS Switch e Releasing Channel is being released by the EXS Switch e Reorder Channel is connected to internal reorder tone e Ringing Channel is connected to internal ringback tone e VRU Out of Service Channel is unable to receive service from the VRU assigned to it e Waiting Channel is waiting for connection to an announcement You can select channels or groups of channels for the purpose of placing them in or out of service Note Clicking a specific channel will select the channel Dragging a box around specifi
135. cation where your EXS Switch is installed Your optional input permitted only if this CIC is associated with an SS7 stack whose ISUP is ANSI compliant see Creating SS7 Stacks is limited to a Bellcore defined code of 11 alphanumeric characters Note This code s first four characters designate the location s city or town its next two characters designate the location s state its next two characters designate a specific building at this location its final three characters designate a specific floor or room at this location For example HYANMA225TH designates a location in Hyannis Massachusetts in Building 22 on the fifth floor This field indicates the CLLI Common Language Location Identification code of the location of a voice switch where this CIC of your EXS Switch terminates Your optional input permitted only if this CIC is associated with an SS7 stack whose ISUP is ANSI compliant see Creating SS7 Stacks is limited to a Bellcore defined code of 11 alphanumeric characters Note This code s format is the same as the format noted for the Local CLLI field Page 149 Setting CIC options The CICs are now ready to be given attributes other than their defaults The 57 CIC Options screen enables you to make these assignments SS CIC Options Figure 4 38 SS7 CIC Options screen layout Selecting one or more CICs in the same span displaying in the SS7 CICs screen then clicking Configure Options in this screen s
136. ces A amp D This value indicates signaling is both analog and digital Analog This value indicates signaling is analog Digital This value indicates signaling is digital Unknown default This value indicates the nature of signaling is unknown Alarm Carrier Ind list Local Clli field Remote Clli field This list indicates the alarm carrier indicator Your input permitted only if this CIC is associated with an SS7 stack whose ISUP is ANSI compliant see Creating SS7 Stacks is limited to the following choices e HW Cxr e SWCxr e Unknown default This field indicates the local CLLI Common Language Location Identification code for this CIC s CIC group This field indicates the remote CLLI Common Language Location Identification code for this CIC s CIC group Page 153 Viewing CIC Options Once you click the S 7 CICs Options screen s OK button the CIC options you have added or changed will display in the SS7 CICs screen scrollable if the screen is more than full across the row of the Span Chan identifying this CIC This row divides into columns that incorporate the meanings if not the exact labels of the SS7 CICs Options screen s parameters for the selected CIC In addition this row includes a Local Status column and a Remote Status column that indicate what each switch EXS Switch or local switch and the far end switch or remote switch considers a CIC s state to be You must click Circuit
137. click the View by Node button to change the Equipment List screen to View by Node mode This mode is available only if you have configured an EXNET ring Page 41 Power Supply Card The power supply card s purpose is to take in 48V DC from an external power source and put out 5V DC from each of its power modules the EXS 1000 chassis power supply has one module the EXS 2000 chassis power supply has three modules You cannot make power supply cards redundant However you can put an additional power supply card in the same node of your EXS Switch and wire it to the same or more securely to a different 48V DC power source see Excel Switching s Hardware installation and Maintenance Guide for details The second power supply card s voltage will be pooled with the first Should one power supply card fail the EXS chassis can still have sufficient power from the other The Power Supply Card screen enables you to view the status of a power supply card Equipment List x List by Type C List by Slot ID C List by Node DSP Card Open EX CPU Card EXNET Controller Card Fan Tray ISDN Card Midplane Power Supply Card F 00 17 Power Supply F 00 18 Power Supply F 01 17 Power Supply F 0 18 Power Supply 57 Card T1 Card DAA A Close Figure 3 7 Power Supply Card screen layout You can activate this screen by clicking Power Supply Card in the Equipment List screens View by Type
138. contain user definable information relating to digit tables exclusion tables Resource Groups route lists TOD groups client applications etc Log files are created and used by the Host to log various functions and events The information recorded in the log files includes critical errors alarms operator events etc The system files are created and updated by the Host to store various system information such as login passwords country codes CIC codes redundancy files ISDN channels board status messages cable IDs etc The E2E files are created and updated by the Host These files contain information such as startup messages for all tasks operator menus and prompts call completion types incoming start dial disk copy text errors etc Page 9 2 System Admin Overview This chapter describes how to setup system specific information such as password security EXS Switch configuration and software management Using the System Admin menu options you can Change the name password or security privilege of a user Add a user to the system Delete a user from the system Select the desired method of Call Detail Record output Specify the number of days in which the system will automatically delete the oldest CDR files Configure the ACD event record output Select a communications port that allows an active Host to communicate with a second Host acting as a standby Select a TCPAP port or log file to output alarm
139. cts only 21 digits of DTMF If the Excel Switch receives 21 digits in 21 seconds or less call processing is started If 21 digits are not received within 21 seconds the incoming call is connected to Reorder This incoming type indicates that the Excel Switch collects only 3 digits of DTMF If the Excel Switch receives 3 digits in 2 seconds or less call processing is started If 3 digits are not received within 2 seconds the incoming call is connected to Reorder This incoming type indicates that the Excel Switch collects only 4 digits of DTMF If the switch receives 4 digits in 2 seconds or less call processing is started If 4 digits are not received within 2 seconds the incoming call is connected to Reorder This incoming type indicates that the Excel Switch collects only 4 digits of DTMF If the Excel Switch receives 4 digits in 10 seconds or less call processing 1s started If 4 digits are not received within 10 seconds the incoming call is connected to Reorder This incoming type indicates that the Excel Switch collects only 7 digits of DTMF If the Excel Switch receives 7 digits in 3 seconds or less call processing is started If 7 digits are not received within 3 seconds the incoming call is connected to Reorder This incoming type indicates that the Excel Switch collects up to 24 digits of DTMF The DTMF key signals the incoming channel that the digit string is complete If the DTMF key is not detected in 20 seconds and no dig
140. d the outgoing digits are outpulsed After outpulse the call is cut through The calling party will not hear call progress tones This completion type should not be used for FXO channels Sample ACD Event Log A portion of a sample ACD event record is shown below followed by a description of each record Events are in ASCII format with comma delimiters Sample ACD Event IC 7B 00 01 1 1 05 04 97 10 48 08 6035551212 6032251212 N A OS 7B 00 01 00 06 05 04 97 10 48 09 6035551212 6032251212 OUT_06 IC 7B 00 01 00 06 05 04 97 10 48 19 6035551212 6032251212 OUT_06 RL 7B 00 01 00 06 05 04 97 10 48 26 6035551212 6032251212 OUT_06 Figure D 1 ACD Event Log Sample ACD Event Log Descriptions The following are the most comment ACD events IC Event Span Channel Date Time Incoming DNIS ANI Route List Name Incoming call generated upon an incoming request for service OS Event Trk A Trk B Date Time Dialed Number ANI Route List Name Outseize Voice Mail generated on outseize message to an agent position CT Event Trk A Trk B Date and Time Dialed Number ANI Route List Name Connect In to VM generated when connected call is answered Other Possible Events in an ACD Event Record RL Event Trk A Trk B Date Time Dialed Number ANI Route List Name Voice Mail Release generated when Trk B releases IQ Event Trk A
141. d 6032246511 556032246511 CC blank Invalid II digits removed from 6032246511 sent number Host rejects invalid incoming Il digits 006032246511 CC 6035551212 ANI CLI replaced in sent 006035551212 number none CC 6035551212 ANI CLI supplied in sent 6035551212 number 006032246511 XX blank Valid II digits removed from 6032246511 sent number 6032246511 XX blank Number sent as received 6032246511 556032246511 XX blank Invalid II digits removed from 6032246511 sent number Host rejects invalid incoming Il digits 006032246511 XX 6035551212 Valid II digits removed from 6035551212 and ANI CLI replaced in sent number 556032246511 XX 6035551212 Invalid II digits removed from 6035551212 and ANI CLI replaced in sent number Host rejects invalid incoming II digits 6032246511 XX 6035551212 ANI CLI replaced in sent 6035551212 number none XX 6035551212 ANI CLI supplied in sent 6035551212 number 006032246511 27 blank Valid II digits replaced in sent 276032246511 number 006032246511 27 6035551212 Valid II digits and ANI CLI 276035551212 replaced in sent number 6032246511 27 6035551212 Valid I digits added to and 276035551212 ANI CLI replaced in sent number none 27 6035551212 Valid II digits and ANI CLI 276035551212 supplied in sent number 006032246511 55 blank Invalid II digits replaced in 556032246511 sent number Host does not validate outgoing II digits
142. d digit table EVEN IF THERE ARE ERRORS A typical error is having the import file specify a route list that does not exist To import a digit table s data first select the digit table then select File Import Table from the specific digit table s screen You are then prompted for a location to import the file from The default file name is Digit Table CSV Page 223 New to version 4 7 The import process has been optimized so importing a 20 000 record file now takes under 2 minutes instead of over 90 minutes During the import process the status is displayed import Result Import Started Records Imported 13998 Import Result Rec 19688 Updated DNIS 201227 Rec 19689 Updated DNIS 2012268 Rec 19690 Updated DNIS 2012258 Rec 19691 Updated DNIS 2012248 Rec 19692 Updated DNIS 201223 Rec 19693 Updated DNIS 2012228 Rec 19694 Updated DNIS 2012218 Rec 19695 Updated DNIS 201220 Rec 19696 Updated DNIS 201219 Rec 19697 Updated DNIS 201218 Rec 19698 Updated DNIS 20121 7 Rec 19699 Updated DNIS 2012168 Rec 19700 Updated DNIS 2012158 Rec 19701 Updated DNIS 201214 Rec 19702 Updated DNIS 201213 Rec 19703 Updated DNIS 201212 Rec 19704 Updated DNIS 2012108 Rec 19705 Updated DNIS 2012098 Rec 19706 Updated DNIS 201208 Rec 19707 Updated DNIS 201207 Rec 19708 Updated DNIS 201206 Rec 19709 Updated DNIS 2012028 Rec 19710 Updated DNIS 2012008 Total records read 19710 val
143. d patterns of digits for lookup and specify digits to enter for validation ANI Table Attributes x ANI Lookup 4156811553 Verified Yes C No Code Length 4 Index A Figure 4 58 ANI Table Designation screen layout Click on the ROUTE TABLES button then click on the ANI Table icon on the left Next select Tables and click on Add Table Digit Tables Digit Table 00 File Tables Attributes SN Add Table Digit Look Rename Table 10 823 Delete Table inc 7718 F i 617 Import Table 6038 Export Table 508 44428 Figure 4 59 ANI Table designation screen activation Page 174 The following information appears in the ANI Table Designation screen ANI Lookup field This field specifies the ANI to match Wild Cards are not supported Verified radio button If Yes the caller is required to enter digits that are in the index table specified If No the caller can enter any digits but they must be as long as the Code Length specified Code Length field Length of digits to manually enter This can vary between 1 and 20 Index Table Specifies the table to use to verify the digits entered if the Verified radio button is selected Adding digit lookup entries to an ANI Table You can either add multiple entries though importing and exporting or you can manually enter them by performing the following Select a specific ANI table by double clicking it and first displaying all tables by clicking the
144. d the Host The Host and EXS Switch communicate via API Application Programming Interface messages The way the Host works is the EXS Switch receives the incoming digits in most cases the ANI CLI and dialed number The Host is informed that digits have been received and processes the digits based on how they are configured in the various tables within the Host The Host sends the outgoing digits to the EXS Switch and the call is routed to the called party the dialed number Each Host is unique since it is configured on how you want to receive the incoming digits and send the outgoing digits The digits signals sent by the telco are recognized in the Host by the incoming type The incoming type defines the signaling protocol used on the incoming calls for a particular trunk and consists of incoming rules and inseize control instructions Incoming rules define the digit collection method and inseize control instructions define the signaling used Incoming types supported in the Host include DTMF DNIS ANI Feature Group D and Auto Terminating to name a few They are described in detail in Appendix A After the digits are received they must be configured for signaling and outpulsing to the far end on an outgoing call The completion type and ANI CLI handle this process Completion types supported in the Host include Busy Reorder Ringing Feature Group D and Music on Hold to name a few They are described in detail in Appendices B
145. de in the Main Menu Tool Bar s Equipment menu with this screen s Configure D Channel NFAS Groups button engaged then an available D Channel will activate this screen The following information appears in the Add ISDN Secondary D Channel screen Span list This list indicates a span supporting ISDN PRI service other than the span holding the primary D Channel with which this secondary D Channel is associated Your required input is limited to the span IDs in this list Channel list This list indicates the channel that is the backup or secondary D Channel of the primary D Channel you have assigned see NFAS Associating D Channel with up to 10 T1 spans Your required input is limited either to any channel but typically channel 24 internally numbered 23 for ISDN PRI service on an actual T1 span or to channel 30 internally numbered 29 for ISDN PRI service on an El span channel 30 is timeslot 16 on an actual El span Page 127 Assigning attributes to B Channels Once you have assigned attributes to the D Channel and perhaps created NFAS groups and secondary D Channels you must assign attributes to the B Channels associated with this D Channel The JSDN B Channel Parameters screen enables you to assign these attributes to these channels 3 ISDN B Channel Parameters x For Span 4 Channel 0 E 01 Network Type 01 Do Not Include Network Specific Facilities NSF IE v E 02 Outgoing Info Transfer e E 03 Calling Number
146. diately RAM TEST FAILED Test proved random access memory was unreliable If resetting this card does not remove this message you must call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Page 60 Artwork Revision line This line indicates the revision level of this T1 card s circuit design Serial Number line This line indicates the serial number of this T1 card Software ROM line This line indicates the major then the minor revision of the ROM software that is the BIOS installed on this T1 card Build line Updating card status Querying Fault Log Clearing Fault Log This line indicates the build number of the RAM software that is the System Software sometimes called pSOS downloaded from an EX CPU card to this T1 card Note The Switch Status screen displays the actual version of this software Clicking the T7 Card screen s UPDATE STATUS button after this screen has been active for a while will query this T1 card again to determine its current status then display this status in the T Card screen Clicking the T7 Card screen s QUERY FAULT LOG button displays this T1 card s Fault Log see Fault Log query with fault for an EX CPU card s Fault Log example Clicking the T Card screen s CLEAR FAULT LOG button clears this T1 card s Fault Log and resets the number of faults to zero zero also appears when no faults are detected on a query see Fault Log cleared or clear of faults for an EX CPU
147. dicates this B Channel s default indication of call screening on outbound calls Your required input is limited to the following choices 01 User provided not screened 02 User provided verified and passed 03 User provided verified and failed 04 Network provided E 07 Called Number Type list This list indicates this B Channel s default identification a Called Party type of number on outbound calls Your required input is limited to the following choices 01 Unknown type of number 02 International number 03 National number 04 Subscriber number 05 Abbreviated number E 08 Called Number Plan ID list This list indicates this B Channel s default identification of a Called Party number plan on outbound calls Your required input is limited to the following choices 01 Unknown numbering plan 02 ISDN Numbering Plan Recommendation E 164 E 163 03 Private numbering plan 04 Telephony numbering plan E 09 Outgoing Response Enable list Not currently enabled Page 130 Viewing attributes of all ISDN B Channels Once you click the ISDN B Channel Parameters screen s OK button the ISDN B Channel parameters you have added or changed will display in the ISDN B Chan s screen scrollable if the screen is more than full across the row of the Span Chan identifying this ISDN B Channel This row divides into columns that incorporate the meanings if not the exact labels of the ISDN B Channel Parame
148. ditCardACD Page 197 Number of calls allowed in Queue Queue Size Timeout in seconds In Queue Overflow Queue Full Modify ACD Queue Add ACD queue Size specifies how many calls will be queued before a Queue Full condition is triggered Calls in queue are serviced first in first out as trunks become available idle Note Queue size can range from O to 99 By using the number O in the size field callers terminate to the Queue Full condition and no calls are queued The time in seconds that a call will be held in queue before going to overflow Once the time expires a call is routed to the trunk group specified in the Overflow field A Timeout duration of 0 seconds allows all calls to remain in queue until their callers hang up Specifies the trunk group to which calls are routed while in queue The in queue trunk group may connect to a VRU for voice announcements to ringback signal to music or any other arrangement that callers will hear while waiting in queue Specifies the trunk group to which a call is routed when timeout occurs The overflow trunk group may connect to a VRU for voice announcement or may be a tone trunk group such as reorder tone or busy tone or some other call progress tone Specifies the trunk group to which a call is routed when the number of calls already in queue has reached the Size parameter Once calls have overflowed they are not re routed back to the original route list that contains
149. ds the incoming call e digit type DTMF e method FIXED Inseize Control Instructions Network Agent Not Assigned e Report incoming call with digits e Wait for host control message This incoming type is similar to an Attendant except a separate computer is used to outdial numbers place the Attendant in a Not Available State and outdial from his her station The user is required to have their own server application This incoming type is used for reference indicating that spans and channels have not been configured for a particular incoming type Page A 21 Operator This incoming type is used when ACD calling is required When the position goes off hook the operator is Idle and ready to receive calls Three way calling is not supported Sprint This incoming type terminates a standard Sprint channel Incoming Digit Format Stage Incoming Rule Instructions String 1 KP Dialed Number String 2 KP ANI ST e strings 2 digit type MFRI method use KP and ST string 1 method use KP and ST string 2 term digit STIP e Receive stage N address data Answer Report incoming call with digits Page A 22 Term Tandem This incoming type is an incoming terminating FGD resource group from a Host The incoming call follows the basic FGD format with the exception of the confirmation wink The wink is not required in this mode The Host routes the call through the normal routing methods Answer su
150. e Pt Pt 02 Brayton Pt 03 Frank Figure 5 2 Switch Status screen activation Page 229 Updating Switch Status Clicking the UPDATE STATUS button updates information in the Switch Status screen The following information appears in the Switch Status screen Select Node ID list This list indicates the node ID of each EXS Switch in an EXNET configuration Select the node ID of the EXS Switch you want to view statistics If your configuration is not EXNET the default ID is No Exnet Last Switch Status Update line This line displays the date and time of the last switch status update Host Link Status area This area of the Switch Status screen enables you to view counts of errors that may have occurred between the Host computer and the EXS Switch The following lines appear in the Host Link Status area Port Purges line This line indicates the number of channel purges recorded by the Host Unacknowledged Host Messages line This line indicates the number of messages the Host sent to the EXS Switch without a return acknowledgment Each time the Host sends a message to the EXS Switch an cknowledgment is sent back to the Host to indicate that the EXS Switch received the message correctly and that the message is legitimate Never Serviced by Host line This line indicates the number of messages acknowledged by the Host and never serviced by the EXS Switch This indicates that a valid message was not processed by the EX
151. e Out Of Service Query Status 04 Refresh Rate O3 IDLE 04 IDLE 05 IDLE Figure 5 8 In Service activation Placing Channels Out of Service Clicking Out of Service in the Span and Channel Status screen s Channel menu places the channels you select out of service Note You must place channels out of service when configuring the channel information Once the configuration is complete the channels may be restored to service Any channel taken out of service will not be used in its respective resource group It will however become available once the channel is restored to service Span 08 Channel States File channe Span Error Monitor P In Service 008 X Span Qut Service In Service Out Of Service T T a aE gt lt A d O Query Status 0 Refresh Rate 03 IDLE 04 IDLE OS IDLE Figure 5 9 Out of Service activation Placing Entire Span in Service Clicking the In Service button in the Span and Channel Status screen will place the entire span in service Page 239 In Service Figure 5 10 Place entire span in service button Placing Entire Span Out of Service Clicking the Out Service button in the Span and Channel Status screen will place the entire span in service Out Service Figure 5 11 Place entire span out of service button Query Channel Status screen The Query Channel Status screen enables you to retrieve configuration information for a specific channel from the EXS S
152. e Pak e Audible Signaing None o Account Code Default DNIS Default ANI Collect Carrier Code E Dutgoing Codeset 6 C Yes No Cancel Figure 4 69 Channel Feature Attributes screen layout Page 186 Clicking Configure Channel Attributes in the Channel Features screen s Channel menu will activate the Channel Feature Attributes screen Incoming Type list Outgoing Type list Channel Features File aia spa Ritchie Outgoing T PT Tbl Dig Tbl Netw A o Clear Attributes None Pt 0 Dto None 008 01 T1 Collect Digits None J o fo None 008 02 T1 Collect Digits None Pto Dto None 2ENNa 03 ti MTME 1 12 Mane Rn Ten Mane Figure 4 70 Channel Features Attributes screen activation Note Double clicking a specific channel will also activate the Channel Feature Attributes screen Dragging a box around specific channels will select all channels within the box that is the range of channels will be continuous Start this box to the right of text in the window s leftmost column then drag it leftward up or down if the entire window is filled with columns if the window does not have columns extending to the right side of the window start this box beyond the rightmost column then drag it leftward up or down Also pressing SHIFT and clicking on specific channels will select these channels and all channels in between that is the range of channels will be continuous Alternatively pressing CTRL and clic
153. e country code If the third digit of the Inx is a five 5 inserts 01 operator request in front of the dialed number If the third digit is not a five 5 the Host inserts 011 in front of the dialed number Second Stage International First Stage North American First String Contains the II digits and 7 to 10 digit ANI Second String Contains the dialed number Incoming Rule Page A 19 stages 2 stage 1 strings 1 stage 2 strings 2 digit type MFR1 method use KP and ST string 1 method use KP and ST string 2 International Call Inseize Control Instructions Generate inseize acknowledgment wink 1 Receive stage 1 digits Generate wink 2 Receive stage 2 digits Generate wink 3 Report incoming call with digits Wait for host control message North American Call Inseize Control Instructions Intl Ftr Grp D ISDN LAN Agent LAN Supervisor Generate inseize acknowledgment wink 1 Receive stage 1 digits Generate wink 2 Report incoming call with digits Wait for host control message The Request for Service message contains 2 stages of digits if the call is International and 1 stage if the call is North American The host determines what type of call was placed and sends the proper inseize control instructions to the EXS Switch to complete the digit collection and signaling required This incoming type is similar to Feature Group D but if the 7 digit DNIS is received it takes th
154. e 1 e String 1 KP II ANI 7 10D ST e String 2 KP Dialed Number 7 10D ST First String Contains the information II digits and the 7 to10 digit ANI Second String Contains the 7 to 10 digit dialed number Reference Digit Table Note The resource group must have a completion type of FGD This ANI CLI type conforms to the Bellcore TR NPL 000258 Specification for E amp M wink Terminating Protocol The outpulse only contains stage Digits are outpulsed using MFR1 only Stage 1 e String 1 KP Dialed Number 7 10 D ST This ANI CLI type completes calls to an Autoplex 1000 switch using a non standard Feature Group D When the MF Lucent type is selected for a particular channel the incoming ANI or translated ANI is added to the dialed number on the outgoing call Page B 4 Outgoing Digit Format None SS7 Basic TOPS Outgoing Digit Format This ANI CLI type determines the protocol of how the digits are arranged and what type of digits are sent Note The resource group must have a completion type of Feature Group D Stage 1 e String 1 KP II ANI CIC 10D ST First String Dialed number digits are retrieved from the digit table entries The ANI and II digits should be what were received on the incoming call or the translated II This ANI CLI type is Not Assigned Used for reference this option provides a means to indicate that spans and channels have not been configured for a particular ANI type When
155. e Host and up to eight VRUs System Setup E Switch Setup Node Setup Redundancy Setup Alarm Setup CDR Setup Application Server Link Server Data Link VAL 1 link TCPAP y YRU 5 link Drine gt VARU 2 link TCPAP y VAL 6 link Drine y VARU 3 link Offine gt VAL 7 link Offine gt VAU 4 link Oftine gt VRU Blink Ofine DK Cancel Apply Figure 2 18 Application Server Link screen Server Data Link list This list indicates the desired server link for the Data Server Click one of the following list items e Offline default No Data Server link connection e TCP IP For connecting the server over an Ethernet link The Remote network name Network IP address and Well Known Port fields are displayed e NETBIOS For connecting the server via NETBIOS The Host network name and Remote network name as defined in the screen VRU N Link list This list indicates the desired VRU link You can connect up to eight VRUs to the Host Click one of the following list items e Offline No VRU link connection e TCP IP For connecting a VRU over an Ethernet link The Remote network name Network IP address and Well Known Port fields are displayed Page 25 Node Setup screen This screen enables you to specify the IP address of all nodes in the system While Redundancy Setup configures the IP addresses of the first node if multiple nodes have been connected via EXNET then all the IP addresses of the CPUs on
156. e area code from the ANI and adds it to the DNIS to make 10 digits This incoming type indicates the incoming Request for Service message from the ISDN D channel Therefore no incoming information is set up for the span and channel The B Channel assignments and configuration set determines the Request for Service message format Contact your E2 technical representative if you wish to use this type Contact your E2 technical representative if you wish to use this type Page A 20 MF Incoming Digit Format Incoming Rule This incoming type refers to Lucent formally an Autoplex switch The incoming parameters for a Feature Group D incoming type collects one digit string of MFR1 After the proper signaling is complete depending on the channel type the EXS Switch collects the proper amount of digits Stage e String 1 KP II ANI CIC 10D ST e First String Contains the II digits 10 digit ANI 4 digit CIC code and 10 digit dialed number e digit type DTMF e method FIXED Inseize Control Instructions MID Tandem Incoming Rule Generate inseize acknowledgment wink 1 Receive stage 1 digits Report incoming call with digits Wait for host control message This incoming type is used as incoming FGD from one Host that requires a connection to another Host The DTMF signaling type s default must be sent not used The incoming call is connected to the outgoing channel immediately Answer supervision propagates towar
157. e incoming start dial is configured for this channel Set up the Incoming Start Dial in the Routing Tables Channel Assignments function see Chapter 4 Configuring Channels and Routes Outgoing Start Dial line This line indicates the type of start dial used for outgoing call processing The Outgoing Start Dial type is determined by the channel type set for the channel Set up the Outgoing Start Dial in the Routing Tables Channel Assignments function see Chapter 4 Configuring Channels and Routes Distant End line This line indicates whether the distant end is in Park or Release mode Set up the Distant End in the Routing Tables Channel Features function see Chapter 4 Configuring Channels and Routes Page 241 Local End line This line indicates whether the local end is in Park or Release mode Set up the Local End in the Routing Tables Channel Features function see Chapter 4 Configuring Channels and Routes Answer Mode line This line indicates how each channel handles answer supervision Set up the Answer Mode in the Routing Tables Channel Features function see Chapter 4 Configuring Channels and Routes Refresh Rate screen The Refresh Rate screen enables you to set the update time for the Span and Channel Status screen Refresh Rate Figure 5 14 Refresh Rate screen layout On the Span and Channel Status screen s Channel menu click Refresh Rate to activate this screen Figure 5 15 Span 08 Channel States F
158. e is played to the incoming call After answer supervision has been detected from the distant end the call is cut through The calling party will not hear call progress tones No digits are outpulsed with this completion type This completion type seizes an outgoing channel After a successful seizure the received or translated digits are outpulsed to the distant end The incoming channel is then connected to the outgoing channel The call progress tones generated by the distant end or outgoing channel are heard by the incoming This completion type is designed to work with E amp M channels that provide outseize acknowledgment E amp M channels acknowledge the seizure with a wink and FXS FXO channels do not This completion type works in situations when digits need to be collected after a call is answered Upon acceptance of the outseize command ringback tone is played to the incoming call After answer supervision is detected from the distance end the outgoing digits are outpulsed After outpulse the call is cut through The calling party will not hear call progress tones This completion type should not be used for FXO trunks Page C 4 Appendix D Automatic Call Distribution ACD Event Log Formats This completion type works in situations where digits need to be collected after a call is answered Upon acceptance of the outseize command ringback tone is played to the incoming call After answer supervision is detected from the distant en
159. e link If all links in a link set are red the associated link set will also be red and not available for SS7 messaging see Viewing attributes of all SS7 link sets To put this link into service highlight the link s row then click the INTo SERVICE button Page 142 Creating SS7 Network Routes Having created one or more SS7 links see Creating SS7 Links you must create a destination for the SS7 link set to which you have assigned these links The resulting route passes through an SS7 network to terminate at a voice switch channeled in the voice network to your EXS Switch The SS7 Route and Destination Attributes screen enables you to create an SS7 network route Assigning route destination attributes SS Route And Destination Attributes 00 gt APC 000 000 000 E SAD Figure 4 33 SS7 Route And Destination Attributes screen layout Page 143 DPC fields Selecting Routes Destinations then clicking the App button in the SS7 Card screen itself activated by clicking View by Type View by Slot ID or View by Node in the Main Menu Tool Bar s Equipment menu then a specific SS7 card will activate this screen 557 Card 001 001 001 00 000 000 000 01 Figure 4 34 SS7 Route And Destination Attributes screen activation Note The SS7 Card screen with Routes Destinations selected shows a green icon in the leftmost column when an adjacent route is in service A red icon displays when a
160. e number of faults to 0 0 also appears when no faults are detected on a query see Fault Log cleared or clear of faults for an EX CPU card s Fault Log example Putting EXNET Controller card in service Clicking the EXNET Card screen s IN SERVICE button makes this EXNET Controller card available for call processing Note lIf you are putting the EXNET card in service after having configured it and taken it out of service the Host will download the EXNET configuration data the card lost when you took it out of service Putting EXNET Controller card out of service Clicking the EXNET Card screen s OUT OF SERVICE button makes this EXNET Controller card unavailable for call processing Note You will want to take this card out of service if you need to test the card or if you discover the card is faulty Taking this card out of service automatically clears all EXNET configuration data Configuring EXNET ring Clicking the EXNET Card screen s RinG button activates the EXNET Ring Configure screen in which you configure the fiberoptic EXNET ring that will link nodes of your EXS Switch Page 89 Exnet Ring Configure Ring 1 Transmit and Receive 4Packes E Figure 3 30 EXNET Ring Configure screen layout The following information appears in the EXNET Ring Configure screen Ring ID list This list indicates the identity of the fiberoptic ring to which you are assigning or have assigned this EXNET Controller ca
161. e occurred in this DSP card You must retrieve this card s Fault Log see Querying Fault Log below then report its contents to Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately e MEMORY TEST FAILED This DSP card has failed a self test of its memory You must determine whether the card has a ROM or RAM problem see Memory Test line below e CARD FAILURE This DSP card failed for an unspecified reason If resetting this card does not remove this message you must call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Memory Test line This line indicates the result of a self test at the last status update of the integrity of ROM and RAM devices on this DSP card The following messages can occur e OK Test proved memory was reliable e ROM CHECKSUM FAILED Test proved read only memory was unreliable You must swap the card and call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately e RAM TEST FAILED Test proved random access memory was unreliable If resetting this card does not remove this message you must call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Artwork Revision line This line indicates the revision level of this DSP card s circuit design Page 51 Serial Number line This line indicates the serial number of this DSP card Software ROM line This line indicates the major then the minor revision of the ROM software that 1s the BIOS installed on this DSP card Build line Updating card status Querying Fault
162. e of the following values will occur LpBack This value indicates that traffic carrying light transmitted on this port is being looped back and received on this same port Page 92 Note During an EXNET ring s initialization ports are looped back If one of a node s ports is looped back after the EXNET ring goes into service a failure has occurred either in the transmitting or receiving fiberoptic cable of that port or in the light transceiver of the port in the adjacent node to which this port is connected Loopbacks in an up and running EXNET ring are the means for the ring to heal itself e Normal This value indicates that the traffic carrying light transmitted on this port is being received on a port port B if transmitted from port A or port A if transmitted from port B of an EXNET Controller card in an adjacent node Config column This column indicates whether the specified EXNET Controller card is master of the EXNET ring Updating EXNET ring status Clicking the EXNET Management screen s UPDATE STATUS button after this screen has been active for a while will query this EXNET ring again to determine its current status then display this status in the EXNET Management screen Putting EXNET ring in service Clicking the EXNET Management screen s PUT RING IN SERVICE button makes this EXNET ring available for call processing Putting EXNET ring out of service Clicking the EXNET Management screen s TAKE RING OUT
163. e this message you must swap this card and call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately e In service This processing card is in service e CONFIG DATA INVALID The configuration data for this processing card has been lost and has not been downloaded from the Host e FAULTS LOGGED One or more faults have occurred in this processing card You must retrieve this card s Fault Log see Querying Fault Log below then report its contents to Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately e MEMORY TEST FAILED This processing card has failed a self test of its memory You must determine whether the card has a ROM or RAM problem see Memory Test line below e CARD FAILURE This processing card failed for an unspecified reason If resetting this card does not remove this message you must call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Memory Test line This line indicates the result of a self test at the last status update of the integrity of ROM and RAM devices on this EXNET Controller card The following messages can occur e OK Test proved memory was reliable e ROM CHECKSUM FAILED Test proved read only memory was unreliable You must swap the card and call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately e RAM TEST FAILED Test proved random access memory was unreliable If resetting this card does not remove this message you must call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Artwork Revision line This line indicates
164. eating Alternate Routes for Calls to enable playing of a busy tone or reorder tone to a caller if the call cannot be completed New to Version 4 7 Post Routing Translation By assigning additional post routing translations after the digit table to the resource group the ANI DNIS and Called number can be translated differently by destination carrier Previously the digit table could only translate by the primary and alternate carrier now translations are virtually unlimited Details are given below Note You can assign up to 4 times 80 Tls or up to 4 times 64 El channels or CICs to a group The same channels or CICs can be assigned to different groups Page 162 Dragging dropping channels CICs into a resource group To select the appropriate channels or CICs and assign them to a specific resource group highlight the channels or CICs you want then drag and drop them into the Span Chan column of the highlighted resource group displaying in the Outgoing Resource Groups named resource group screen Tone Channels Resource Groups BUSY File Configure File Configure Channel InStart Dial E ig Completion Type Options ISDN Sequential ISDN ISDN Sequential 23 557 557 Type 3 Sequential 192 ISON ISDN Linear 23 osoz colto feam wrk start wal ISDN ISDN Sequential 23 557 557 Type 3 Sequential 48 8 04 T1 ISDN ISDN Sequential 23 ISON ISDN Sequential 92 Tone Type3 Sequential 2
165. ed Page 166 then connected simultaneously to an announcement channel in the group when the channel s announcement is ready for play e Barge In This value which displays only when signaling type is Tone indicates that calls on multiple incoming channels in the group will be connected at the time of connection to an announcement channel in the group even if the announcement is in progress Note Each channel in the group must have Brdcast as its Release Mode see Assigning Features to Channels e Paired This value indicates that incoming channels in the group are paired with outgoing channels in the same group outgoing channels are numbered 12 if T1 or 15 if El channels away from incoming channels for example incoming span channel 000 00 would be paired with span channel 000 12 on T1 span 000 e Sequential This value indicates that the hunt for an available outgoing channel occurs sequentially through up to 48 T1 or up to 60 El channels in the group that is a channel one number greater than the channel previously assigned to a call will be assigned to the next call if the previous channel is the last channel the next channel will be the first channel e Conf Bridge 4 This value which displays only when completion type is Conf Bridge indicates that only four connections to the conference can have both speaking and listening privileges e Conf Bridge 7 This value which displays only when completion type is
166. ed with the Smart Long Distance Application Server This corresponds to the billing capabilities for the ANI CLI of callers using ISDN and or Channel Associated Signaling CAS Refer to the Use SS7 for charge number for CPN and the Channel Features Network List SS7 Verify fields for details Configure Resource Group with CIP and TNS The user can configure the Resource Group with the Carrier Identification Parameter CIP and Transit Network Selection TNS Refer to Resource Groups Channel Attributes SS7 Parameters and Figure 4 43 Cause Code Routing screen for details Page 6 One Click Span in out of service The user can take a Span in out of service from the Span Channel State window with one click of a button Automatic Call Distribution Automatic Call Distribution has been enhanced Refer to ACD Queues for details Play ANI 900 Prompt to Conference Bridge This gives you the capability of playing an announcement before entering a conference bridge If this box is checked and under Options VRU Branding the prompt configuration is set the prompt will play Enhanced VRU Branding VRU Branding is now more easily managed and more extensive Refer to VRU Branding for details Least Cost Routing Using Digit Table Importing Digit Table Importing is a very powerful feature For example some people use a spreadsheet listing a dozen or more carriers and their rates which runs a macro that creates
167. ed in an adjacent slot and both cards are connected to the SS7 redundant I O device Reconfiguring SS7 Clicking the SS7 Card screen s RECONFIGURE SS7 button forces the Host to download SS7 configuration data to this SS7 card should its need for configuration data not be signaled to the Host Page 85 EXNET Controller card The EXNET Controller card s purpose is to carry voice traffic over a fiberoptic ring from to T1 and or El spans of the node housing this card to from T1 E1 spans of other EXNET ready nodes of your EXS Switch To communicate with other EXNET Controller cards on this ring an EXNET Controller card packetizes voice traffic itself encoded per timeslot or channel into eight bit bytes by pulse code modulation then multiplexes these packets for each channel of its node sending traffic to other nodes This same EXNET Controller card reverses the process that is demultiplexes and depacketizes for each channel of its node receiving traffic from other nodes Software resident in the EXNET Controller card effects this communication You need only configure an identity of the ring over which EXNET Controller cards exchange packets the number of packets exchanged per channel and whether a given card will both receive and transmit or will only receive packets The EXNET ring is self healing Should an EXNET Controller card fail somewhere in your multinode EXS Switch all T1 El spans of other nodes will be lost to the node ho
168. ed switchover should be performed Warning If you use Force switchover to manually switch over from the active Host to the standby Host you will lose all calls being set up To verify that the switchover was successful do the following 1 Query a channel from the now active Host Verify that the Host can communicate with the EXS Switch 2 Query a channel from the now standby Host An invalid matrix state message should appear on the screen Page 252 Appendix A Incoming Types Overview An incoming type is the signaling protocol used by the telco to send digits signals to the EXS Switch Before configuring channels in the Host you must request an incoming type from the telco The incoming type you configure in the Host must match the incoming type from the telco Signals arriving from the telco to the EXS Switch are either MF Multi Frequency DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency or ISDN MF uses 10 tones that represent KP and 5 tones that represent ST DTMF uses the keys on the telephone pad including and ISDN uses computer data type messages rather than tones Incoming types consist of incoming rules defining how the EXS Switch collects digits and inseize control instructions defining the signaling used between the telco and EXS Switch Each incoming type contains at least one stage Each stage can contain up to two strings A stage represents all incoming address digits contained in the digit stream A s
169. ed to Network1 log and saved When the new Network log reaches the limit the file again is renamed to Network1 log and the data on the first Network1 log file is overwritten Therefore it is important when capturing Network log files to back up on a regular basis to prevent loss of data On the Maintenance menu point to Network Debug Log then click View to activate this screen Opening Network Debug Log On the Maintenance menu point to Network Debug Log then click Open to start logging information in a Network log file Each time you open a Network log file the Host generates a time date stamp revision number and open close status Each time the file is closed the Host generates a time date stamp and channel status Warning Close the Network log file before accessing either the Delete or Screen On options Close the file at the end of the Debug session or the file may grow to fill up the Host computer s hard disk Leaving the log file in an open state could result in a loss of data or a slowdown in call processing Closing Network Debug Log On the Maintenance menu point to Network Debug Log then click Close to stop logging information in the Network log file Deleting Network Debug Log On the Maintenance menu point to Network Debug Log then click Delete Note Make sure you close the Network log file before deleting Viewing Network Debug Log On the Maintenance menu point to Network Debug Log the
170. ee Master Route Tables This feature is optional based on whether the table is called by another Digit Table or by the Channel Features Usually if in the Assign Channel Features step below the field Lookup Type is set to DNIS Intra Inter State or ANI Intra Inter State then this type of table is selected in the InterState and IntraState Digit Table fields STEP 7 Assign Channel Features Assign features to all channels handling traffic see Channel Features Note that Channel Features can transfer processing immediately to a Digit Table In this case follow the remaining steps then build the digit table and return to Channel Features to transfer to the Digit Table STEP 8 Set up Time of Day Routing Optional Specify routes that are valid at only certain times of certain days see Making Routes Time Sensitive This feature is optional STEP 9 Create ACD Queues Optional Create Automatic Call Distribution Queues for conditional call routing for holding calls waiting to be handled when a trunk becomes available see ACD Queues This feature is optional based on whether the Route List set up in the next step will add an ACD Queue STEP 10 Create Post Routing Rules Optional Different resource groups within each route list see next step just before presenting the outbound call may use the post routing rules to add a prefix or suffix to the DNIS ANI and or called number and can present vari
171. eftmost column when the status of an adjacent offset on a card in service cannot be determined An X icon displays when an offset has been in service but its card has been taken out of service or when the Host has not been able to configure an assigned offset for some reason An icon displays when an offset s configuration is retained on the card but does not correspond to configuration data in the Host You can activate this screen by clicking El Card in the Equipment List screen s View by Type mode then double clicking a listed El card or by clicking a listed El card in the Equipment List screen s View by Slot ID mode or by clicking a selected node in the Equipment List screen s View by Node mode then double clicking a listed El card Equipment List i b e List by Type C List by Slot ID C List by Node a DSP Card B E1 Card Es 1 04 2 5pan SEILC NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 179 1 05 8 Span SEILC NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA Bl 1 06 E ON ly NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA EX CPU Card EXNET Controller Card Fan Tray ISDN PAI Card Midplane Power Supply Card 557 Card T1 Card Figure 3 19 E1 Card screen activation View by Type mode Page 64 Note The above figure shows redundant El cards The highlighted card is active A one of the other El cards is standby S the remaining El card is paired with a standard I O card and cannot be redundant The following information appears in the El Card sc
172. el DMS 100 standard for ISDN PRI as a user in the User Network Interface and will exchange Q 931 specified call control messages at 64 Kbps with any switch conforming to this standard Page 123 e 04 Northern Telecom DMS 250 Q 931 PRI User Side Custom New to 2007 e 05 AUSTEL New to 2007 e 06 JATE INS 1500 This value indicates the D Channel conforms to the Japanese INS 1500 standard for ISDN PRI as a user in the User Network Interface and will exchange Q 931 specified call control messages at 64 Kbps with any switch conforming to this standard e 07 Euro ISDN include French and German Delta This value indicates the D Channel conforms to the Euro ISDN standard for ISDN PRI including French and German variants as a user in the User Network Interface and will exchange Q 931 specified call control messages at 64 Kbps with any switch conforming to this standard e 09 NI 2 User Side New to 2007 e 19 NI 2 Network Side New to 2007 E 02 Options list This list indicates an option associated with this D Channel Your required input is limited to the following choices e 00 None default e 01 Send Extract 12 Frames to Host in a Diag indication E 03 D Channel Physical Medium list This list indicates the physical medium of this D Channel Your required input is limited to the following choice e 01 64 KBPS T1 E1 default This value indicates the physical medium for this D Ch
173. ens UPDATE STATUS button after this screen has been active for a while will query this ISDN PRI card again to determine its current status then display this status in the SDN PRI Card screen Querying Fault Log Clicking the ISDN PRI Card screen s QUERY FauLT Loc button displays this ISDN PRI card s Fault Log see Fault Log query with fault for an EX CPU card s Fault Log example Clearing Fault Log Clicking the ISDN PRI Card screen s CLEAR FAULT Loa button clears this ISDN PRI card s Fault Log and resets the number of faults to 0 0 also appears when no faults are detected on a query see Fault Log cleared or clear of faults for an EX CPU card s Fault Log example Putting ISDN PRI card in service Clicking the ISDN PRI Card screen s IN SERVICE button makes this ISDN PRI card available for call processing Note If you are putting the ISDN PRI card in service after having configured it and taken it out of service the Host will download the ISDN configuration data the card lost when you took it out of service Putting ISDN PRI card out of service Clicking the ISDN PRI Card screen s OuT OF SERVICE button makes this ISDN PRI card unavailable for call processing Note You will want to take this card out of service if you need to test the card or if you discover the card is faulty Taking this card out of service automatically clears all ISDN configuration data and also takes ISDN controlled voice channels out of
174. ent This El card is associated with an N 1 standby I O card rather than a redundant I O card and will handle traffic of a redundant I O card associated with a failed El card if Redundancy Status see below is Standby Note If Redundancy Status is Non redundant you can click the Our OF SERVICE button then click the In SERVICE button to change Redundancy Status to Standby OUT OF SERVICE BY HOST Someone has taken this E1 card out of service through the Host Page 65 OUT OF SERVICE BY SWITCH An EX CPU card has reported this El card to be out of service If this card s dipswitch 3 is set to ON if another El card does not have this same message and if resetting this card does not remove this message you must swap this card and call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately In service This El card is in service CONFIG DATA INVALID The configuration data for this El card has been lost and has not been downloaded from the Host FAULTS LOGGED One or more faults have occurred in this El card You must retrieve this card s Fault Log see Querying Fault Log below then report its contents to Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately MEMORY TEST FAILED This El card has failed a self test of its memory You must determine whether the card has a ROM or RAM problem see Memory Test line below CARD FAILURE This El card failed for an unspecified reason If resetting this card does not remove this message you mus
175. ent EXNET Controller card is attached is in service A red icon displays when the EXNET ring is not in service A yellow icon displays when the EXNET ring is getting ready to go into service The following information occurs in the EXNET Management screen Ring ID unlabeled list This column indicates the identity of the fiberoptic ring whose status you want to display Your optional input is limited to the following choices Ring 0 Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 3 Slot column This column indicates the node and slot in the node for example 01 02 or slot 2 in node 1 where an EXNETcard resides on the specifed EXNET ring Page 91 Ring Status column This column indicates the status of the specified EXNET ring One of the following values will occur In Service This EXNET ring is in service and able to support call processing between nodes Out of Service Someone has taken this EXNET ring out of service through the Host and the EXNET ring is not able to support call processing between nodes Initializing This EXNET ring is undergoing tests to validate its timing before going into service Note This message is the transitory second stage of putting an EXNET ring into service More Status column This column indicates reasons why the specified EXNET ring is out of service if it was not taken out of service through the Host One of the following values can occur Matrix Error The node holding the specified EXNET Controller ca
176. entry s Route list Your optional input is limited to 23 characters including only digits 0 9 letters A B C D and symbol amp without quotes Note You can add digits to or remove digits from an incoming number so that it becomes partially or totally different destination number Translation occurs not only according to the instruction you enter in the Digit Xlate 1 field but also according to how the incoming number matches the value in the Digit Lookup field The following table shows how a dialed or translated incoming number matches a Digit Lookup field value and shows also how the Digit Xlate 1 field value changes the incoming number into a different number that becomes the destination number to be sent over the call s outgoing leg Incoming Destination Number Digit Digit Effect of Number o Dialed or Lookup Xlate 1 Translation Outgoing Le Translated going eg 6032253066 6032253066 1 amp 1 inserted at 16032253066 beginning of incoming number 6032253066 603 amp 011603 amp 011 inserted at 0116032253066 beginning of incoming number 6032253066 603 amp amp 603 deleted 2253066 6032253066 603 amp 508 amp 603 changed 5082253066 6032253066 6 amp 68 All calls 6032253066 beginning with 6 route to translated number 92253066 98 6038 9 deleted and 6032253066 603 added 6032253066 6032253066 6035551212 Last seven 6035551212 digits changed 6
177. ermine whether the span is actually in service activate the Spans and Channels Status screen then select the span s Span ID in that screen s Span list see Span and Channel Status screen Page 102 Giving attributes to T1 channels The channels in the span are now ready to be assigned their tone signaling attributes The T7 Tone Channel Attributes screen enables you to make these assignments If this TI span supports SS7 you must instead give attributes to SS7 links see after Creating SS7 Stacks and Creating SS7 link sets Creating SS7 Links and SS7 channels called CICs see Creating CICs or SS7 Channels Tone Channels File Span Chan Incoming Type Channel In Start Dial Out Start Dial Timer Flash Tone Tame 08 00 T1 Collect Digits E amp M Wink Start Wink Start z OFF Zip CU 71 Tone Channel Attributes x OFF zip fanz 008 OFF Zip For Span 8 Channel 3 ORF Zip OFF Zip Incoming Type DTMF Xx Term 0 OFF_ Zp OFF Zip Channel Type E amp M vy OFF Zip 3 OFF Zip In Start Dial Wink Start va OFF Zip Dut Start Dial Wink Start OFF Zip OFF Zip Ringing Timer M Not Used OFF Zip OFF Zip Hook Flash OFF v OFF Zip Notification Tone Zip oE z OFF Zp OFF Zip Cancel OFF Zip OFF Zip ff oos 20 T1 Collect Digits E amp M Wink Start Wink Start OFF Zip fimg008 21 T1 Collect Digits E amp M Wink Start Wink Start
178. es in MM DD YY HH MM SS format when this EX CPU card s status was last updated Card Status line This line indicates whether this EX CPU card is in service has suffered faults has good memory and or has good configuration data as well as how it was last reset One or more of the following messages might occur e Reset by insertion An insertion of this EX CPU card in the chassis caused this card s last reset Page 70 e Reset by software A taking of this EX CPU card out of service then putting it back in service from the Host or a powering down then up of the entire chassis or a fault in this card caused this card s last reset e Reset by button A push of this EX CPU card s RESET button caused this card s last reset e OUT OF SERVICE BY SWITCH The active EX CPU card has reported this standby EX CPU card to be out of service If this card s dipswitch 3 is set to ON and if resetting this card does not remove this message you must swap this card and call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately e Inservice This EX CPU card is in service e FAULTS LOGGED One or more faults have occurred in this EX CPU card You must retrieve this card s Fault Log see Querying Fault Log below then report its contents to Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately e MEMORY TEST FAILED This EX CPU card has failed a self test of its memory You must determine whether the card has a ROM or RAM problem see Memory Test line
179. es this fit in the tiny box E2 Resource Group Circuit Code Sub Field 0 Unspecified 1 international call no operator requested 2 international call operator requested 3 to to spare 99 E2 Resource Group Network Specific 8 to to reserved for Network Specific use 9999 Figure 4 51 Codes for Circuit Code Subfield Include Charge Number parameter Check to include this in the SS7 signal Page 169 Pre Translation Tables You may need to translate digits before they reach the digit table This is performed by the Pre Translation Table Thus a pre translation table contains the information needed to translate digits in a call coming into the EXS Switch so the translated rather than the original digits determine how that call enters the associated digit table to obtain its route assignment Pre Translation table can also limit the number of calls that can use this translation at the same time Note You can create one Pre Translation table per inbound channel as pre translation tables are specified in the channel features You can create up to 99 Pre Translation tables Creating a Pre Translation Table The Pre Translation Table Designation screen enables you to create an Pre Translation Table to which you add patterns of digits MPre Translation Table Attributes x D For Pre Translation Table Number 2 Name Brayton Digit Lookup pork Digit Xlate 1 011 Limit 4d Nature of Add
180. es in the Index Table screen s Attributes menu which will activate the Index Table Attributes screen E2 Connected to E2 Host localhost File Equipment Maintenance System Admin S57 ISDN Routing Options Wind Help Digit Tables File Tables Figure 4 65 ANI Translation Table Attributes screen activation Viewing all digit lookup entries in an Index table Fie Tables Attributes Dt Digit Tables Code Length Pt Pre translation Tables 1234 4 DE NPA Table B Ant Table RE 00 anit BE 01 aniz Bj index Table Figure 4 66 Index Tables screen layout Page 178 Once you click the Index Table Attributes screen s OK button the entries you have added or changed will display in rows in the Index Tables screen scrollable if the screen is more than full Each row divides into columns that contain the data of the Index Table Attributes screen s attributes for the selected ANI lookup entry Page 179 The NPA Table for Inter Intra State Determination The NPA table uses the NPA area code to compare the called number with either the ANI or DNIS as specified in the Channel Features Lookup Type field in the following section Each NPA can have a state associated with it Editing the NPA Table There is only one NPA table In the Digit Tables screen select the NPA and click on any NPA you wish to have entries for the state then enter the 2 character abbreviation
181. es that a condition has occurred and the alarm it has generated is intended to inform you of this occurrence Date field This field indicates the date this alarm was generated Time field This field indicates the time of day this alarm was generated Ack field This field indicates whether you have acknowledged this alarm Note If you select this alarm then click the ACKNOWLEDGE button a red checkmark will appear in this field If you have not acknowledged this alarm this field will remain blank An unacknowledged alarm will cause the word Alarm to display rightward on the Main Menu Tool Bar in red yellow or blue letters as appropriate to the most severe alarm that is unacknowledged Error Message field The field indicates the nature of this alarm Filter area This area provides you choices to restrict the listing of alarms you want to view In order to change this listing establish a viewing period and or check or uncheck the pertinent boxes then click the APPLY FILTER button Page 233 From and to fields Severity checkboxes These fields together indicate the period of time you want to consider for viewing alarms Note Alarms conforming to other criteria you select in the Filters area will display if they occurred after the period of time you specify These checkboxes indicate the severity of alarms you want to view Your optional input is limited to Informative Checking this box indicates you want t
182. etwork interfaces The following lines appear in the Clock Mode Status area Current Sync Mode line This line indicates the clock synchronization currently in use Note If the clock is set to Free Running you may experience slips on spans To reset the primary timing source see Chapter 4 Configuring Channels and Routes Select the desired span to use for timing and type in the board offset for the primary loop timing source Sync Priority List line This line indicates the order in which the EXS Switch hunts for available clock sources The default synchronization priority list is as follows Primary Reference Clock Signal Secondary Reference Clock Signal Primary Loop Clock Signal Secondary Loop Clock Signal Free Running Clock Signal PEs O Page 231 Alarms screen The Alarms screen enables you to view an internally kept database that tracks whether elements in your single or multinode EXS Switch are or have been in alarm and if in alarm the degree to which they are or were in alarm 05 13 1999 15 29 38 Connection to switch establisher 05 13 1999 15 29 17 Connection to switch lost E 05 13 1999 15 29 07 Alam Major Clock Mode Swit 05 13 1999 15 26 49 Alarm Major System Busy 05 13 1999 a Change in Poll s Matrix State Ol 05 13 1999 15 25 50 Alarm Major No Fan Tray Insta 05 13 1999 15 25 44 Alarm Minor Ethernet Host Lin 05 13 1999 15 25 35 ADS Host becoming standby 05 13 1999 15 25 34 Connec
183. etwork switch or STP numbered between 0 and 7 If a voice switch terminates this SS7 link set the point code of that switch will be a DPC Destination Point Code of your EXS Switch You must enter this DPC in the APC fields Stack Assoc list This list indicates the OPC with which this SS7 link set is associated Your required input is limited to the associations in this list Remarks field This field indicates a reminder to your personnel regarding this SS7 link set Your optional input is limited to 24 alphanumeric characters Viewing attributes of all SS7 link sets Once you click the SS7 Link Set Attributes screen s OK button the SS7 link set attributes you have added or changed will display in the SS7 Card screen across the row of the Link Set identifying this SS7 link set This row divides into columns that incorporate the meanings if not the exact labels of the SS7 Link Set Attributes screen s parameters for the selected SS7 link set In addition this row includes a Status column indicating in real time the state of the link set The Status column can show the following values e A This value indicates the link set is available for SS7 messaging e U This value indicates the link set is not available for SS7 messaging If the link set is available for SS7 messaging it will show a green icon if not it will show a red icon A link set can become unavailable due to bad links routes or destinations see Viewing at
184. eue Full Trunk Group Route To Completion Type In Queue Trunk Group J Connect Call To Busy Or VRU Set Queue Timer typical Route To Overflow Trunk Group ee Completion Type i Connect To Reorder Or VRU typical Outgoing Trunk Available y Completion Type Connect Outgoing Call to Attendant typical Figure 4 77 ACD Queue Call Flow Activity Page 196 Name To access ACD Queues under Route List select ACD Queues You will see the following ACD Queues File Queues Update Name Size Timeout In Queue Overflow Queue Full sl n Queue eorder usy QUE TEst 1 15 InQ Reord B Figure 4 79 ACD Queue Double Click on the Queue you wish to edit or follow the instructions below to add or delete an ACD queue ACD Queue attributes are displayed as shown below Queue Attributes x Name Queue 1 Number of calls allow in Queue 5 Timeout in seconds 15 In Queue jin Queue Overflow Reorder v Queue Ful Cancel Figure 4 80 ACD Queue Attributes The ACD queue attributes screen fields are described below Name ACD queues to help you remember their function or their terminating carrier or their terminating equipment etc For example you may choose department names like OrderACD or ServiceACD You may choose application types like OperatorACD or Cre
185. f Automatic Call Distribution ACD event records Click Online to view call processing activity in real time on a dedicated terminal or click Offline to disconnect output of the ACD Event Log The Host generates ACD event records as calls progress through your Call Processing System The records are identified by type and contain trunk and dialed number information These records can be used to provide traffic analysis for fine tuning the queuing parameters Remote Switch Log field This field indicates the output of the Remote Switch Log Click Online to view call processing debug activity in real time on a dedicated terminal or click Offline to disconnect output of the Remote Switch Log The Remote switch log option provides important debugging information such as the date of the call how the call was connected and on which channel the call was accepted Switch IP Address This field indicates the IP Address of the EXS Switch Page 21 Alarm Setup screen This screen enables you to write Alarm messages to a TCP IP port and Log file on the Host Computers hard drive System Setup ES Switch Setup Node Setup Redundancy Setup Alarm Setup CDR Setup Application Server Link Write alarms to TCP IP port 9606 C Yes No Logged alarms maximum age days fo Alarm Database File V Keep Major Alarms V Keep Minor Alarms Keep Informational Alarms OK Cancel Apply Figure 2 16 Alarm Setup screen
186. for the state Note that if there is no entry in the State field for an NPA the call will ALWAYS be considered intERstate NPA Table NPA List fx File Tables Attributes Dt Digit Tables NPA State EJ Pt Pre translation Tables 648 DE NPA Table 649 DE 00 NPA List 650 BE ant Table 651 At 00 anit 652 At 01 aniz 653 IN Index Table 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 CA 662 663 664 665 ARA zi Figure 4 67 NPA Table screen layout Page 180 The Master Route Table for NPA NXX Routing Overview New to 2007 the Master Route Table supports routing based on NPA NXX and Inter IntraState If a digit table is configured so the Option field is set to Digit Table then in the Route Table field in addition to any Digit Tables is the Master Route Table For example in the digit table below is 101 Master Route Table File Equipment Maintenance System Admin 557 ISDN Routing Options Window Help 1 Post Routing Options Fil Master Route Table z Digit Table Attributes E Digit Tables zone2 NPA Hi At bukes For Digit Table Number 8 NPA Dt Digit Tables Digit Lookup Digit xlate1 Name zone2 Ac Dt 00 new2005 2899998 R Mic TE 01 Qwest Routine 289899 Digit Lookup 289895 amp Mic Dt 02 new Table 2898988 Digit late 1 ic Dt 03 time 2898978 Mic Dt 04 DNIS 2898968 ll J ic D 05 DNISI 2898958 ANIZCLI Xlat Mic Tt 07 for 2898938 ei
187. g OP Code Parameters Figure A 5 DNIS Op Code screen For routing of calls on channels having DNIS OP Code incoming type the artificial digits must be present on the Digit Table s associated with those channels This incoming type indicates that the Excel Switch collects only 10 digits of DTMF If the Excel Switch receives 10 digits in 3 seconds or less call processing is started If 10 digits are not received within 3 seconds the incoming call is connected to Reorder This incoming type indicates that the Excel Switch collects only 16 digits of DTMF If the Excel Switch receives 16 digits in 12 seconds or less call processing is started If 16 digits are not received within 12 seconds the incoming call is connected to Reorder This incoming type indicates that the Excel Switch collects only 20 digits of DTMF If the Excel Switch receives 20 digits in 20 seconds or less call processing is started If 20 digits are not received within 20 seconds the incoming call is connected to Reorder This incoming type indicates that the Excel Switch collects only 21 digits of DTMF If the Excel Switch receives 21 digits in 12 seconds or less call processing is started If 21 digits are not received within 12 seconds the incoming call is connected to Reorder Page A 10 DTMF 21 21 Sec DTMF 3 2 Sec DTMF 4 2 Sec DTMF 4 10 Sec DTMF 7 3 Sec DTME X Term This incoming type indicates that the Excel Switch colle
188. ge 243 Span ID line This line indicates the Span ID you selected from the Span ID list Alarm Status line This line indicates alarm types currently on the selected span Bipolar Violations BPVs line This line indicates the number of Bipolar Violations on the selected span A Bipolar Violation is two consecutive one bits sharing the same polarity Frame Errors line This line indicates the number of Frame Errors on the selected span A Frame Error does not conform to the standard 12 bit frame word pattern Slips line This line indicates the number of slips on the selected span A slip indicates the loss of a data bit on a span caused by a frame misalignment between the timing of a transmitting node and a receiving node Remote Alarms line This line indicates the number of Remote Alarms on the selected span A Remote Alarm indicates the receipt of an alarm from a remote location Loss of Frame LOFs line This line indicates the number of Loss of Frame errors on the selected span Page 244 Carrier Answer Query The Carrier Answer Query screen enables you determine the number of calls answered after a specified period of time By using this tool one can investigate possible issues where there is no traffic Carrier Answer Query ES Query Spans From foos y To 015 During Previous fi Days Hours Minutes Spans with one or more unanswered channel View Details Span 008
189. git 6 Regarding specificity the matching process would treat incoming number 6032253066 as matched to digit pattern 6032253066 before it could consider this incoming number as matched to digit pattern 60322 or 6 which it could not do in any case without wildcard characters Digit patterns can employ 4 without quotes as wildcard characters For example the matching process would treat incoming number 6032253066 lacking a more specific match as matched to digit pattern 603 amp or to digit pattern 60322530 amp in the first example any incoming number whose first digits are 603 would be treated as a match regardless of the number or pattern of subsequent digits in the second example only incoming numbers whose first digits are 603225 would be treated as a match for other examples of matching and wildcards see Dialed or Translated Incoming Numbers Translated to Destination Numbers If amp is not used in a digit pattern matching will occur only if the incoming number and the digit pattern are exactly the same This field indicates an instruction that translates an incoming number either dialed by the calling party or translated by a previous Digit Table that called this table into a different destination number this destination number will be sent to either e Another digit table based on Option Field Settings or Page 213 II field e The first resource group with available outbound spans specified in this digit lookup
190. git Tables Vince Of x File Tables Attributes Dt Digit Tables Digit Lookup Digit Xlate Nature of Address Limit Pt Pre translation Table 617 subscriber number 0 m Pt 02 Brayton Pt 03 Frank Aainin nee ee the selected digit lookup entry Figure 4 57 Digit Tables screen layout for Pre Translation table When you have added all the digit lookup entries you want to this Pre Translation table click Save in the File menu of the Digit Tables screen If you want an Pre Translation table to become a feature of a particular channel see Assigning Features to Channels below you can drag that Pre Translation table to the line s representing that channel in the Channel Features screen Page 173 ANI Tables for ANI Code Validation ANI Tables are used to validate callers for postpaid billing without requiring the Dynamis Server If the ANI matches an entry in the ANI Table then based on configuration the caller must enter a validated or non validated billing code Whether the ANI table is used is specified in the Channel Features screen see next section NOTE If ANI matching is set up and there is no matching ANI in the ANI table the call will be processed requiring no validation If in Channel features If Network is set to ANI Account then the ANI table is specifiedd and it is used Creating an ANI Table The ANI Table Designation screen enables you to create an ANI Table to which you ad
191. gure 4 104 Export Digit Table 00 You are then prompted for a location to export the file The default file name is Digit Table CSV where the corresponds to the Digit Table Number Below is an example of Digit Table 00 listed above 823 amp XX 19B R IVR RL 771 amp XX _ 444 amp R SS7 Span 6 SS7 route to and ISDN span or Tone trk 617 amp CC 508 amp R SS7 Span 7 You now have 64 character for comments 603 amp CC 617 amp R SS7 Span 6 Comments can be exported with the digit tables 508 amp XX 1r R Ph 00 01 RL Desk phone 44428 XX 580 R Tone Span 4 Tone Route to Phone 4441 amp XX 508 R ISDN Span 3 ISDN route to Phone 2128 XX 617 amp R ISDN Span 3 209 amp 07 6038881234 617 amp R Tone Span 4 111 amp XX 6617269320 p p Dy TEST E EE amp amp R Tone Span 4 Digit Table List importing is a very powerful feature For example some people use a spreadsheet listing dozens of carriers and their rates which runs a macro that creates a CSV file that specifies least cost routing to the cheapest four carriers As rates change or new carriers are added they simply rerun the macro and import the new file For more details contact your E2 Eagle technical representative Importing Digit Table Configuration It is recommended that you FIRST EXPORT YOUR PRESENT DIGIT TABLE CONFIGURATION BEFORE IMPORTING Importing Digit Table Configuration will overwrite all the data of the selecte
192. h Software is the operating system of the EXS Switch The Switch Software is resident on the Host Computer and is downloaded to the EXS Switch Page 2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW The E2 Eagle Host is multi tasking with real time programming capabilities enabling you to configure make changes and add trunks and program new applications without disrupting in service applications The Host is not an applications generator The Host is a call control system that allows you to create applications simply by programming routing tables and translation tables within the system All generic call processing functions are available and maintained by the Host Programming screens are table menu driven which create routing applications with ease Configuration tables are saved in the system and used whenever the need occurs The Host provides automatic boot startup pre programmed cold startup the hardware must be powered off or restarted before startup and warm startup the hardware can remain operational Some additional features of the Host include e Supports fully redundant operations with the switch in the event of a CPU Matrix or host failure e Utilizes multi tasking with real time programming capabilities e Provides many types of call control capabilities e Translates digits received from the incoming calls as required e Provides basic and enhanced call processing such as ACD Automatic Call Distribution Least Cost Routing and Time of
193. h as Europe or Asia numbered between 0 and 7 the center field designates an region country or network in the world zone numbered between 000 and 255 the rightmost field designates a specific SS7 network switch or STP numbered between 0 and 7 This list indicates the specification to which this SS7 stack conforms Your required input is limited to the following choices e ANSI This value indicates this SS7 stack conforms to signaling requirements of an SS7 network subject to ANSI American National Standards Institute specification e ITU This value indicates this SS7 stack conforms to signaling requirements of an SS7 network subject to ITU International Telecommunications Union specification This field indicates a reminder to your personnel regarding this SS7 stack Your optional input is limited to 24 alphanumeric characters This list indicates how this SS7 stack reacts to an MTP Message Transfer Part Pause indication from an SS7 network for a DPC Destination Point Code you have configured see Creating SS7 Network Routes Your required input is limited to the following choices e Delayed This value indicates this SS7 stack queues SS7 messages for the DPC for a brief period before either dropping these messages at the period s end or sending them onward on receipt within the period of an MTP Resume indication from an SS7 network for that DPC e Immediate default This value indicates your EXS Switch drops SS7 messages
194. he following choices 3 db 0 db 2 db 3 db 4 db 6 db Having specified a resource group s characteristics you then select those channels in the Tone Channels screen or ISDN B Chan s screen you want grouped with these characteristics Page 168 SS7 Parameters Note A channel can be assigned to more than one resource group CIP TNS Override amp Carrier Identification Parameter New Feature for 2005 The user can now configure the Resource Group with the Carrier Identification Parameter CIP and Transit Network Selection TNS The CIP and TNS parameters are only available if the signaling type is configured for SS7 Checking Add TNS or CIP will insert the Carrier Identification and or Transit Network Selection parameter s in the outgoing dial message on an SS7 trunk If CIP and or TNS parameters are received in the incoming tandem trunk application then they are passed back out on the SS7 trunk unchanged by E2 Checking the Override box will always cause the E2 Resource SS7 parameters to be used in the outgoing dial message regardless of the received parameters Note For the CIP or TNS to be inserted in the outgoing dial message the Outgoing Type in the Channel Feature window must be configured for SS7 Basic or SS7 FGD See below and also refer to Assigning Features to Channels in the later section The codes shown in the following table are used in the Circuit Code field how do
195. hen double clicking a listed ISDN PRI card or by clicking a listed ISDN PRI card in the Equipment List screen s View by Slot ID mode or by clicking a selected node in the Equipment List screen s View by Node mode then double clicking a listed ISDN PRI card Equipment List List by Type List by Slot ID C List by Node a Open BQ EX CPU Card Ho 5 EXNET Controller Card Add E Fan Tray ISDN Card Move E 00 00 ISDN PAI E 01 00 ISDN PAI Delete m Midplane F Power Supply Card E 57 Card H T1 Card Figure 3 25 ISDN PRI Card screen activation View by Type mode The following information appears in the ISDN PRI Card screen Model line Page 75 This line indicates the model of this ISDN PRI card Node Slot line This line indicates the node in the EXS Switch and slot in the node s chassis where this ISDN PRI card resides Note In a single node EXS Switch Node does not display in a multinode EXS Switch Node will display together with an automatically generated number identifying the node Last Card Status line This line indicates in MM DD YY HH MM SS format when this ISDN PRI card s status was last queried and displayed in the ISDN PRI Card screen Note This card s status is automatically updated on activation of the ISDN PRI Card screen Card Status line This line indicates whether this ISDN PRI card is in service has suffered faults has good memory and o
196. ial 23 Delete Channels po Sequential 2 N Sequential 23 ISDN ISDN Sequential 46 ISDN ISDN Sequential 48 ISDN ISDN Sequential 23 Figure 4 50 Outgoing Resource Group s screen activation The following information appears in the Outgoing Channel Attributes screen Resource Group Name field This field indicates the name of the resource group Your required input is limited to 11 alphanumeric characters Page 165 Signaling Type list This list indicates the signaling type for all channels in the group Your required input is limited to the following choices e Tone This value indicates the signaling type for all channels in the group is tone e ISDN This value indicates the signaling type for all channels in the group is ISDN e SS7 This value indicates the signaling type for all channels in the group is SS7 Completion Type list This list indicates how calls on channels in the group are completed Your required input is limited to the following choices see Completion Types in Appendix C for meanings of these choices Auto Term displays only when signaling type is tone Busy displays only when signaling type is tone Conf Bridge displays only when signaling type is tone CPA Type 1 displays only when signaling type is tone Dlay Type 1 displays only when signaling type is tone Dlay Type 3 displays only when signaling type is tone FGB AMA displays only when signaling type is tone Feat Grp D displays
197. ibutes of all T1 channels cid rita 106 Changine reception Ile eii caos 107 Changing reception Meri iS ines Eart 108 Changing transmission ia senyseenadeqgievgassnes donesoensdtequadaaeasecedanect 110 El Configuring amp Putting El Channels into Service ooooonoccnoncononanonncnonnnonnnonn non ncnnonnnn cnn cnn 112 iv Activating an Bl Piti aliado cita 112 Viewing EL span AD ii iiris 116 Giving attributes to Bl chama 117 VINIERON 120 ISDN Configuring and Putting ISDN PRI Channels Into Service oooonoocccconcncconnnoconcnononononnnos 121 Assigning attributes to D Chantiel scciacsiscsissaeaaivnt distinta dante eden Vas dana sussen ence seaatacoseaces 122 NFAS Associating D Channel with up to 10 T1 SpanS oooconnncccnnonccnnoncnononcnnnnnccnannccnnnnnos 125 Backing up NFAS group s D Chama 127 Assigning attributes to BCO aos 128 Viewing attributes of all ISDN B ChannelsS coonncconnoccccnoncnononcnononcnonnnccononcnnnnncnnnnncconnnccnnnnnos 131 ISDN Cause Code Routing siii neii nane E EEE K ea 132 VRU Cause Code POP a a a a E a SE 133 SS7 Configuring and Putting SS7 Channels into Service oooonocononcconcnnonnconncconcnann nono nono ncnoncnnnnos 134 Procedur Sesinin A ESS a eae 134 Creatina SSI AA e e a a e a eea aa Oes eE GS EE 135 Creating 5 97 LES i ER E E EEEE E ee ae 138 COMTI SST EIKS cor 140 Creating SS7 NetWork Route ii a ind dai 143 Creating CICS for S57 Channel Sri eii 146 Creating So7 Cause Code ROUUNe 5 5 55 os ese
198. ich the call is being made Your required input is limited to the following choices Delay Dial This value indicates the EXS Switch seizes that is requests service of an outgoing channel and waits for the far end to go off hook then back on hook after which the switch sends digits to the far end in a format determined by the channel s digit table information Dial Tone This value indicates the EXS Switch seizes that is requests service of an outgoing channel and waits for the far end to play dial tone after Page 105 which the switch sends digits to the far end in a format determined by the channel s digit table information e Immediate This value indicates the EXS Switch seizes that is requests service of an outgoing channel and immediately sends digits to the far end in a format determined by the channel s digit table information Note If this channel is connected to an VIC VRU you must select Immediate e None default This value indicates no method has been assigned no method is required to start an ISDN B Channel s outgoing call e Wink Start This value indicates the EXS Switch seizes that is requests service of an outgoing channel and waits for the far end to sends an off hook on hook that is a wink after which the switch sends digits to the far end in a format determined by the channel s digit table information Not Used checkbox This checkbox when checked disables the Ringing Timer
199. id digits found 19710 error free records read 19710 E Import Complete Close Figure 4 101 Digit Table Import status screens Page 224 VRU Branding VRU Route List There are a number of situations where it is advantageous to play a voice prompt from the VRU Prompt play is configured through the VRU Branding screen in conjunction with other screens as applicable The following VRU Branding Screen is used to specify branding Announcements Fla ES YRU Route List Announcement Number ISDN NONE sv fo Racas NONE ANIPIN NONE fo SE it CPA Timer NONE vl ssz None Apoo Figure 4 104 VRU Branding Configuration Screen To activate VRU Branding from the Options menu select VRU Branding E2 Connected to E2 Host localhost Fie Equipment Maintenance System Admin SS ISDN Routing esis Window Help Callback TAC YRU Branding 557 Cause Code Figure 4 105 VRU Branding Activation The following fields are displayed All route lists are displayed in a drop down box If you wish to play a prompt on the VRU select a route list that corresponds to your VRU Otherwise select NONE Announcement Number If NONE is selected in the VRU Route List no entry can be made and no prompt will play Page 225 ISDN R2 CAS ANI PIN ANI 900 Otherwise enter a value in the format below to specify the prompt number to play The VRU announcements digits method wor
200. ied reason If resetting this card does not remove this message you must call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Note The letter F appears next to this card s icon in the Equipment List screen to indicate a failed state Memory Test line This line indicates the result of a self test at the last status update of the integrity of ROM and RAM devices on this ISDN PRI card The following messages can occur e OK Test proved memory was reliable e ROM CHECKSUM FAILED Test proved read only memory was unreliable You must swap this card and call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately e RAM TEST FAILED Test proved random access memory was unreliable If resetting this card does not remove this message you must call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Artwork Revision line This line indicates the revision level of this ISDN PRI card s circuit design Serial Number line This line indicates the serial number of this ISDN PRI card Software ROM line This line indicates the major then the minor revision of the ROM software that is the Page 77 BIOS installed on this ISDN PRI card Build line This line indicates the build number of the RAM software that is the System Software sometimes called pSOS downloaded from an EX CPU card to this ISDN PRI card Note The Switch Status screen displays the actual version of this software Updating card status Clicking the ISDN PRI Card scre
201. if the network does not supply one so an inbound call can be as having an account in that application Your optional input is limited to a 10 digit Calling Party Number Default DNIS field If the network does not provide a DNIS for example the port is used by an operator as an FXS line or is connected to a VoIP device then the value in this field will be used Default ANI field If the network does not provide an ANI for example the port is used by an operator as an FXS line or is connected to a VoIP device then the value in this field will be used Collect Carrier Code Checkbox New for 2007 If checked the rightmost 10 digits of the dialed number are passed on which conforms to the latest ISDN standards Any preceding digits are stripped If not checked all digits are passed on Outgoing Codeset 6 Radio Button New for 2007 NOTE This will be moved to Post Routing Table a future version If yes and info digits are in the ISDN data stream pass them in the ISDN D stream If no II digits will NOT be included in the dialed number stream Page 191 Viewing features for all channels Channel Features Jol x File Configure Span Chan Ek 0011 20 0011 21 0011 22 fime0011 23 Eoo12 00 0012 01 0012 02 B oo12 03 0012 04 SN oO12 05 B oo12 06 oo12 07 Incoming Type Feature Grp D Feature Grp D Feature Grp D Feature Grp D ISDN ISDN ISDN IS
202. ightmost column then drag it leftward up or down Also pressing SHIFT and clicking on specific El channels will select these channels and all channels in between that is the range of channels will be continuous Alternatively pressing CTRL and clicking on specific El channels will select only these specific channels that is the range of channels will be discontinuous Right clicking a selected El channel then clicking Configure Tone Channels Attributes will also activate the El Tone Channel Attributes screen Selected channels must be on the same type of channel The attributes you select in the El Tone Channel Attributes screen will apply to all El channels in the El span s you selected in the Tone Channels screen The following information appears in the EJ Tone Channel Attributes screen This list indicates how an incoming call seizes a channel and how the call s digits are collected Your required input is limited to the choices described in Appendix A Incoming Types This list indicates the type of channel that is compatible with the configuration of equipment at the channel s far end Your required input is limited to the following choices e None default This value indicates no channel type has been assigned no channel type is required for ISDN B Channels e PPL Programmable Protocol Language This value indicates the EXS Switch employs its own configuration file based on Dynamis Programmable Protoco
203. igit patterns beginning with digits 9 8 or 7 to start matching at digit patterns beginning with the digit 6 Regarding specificity the matching process would treat incoming number 6032253066 as matched to digit pattern 6032253066 before it could consider this incoming number as matched to digit pattern 60322 or 6 which it could not do in any case without wildcard characters Digit patterns can employ amp without quotes as a wildcard character For example the matching process would treat incoming number 6032253066 lacking a more specific match as matched to digit pattern 603 amp or to digit pattern 60322530 amp in the first example any incoming number whose first digits are 603 would be treated as a match regardless of the number or pattern of subsequent digits in the second example only incoming numbers whose first digits are 603225 would be treated as a match for other examples of matching and wildcards see Dialed or Translated Incoming Numbers Translated to Destination Numbers If amp is not used in a digit pattern matching will occur only if the incoming number and the digit pattern are exactly the same This field indicates an instruction that translates an incoming number dialed by the calling party into a different number this translated number will be subjected to another digit lookup in the Pre Translation table s associated digit table Your required input is limited to 23 characters including only digits 0 9
204. iguration on being pulled Note Once a card is reinserted replaced and configured the X icon which displays after pulling this card will be replaced with the icon that represents the kind of card now present Should you put a different model of a card in the exact place of the same kind of card the Host will automatically download the configuration data to the EXS Switch to effect configuration of that kind of card which will not have a configuration Note Once a different model is inserted and configured the X icon which displays after pulling the other model will be replaced with the icon that represents the kind of card now present In the case of a TI EI card automatic configuration will occur on available spans For example if a 16 span model replaces an eight span model the configuration of the eight span model will be retained in the first eight spans of the 16 span model if an eight span model replaces a 16 span model the configuration of the 16 span model s first eight spans will be retained in the eight span model and the configuration of the remaining eight spans will be removed from the configuration file In the case of an SS7 card automatic configuration will occur on available links For example if a 16 link model replaces an four link model the configuration of the four link model will be retained in the first four links of the 16 link model if an fourlink model replaces a 16 link model the configurat
205. ile Kamm Span Error Monitor oos x Span Out Service In Service In Service Out Of Service Query Status te Refresh Rate screen activation Changing Default Refresh Rate The Host refreshes span states by default every two seconds The Refresh Rate screen enables you to change the default refresh time Your optional input is limited to values in seconds of 2 40 Page 242 Span Error Monitor screen The Span Error Monitor screen enables you to view error conditions that may occur on each span The EXS Switch has internal counters for each error condition The Host stores and accumulates error totals from the EXS Switch Span Error Monitor AA lt Figure 5 16 Span Error Monitor screen layout On the Span and Channel Status screen s Span Error Monitor menu click Show Error Count to activate this screen Span 08 Channel States Span Out Service In Service Figure 5 17 Span Error Monitor screen activation Updating Span Error Monitor Clicking the UPDATE button clears the error totals and resets the counters to zero The following fields appear in the Span and Channel Status screen Span ID list This list indicates the logical identity of the selected physical span you want to monitor Your required input is limited to the span IDs in this list Last Update line This list indicates the date and time of the last time you clicked the UPDATE button for the selected span Pa
206. ill wait for digits on this channel before disconnecting Collect Digits Parameters Figure A 4 Collect Digits Parameters screen layout This incoming type prompts for the number of digits to collect up to 23 the digit collection DTMF or MP and the number of seconds to wait before time out Contact your E2 technical representative if you wish to use this type This incoming type indicates the Excel Switch collects only 4 digits of DTMF If the Excel Switch receives 4 digits in 10 seconds or less call processing is started If 4 digits are not received within 10 seconds the incoming call is connected to Reorder This incoming type supports Feature Group D channels from MCI Also supports several PBXs not designed to handle standard MF type dialing The same as ANI 10 DNIS 7 except the ANI and DNIS are reversed Incoming Digit Format DNIS ANI Page A 9 DNIS OP Code DTMF 10 3 Sec DTMF 16 12 Sec DTMF 20 20 Sec DTMF 21 12 Sec This incoming type allows you to assign a 1 or 2 digit number to a channel The number serves as an artificial dialed number for incoming calls on that channel when no real dialed number digits are received By tagging the artificial number onto a call that call can be routed via entries in the Digit Table When DNIS OP Code is specified as the incoming type during channel configuration the system automatically prompts for entry of the artificial DNIS up to two digits lon
207. ing APPLY or OK does not affect calls in process However new calls being presented are delayed for several seconds Caution should be used when changing communication ports related to the Host link CDR Setup screen The System Setup screen contains areas for CDR Setup Switch Setup E2 HOST Redundant Link Alarm Logging and Network The following areas and their associated fields appear in the System Setup screen This screen enables you to output Call Detail Record CDR files to the Host Computer s hard drive and or to a TCP IP port You can also set the number of days your system will keep CDR files until automatically deleted from the Host Computer s hard drive Note You can copy CDR files to backup media using the Windows NT 2000 File Manager Page 17 A CDR is a record of all the information pertaining to a particular telephone call for example who made the call where it went what time of day it was placed how long it took etc The CDR file names reflect the date the files were created for example Ammddyyx TXT where x reflects the version number of a particular day s CDR files The Host creates a new file each time the current file reaches a size of 1 37 MB For example the first file created for a particular day would appear as A0530971 TXT When that file reaches 1 37 MB in the same day a second file is created and would appear as A0530972 TXT The CDRtoday ICD file contains the current day s call
208. ion of the 16 link model s first four links will be retained in the four link model and the configuration of the remaining 12 links will be kept the configuration file until you remove them Page 37 Should you replace a card with a different kind the Host will automatically delete configuration data for the removed card from the configuration file and stand ready to accept configuration data you will create Note Once a new card is inserted the Host will display an icon representing the kind of card now present If the card is configurable you must configure it Should you want to pull a card from the switch and not replace it you need only pull the card then select the card in the Equipment List screen now represented by an X icon and press the DELETE key to remove its configuration data from the configuration file Viewing Equipment by Type In View by Type mode the Equipment List screen s View by Type field enables you to view components of the same kind regardless of their physical location For example the Equipment List screen will group EX CPU cards in physical chassis or node 0 0 33 and node 1 1 32 Equipment List List by Type C List by Slot ID C List by Node DSP Card EX CPU Card im 00 32 EX CPU 2000 OMB im 00 33 EX CPU 2000 OMB in 01 32 EX CPU 2000 OMB 2 EXNET Controller Card 00 14 EXNET Controller Ring 0 XR 4P 01 1
209. ired with standard I O cards cannot be made redundant The T1 Card screen enables you to view the status of a T1 card as well as to bring its T1 spans in and out of service and to give N 1 redundancy to the T1 card Page 56 A AAA AA 1 ts 2 EA 3 oes ES 5 6 aun ES 8 3 En A MG n AAA pu lo _ _ a 14 _5 Figure 3 16 T1 Card screen layout Note The TI Card screen shows no icon in the leftmost column when the status of an adjacent offset on a card in service cannot be determined An X icon displays when an offset has been in service but its card has been taken out of service or when the Host has not been able to configure an assigned offset for some reason An icon displays when an offset s configuration is retained on the card but does not correspond to configuration data in the Host You can activate this screen by clicking T1 Card in the Equipment List screen s View by Type mode then double clicking a listed T1 card or by clicking a listed T1 card in the Equipment List screen s View by Slot ID mode or by clicking a selected node in the Equipment List screen s View by Node mode then double clicking a listed T1 card Page 57 Equipment List fx List by Type List by Slot ID List by Node DSP Card El Card Ex CPU Card EXNET Controller Card Fan Tray ISDN PRI Card Midplane Power Supply Card 557 Card T1 Card HE 1
210. irst CIC you selected in the SS7 CICs screen for this CIC group This line indicates the span holding the channel that is the last CIC you selected in the 557 CICs screen for this CIC group Ending CIC Channel line This line indicates the channel that is the last CIC you selected in the SS7 CICs screen for this CIC group Page 147 Base CIC Number field DPC list This field indicates the lowest CIC Circuit Identification Code number of the CIC s you have selected to be in this CIC group Your required input is limited to a number that you and the owner of the voice switch terminating this CIC group s CICs have agreed to use Note The following table shows how a CIC Offset internally determined combined with the Base CIC Number you set and CICs that is channels in spans you select generates CIC Numbers for those CICs Channel Base CIC CIC Resulting in Span Number Offset CIC Number 5 000 0 00000 6 000 00001 7 000 2 00002 8 000 3 00003 9 000 14 00004 Figure 4 37 Calculation of CIC Numbers This list indicates the unique three part Destination Point Code of a voice switch where this CIC from your EXS Switch terminates to carry voice traffic subject to SS7 control Your required input is limited to a point code in this list Page 148 Local CLLI field Remote CLLI field This field indicates the CLLI Common Language Location Identification code of the lo
211. is this buildup of heat will eventually damage call processing cards and cause their operation to cease Excel Switching strongly advises you to replace failed fans immediately Updating fan tray status Clicking the Fan Tray screen s UPDATE STATUS button after this screen has been active for a while will query this fan tray again to determine its current status then display this status in the Fan Tray screen Page 48 DSP Card The DSP card s purpose is to generate and receive tones DTMF MFERI MFR2 CPA CPG and bong that can e represent address digits for routing a call within its channel e indicate the call s progress for example with dial tone or ringback and or e prompt the caller for an action Another purpose of the DSP card is to provide a bridge for conferences of callers who can both speak and listen and or just listen To provide a node in your EXS Switch with particular tone or conferencing capabilities you must select and assign these capabilities one for each of four digital signal processors on up to four SIMMs single inline memory modules per DSP card 16 DSPs maximum You cannot make DSP cards redundant However you can put an additional DSP card in the same node of your EXS Switch and its DSP resources will be pooled with the other Should one DSP card fail you can still have necessary support if the other DSP card s DSPs have been configured like the lost DSPs The DSP Card sc
212. is SS7 card in the chassis caused this card s last reset Reset by software A taking of this SS7 card out of service then putting it back in service from the Host or a powering down then up of the entire chassis or a fault in this card caused this card s last reset Reset by button A push of this SS7 card s RESET button caused this card s last reset OUT OF SERVICE BY HOST Someone has taken this SS7 card out of service through the Host OUT OF SERVICE BY SWITCH An EX CPU card has reported this SS7 card to be out of service If this card s dipswitch 3 is set to ON if another SS7 card does not have this same message and if resetting this card does not remove this message you must swap this card and call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately In service This SS7 card is in service CONFIG DATA INVALID The configuration data for this SS7 card has been lost and has not been downloaded from the Host You must click the RECONFIGURE SS7 button immediately FAULTS LOGGED One or more faults have occurred in this SS7 card You must retrieve this card s Fault Log see Querying Fault Log below then report its contents to Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Page 82 Redundancy Status line MEMORY TEST FAILED This SS7 card has failed a self test of its memory You must determine whether the card has a ROM or RAM problem see Memory Test line below CARD FAILURE This SS7 card failed for an unspecified
213. its were dialed the incoming caller hears reorder tone If digits were dialed and the key was not pressed the system waits 20 seconds and then processes the call on the digits received Page A 11 El R2 1 This incoming type may be supported in countries outside North America Incoming Digit Format Stage 1 Collects up to 6 digits Stage 2 Collects up to 9 digits Stage 3 conditional Collects up to N digits First String Contains up to 6 digits Second String Contains up to 9 digits Third String Contains as many digits as sent Incoming digits of Stage 1 will be displayed in String 1 of the Host s debugging screen incoming digits of Stage 2 will be displayed in String 2 If Stage 3 is reached its incoming digits will be tacked onto Stage 1 s digits in String 1 String 1 will be sent as the dialed number Incoming Rule Inseize Control Instructions El R2 2 Incoming Digit Format Incoming Rule stages 2 or 3 strings 2 or 3 digit type MFR2 method compelled Generate inseize acknowledgment Receive stage 1 digits Receive stage 2 digits Generate backward A6 and wait for A6 acknowledgment if stage 1 digits equal 1xx18 0xx18 1xx12 or 0xx12 or receive stage 3 digits until sender is done then pulse backward A6 and proceed without A6 acknowledgment Report incoming call with digits Wait for host control message This Incoming type may be supported in countries outside North America
214. ivated either by clicking CICs in the SS7 menu in the Main Menu Tool Bar or by clicking the SS7 CICs button in the Main Menu Tool Bar will activate this screen 000 000 0C 000 000 0 Figure 4 36 Create CIC Group screen activation Note Double clicking a specific CIC will also activate the Create CIC Group screen Page 146 Base CIC Span line Dragging a box around specific CICs will select all CICs within the box that is the range of CICs will be continuous Start this box to the right of text in the window s leftmost column then drag it leftward up or down if the entire window is filled with columns if the window does not have columns extending to the right side of the window start this box beyond the rightmost column then drag it leftward up or down Also pressing SHIFT and clicking on specific CICs will select these CICs and all CICs in between that is the range of CICs will be continuous Right clicking a selected CIC then selecting Create CIC Group will also activate the Create CIC Group screen The options you select in the SS7 CIC Options screen will apply to all CICs you selected in the SS7 CICs screen The following information appears in the Create CIC Group screen This line indicates the span holding the channel that is the first CIC you selected in the SS7CICs screen for this CIC group Base CIC Channel line Ending CIC Span line This line indicates the channel that is the f
215. ize an ANI failure 06 This value indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only after being changed to characterize a hotel motel call 07 This value indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only after being changed to characterize a coinless call such as from a hospital or prison 20 This value indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only after being changed to characterize an AOID listed directory number is being sent 23 This value indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only after being changed to characterize a coinless or coin call of unknown character 24 This value indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only after being changed to characterize an 800 888 service 27 This value indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only after being changed to characterize a coin call 30 This value indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only after being changed to characterize an intercept of an unassigned number 31 This value indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only after being changed to characterize an intercept of number in trouble or in a busy state 32 This va
216. king on it then press the Delete button Find and SS7 Cause Code Enter the cause code value and select the Find button SS7 Cause Code Values The user will enter the SS7 cause code value between 1 and 200 in a decimal The available action drop window will be enabled If that cause code is returned the following action descript below will happen e Next available route The next Resource group will be used in the Route List If the last Resource Group has been used the incoming trunk is released with the Out Going trunk s return cause code e Play Busy Tone The incoming trunk is play 10 cycles of busy tone before the trunk is released e Play Reorder Tone The incoming trunk is play 10 cycles of reorder tone before the trunk is released e Release with Cause The incoming trunk is release with the user define cause code in the User Code field e Route to VRU The incoming trunk is routed to associated VRU SS7 Branding Route List If the SS7 VRU Branding is not configured the incoming trunk is released with the Out Going trunk s return cause code e If the cause code number is not in the list a second out going attempt is made After the second out dial attempt is made the incoming trunk is released with the Out Going trunk s return cause code VRU Cause Code Prompt The SS7 VRU Branding is configured under the Option menu selection of VRU Branding The user configures the Route Li
217. king on specific channels will select only these specific channels that is the range of channels will be discontinuous Right clicking a selected channel then clicking Configure Channels Attributes will also activate the Channel Feature Attributes screen The following information appears in the Channel Feature Attributes screen This list indicates how an incoming call seizes a channel and how the call s digits are collected Your required input is limited to the choices listed in Appendix A Incoming Types This list indicates whether and how the Calling Party Number that is ANI or CLI is added to this trunk s dialed number in a pattern that is compatible with the switch between the EXS Switch and the called party Your required input is limited to the following choices see Outgoing Types Appendix B for meanings of these choices DTMF FGD2 DTMF DN ANI Page 187 o e DTMF FGD 1 o Oo El R2 2 El R2 3 El R2 4 ISDN IEs MF ANI DN MF DN None SS7 Basic SS7 FGD Note The Outgoing Type must be configured for SS7 Basic or SS7 FGD in order for the CIP or TNS to be inserted in the outgoing dial message Refer to Assigning attributes to resource group SS7 Parameters for details Pre Translation Table list This list indicates the pre translation table this channel uses to translate incoming digits BEFORE sending them to the digit table associated with this channel Your optional input is limited
218. ks the same for all of the VRU options If the VRU is involved with the call the announcement digits are sent to the VRU route list The digits are interpreted by the VRU as an incoming command The command format used by the VRU is the following 01 CCCC LL PP PP PP 01 Command to play prompts and hang up CCCC_ Company directory for the prompts LL Language directory for the prompts PP Prompt number to play PP additional optional prompt to play before disconnecting the caller Note PP is either a 2 digit number or the value without the quotes 4 acts as a digit substitute in the digit string In the case of the ISDN and SS7 cause code announcements the cause code digit will be inserted in to the VRU string sent to the VRU This will allow the correct announcement to be played per the cause code returned by the far end switch Examples Play prompt 25 in the 2002 directory company in the 03 subdirectory language Announcement Number value 0120020325 Prompt file used WRU_MGR 2002 03 25 Play a prompt based on the SS7 cause code returned in the 3333 company and 07 language Announcement Number value 0133307 amp Prompt file used Assuming the returned cause code is 44 prompt VRU_MGR 3333 07 44 is played If under Channel Features if Audible Signaling is set to Annc then the specified message will play when the call cannot be completed If under Channel Features if Audible Sig
219. l Language to control signaling on this channel This list indicates the PPL signaling configuration file that controls signaling on this channel Your input required if you have selected the PPL channel type is limited to the named files in this list Page 118 Note TIf this El span connects to an VIC VRU you must select VoiceTek 4 PPL signaling configuration file CAS Idle Bits checkboxes These checkboxes indicate a four bit ABCD pattern to be sent across this channel to indicate the channel is idle Your required input is limited to the following choices A This checkbox indicates the A bit is set to 1 when checked or set to 0 when not checked B This checkbox indicates the B bit is set to 1 when checked or set to 0 when not checked C This checkbox indicates the C bit is set to 1 when checked or set to 0 when not checked D This checkbox indicates the D bit is set to 1 when checked or set to 0 when not checked Note Checking A and D will result in the commonly used bit pattern 1001 hexadecimal digit 9 CAS Out Of Service Bits checkboxes These checkboxes indicate a four bit ABCD pattern to be sent across this channel to indicate the channel is out of service Your required input is limited to the following choices A This checkbox indicates the A bit is set to 1 when checked or set to 0 when not checked B This checkbox indicates the B bit is set to 1 when checked or set to 0 when
220. lding the failed card but only that node s T1 E1 spans will be lost to other nodes on the ring Provided you have two EXNET Controller cards per node you can mirror the traffic of one ring on a second ring Should an EXNET Controller card fail somewhere in your multinode EXS Switch the other EXNET Controller card in the node will assure that all T1 E1 spans remain accessible to all nodes The EXNET Card screen enables you to determine the status of an EXNET Controller card as well as to configure an EXNET ring EXNET Card Figure 3 28 EXNET Card screen layout You can activate this screen by clicking EXNET Controller Card in the Equipment List screen s View by Type mode then double clicking a listed EXNET Controller card or by clicking a listed EXNET Controller card in the Equipment List screen s View by Slot ID mode or by clicking a selected node in the Equipment List screen s View by Node mode then double clicking a listed EXNET Controller card Page 86 Equipment List e List by Type List by Slot ID DSP Card Ex CPU Card EXNET Controller Card 00 14 EXNET Controller Ring OXR 4P 01 14 EXNET Controller Ring OXR 4P Fan Tray ISDN Card Midplane Power Supply Card SS Card T1 Card ito a sa J Figure 3 29 EXNET Card screen activation View by Type mode The following information appears in the EXNET Card screen Model line This line indicates the model of this EXNET
221. lectronic devices that are inserted into slots of a rack mountable chassis This chassis can be one of two form factors the EXS 1000 formerly the CSN and the higher capacity EXS 2000 formerly the LNX Each chassis has a midplane into which processing cards of various kinds are plugged from a front entry and into which I O cards for these processing cards are plugged from a rear entry to form in some cases card pairs Some of these I O cards namely those paired with T1 or El line or network interface cards are points of attachment for cables from voice networks of local exchange and interexchange carriers and perhaps also from data networks other I O cards are actually HDLC devices to make certain processing cards namely ISDN and SS7 common channel signaling cards redundant One of these processing cards namely the EXNET Controller card is a point of attachment for EXNET cables from other chassis that make up a multi node EXS Switch You manage most of these resources or components in screens accessed from the Equipment List screen Equipment List Card related icons The Equipment List screen enables you to determine the distribution of components in your single node or multinode EXS Switch as well as to access screens that display the current status of these components and give you a means to put and take these components into and out of service if not configure them The Equipment List screen uses various icons to
222. lue indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only after being changed to characterize an intercept of a recently changed number 34 This value indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only after being changed to characterize an operator handled call Page 215 ANI CLI Xlate e 40 49 Any of these ten values indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only after being changed to characterize a call as defined by the local carrier e 52 This value indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only after being changed to characterize an outward WATS call e 61 This value indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only after being changed to characterize a cell phone call in which its ANI identifies only the cellular system e 62 This value indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only after being changed to characterize a cell phone call in which its ANI identifies the cell phone s directory number e 63 This value indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only after being changed to characterize a roaming cell phone call e 70 This value indicates the Stage II information digits will be sent over the call s outgoing leg only af
223. mer Engineering immediately e Inservice This T1 card is in service e CONFIG DATA INVALID The configuration data for this T1 card has been lost and has not been downloaded from the Host e FAULTS LOGGED One or more faults have occurred in this T1 card You must retrieve this card s Fault Log see Querying Fault Log below then report its contents to Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately e MEMORY TEST FAILED This T1 card has failed a self test of its memory You must determine whether the card has a ROM or RAM problem see Memory Test line below e CARD FAILURE This T1 card failed for an unspecified reason If resetting this card does not remove this message you must call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Page 59 Redundancy Status line This line indicates whether this T1 card was in a redundant mode that is matched with another card of the same kind in the same chassis and either communicating with it or ready to communicate with it and if so what relationship it had with the other card at the last status update One of the following messages will occur Non redundant This T1 card is not in redundant mode Active This T1 card is in redundant mode and is the card in control Note The letter A appears next to this card s icon in the Equipment List screen to indicate an active state Standby This T1 card is in redundant mode and is ready to take control if the active T1 card fails N
224. messages Configure an Excel Server data link Configure up to eight VRU links Download Programmable Protocol Language PPL files that establish signaling variations if you have El facilities Download a new or existing version of the System Software Dynamis operating system to the Matrix CPU card Download the LICENSE CFG file to the EXS Switch Send raw configuration commands to the EXS Switch Page 10 Starting the Software Launching the Host The E2 Host Software should always be running on the Host system When running there should be a screen like the following displayed or it should be minimized and an icon appears in the taskbar entitled E2 Host A OOH DORR IOAN HI Received Connection State Change gt 3614 yange Host State DOWN gt DOWN e e M n e m E a e e e RRR A a i E M M M D D Recei C ction State Change 3614 gt 3614 3 same Skip proc FOO OOO DIK Received Connection State Change 3614 gt 3614 States are the same Skip proc ng MOHE E HE E HE O OO t Config exe fully 2 1 Build 6 8 Aug 23 2004 18 07 CDR exe fully CDR 2 1 Build 60 0 Aug 23 2004 18 09 15 10 26 2004 13 Network exe Started S fully 2 1 Build 8 0 Aug 23 2004 18 08 34 Connected h is in UNKNOWN state default to Switch Standby 4 13 33 07 st Ul exe Started s lly 2 1 Build 6 0 Aug 23 2004 18 08 21 Me Host Figure 2 1 E2 Host Software sample screen and icon in taskbar DEL E 9
225. mode then double clicking a listed power supply card or by clicking a listed power supply card in the Equipment List screen s View by Slot ID mode or by clicking a selected node in the Equipment List screen s View by Node mode then double clicking a listed power supply card Page 42 Power Supply Card Figure 3 8 Power Supply Card screen activation View by Type mode The following information appears in the Power Supply Card screen Model line This line indicates the model of this power supply card Node Slot line This line indicates the node in the EXS Switch and slot in the node s chassis where this power supply card resides Note In a single node EXS Switch Node does not display in a multinode EXS Switch Node will display together with an automatically generated number identifying the node A chassis power supply card is associated with slot 17 and or 18 Last Card Status line This line indicates in MM DD YY HH MM SS format when this power supply card s status was last updated Hardware Status line This line indicates whether this power supply card is in service One of the following messages will occur e OnLine This card is providing power to the chassis e Off Line This card is not providing power to the chassis If you want to regain backup power you must swap this card and call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Module n line This line indicates whether the numbered
226. n and requires no external hardware This completion type provides a bridge for conference calls Up to seven people can be connected to one call For example a call comes in to the DNIS Lookup field of the Digit Table The call is routed to a resource group If the Completion type is set to Conf Bridge the Host connects the call to the Conference Bridge If a second caller dials the same number as the first this call is connected to the same Conference Bridge This can continue until seven calls are connected if set up as such The number of calls connected is determined by the number of channels supported The Host supports either two 4 channel or one 7 channel Conference Bridge per Digital Signal Processor DSP The DSPs are located and are part of the MFDSP card in the EXS Switch This completion type is similar to Type 1 except that CPA Call Progress Analysis is attached to the outgoing channel CPA identifies call progress signals through in band frequency analysis CPA is typically done when originating a call to the PSTN to determine whether there is a busy signal a ringback an answer etc This completion type is similar to Type 1 but connects the incoming to the outgoing after a delay before ringback This delay is set by the Ring_Delay variable located in the E2 INI file NOTE In the future these configurations will be set in a screen in the GUI This completion type is similar to Type 3 but connects the incoming to the ou
227. n Tray This tray mounts four fans in the EXS 2000 chassis s underside accessed from the chassis front e Rear Fan Tray This tray mounts three fans in the EXS 2000 chassis s topside accessed from the chassis rear Node Slot line This line indicates the node in the EXS Switch and slot in the node s chassis where this fan tray resides Note In a single node EXS Switch Node does not display in a multinode EXS Switch Node will display together with an automatically generated number identifying the node An EX 1000 chassis fan tray is associated with logical slot 16 an EX 2000 chassis front fan tray is associated with logical slot 10 and its rear fan tray is associated with logical slot 22 Last Card Status line This line indicates in MM DD YY HH MM SS format when this fan tray s status was last updated Fan Tray Status line This line indicates whether the numbered fan in its tray is in service One of the following messages might occur e OK This numbered fan is in service e FAILED This numbered fan is not in service Note TIf this fan tray is an EX 2000 chassis front fan tray disregard the status of fans 5 6 if this fan tray is an EX 2000 chassis rear fan tray disregard the status of fans 4 6 Failure of a single fan will not usually endanger call processing or the cards performing this activity Warning Not replacing failed fans will cause heat to build up inside the chass
228. n activation View by Type mode Note The above figure shows redundant SS7 cards The highlighted card is active A the other is standby S Equipment List e List by Type C List Es fi EX CPU Card ES EXNET Controller Card E Fan Tray HE ISDN Card E 00 00 ISDN PRI E 0 00 ISDN PRI m Midplane F Power Supply Card BE SS7 Card E 00 01 SS7 PQ 16 Links T1 Card Figure 3 27B SS7 Card screen activation View by Type mode PowerQuick SS7 Card Page 81 The following information appears in the SS7 Card screen Model line This line indicates the model of this SS7 card Node Slot line This line indicates the node in the EXS Switch and slot in the node s chassis where this SS7 card resides Note In a single node EXS Switch Node does not display Tin a multinode EXS Switch Node will display together with an automatically generated number identifying the node Last Card Status line This line indicates in MM DD YY HH MM SS format when this SS7 card s status was last queried and displayed in the SS7 Card screen Note This card s status is automatically updated on activation of the SS7 Card screen Card Status line This line indicates whether this SS7 card is in service has suffered faults has good memory and or has good configuration data as well as how it was last reset One or more of the following messages might occur Reset by insertion An insertion of th
229. n click Screen ON to view call processing information on the screen If the Network log file is open all information displayed on the screen is captured in the Network log file If the Network log file is closed information displays only on the screen and does not get captured in the Network log file Note Make sure you close the Network log file before viewing You can only view the Network log file The Network1 log cannot be viewed Page 250 System Update menu Apply Configuration The System Update menu options enable you to run the startup procedure to ensure that the switch configuration is current manually switch over from one redundant Host to another and transfer files from an active Host computer to a standby Host computer E2 Connected to E2 Host LOCALHOST File Equipment Aj System Admin 557 ISDN Routing Options EA Switch Status View Alarms Span Channel state Carrier Answer Query Raw Command My Documents pi System Update Apply Configuration EXNET Management Transfer Files Logs Switch Over Figure 5 23 System Update actvation In the Maintenance menu point to System Update then click Apply Configuration This will apply all configurations set up by all other screens Warning Running startup stops call processing for the period that startup is running All equipment will be removed from service configured and then returned to service Transferring files Forci
230. naling is set to Annc then the specified message will play when the call cannot be completed If the ANI PIN record is configured to play voice messages Refer to the Smart Long Distance Manual then the specified prompt will greet the caller Otherwise the ANI PIN caller will hear a dial tone or beep as configured This gives you the capability of playing an announcement before entering a conference bridge See Assigning attributes to resource group Play ANI 900 Prompt to Conference Page 226 CPA Timer This feature is not supported at this time SS7 This prompt will play if the returned cause code is configured to do so See SS7 Cause Code Setup Page 227 5 Maintenance Overview This chapter explains how to e view the status of errors alarms and span states in real time e capture and review call processing data e capture and review network data and e update the system Switch Status screen The Switch Status screen enables you to view counts of Host link errors that have occurred between the Host computer and the EXS Switch You can also view RAM Switch Software and ROM firmware versions of the EXS Switch as well as view the primary and secondary clocks Page 228 E vritch Status Figure 5 1 Switch Status screen layout Clicking Switch Status in the Maintenance menu will activate this screen System Update gt Digit Table Pre transl 213 Logs 01 Vinc
231. nd Loc Unequip This value indicates the CIC is locally out of service The Status 2 column can show the following values e Loc HW Block This value indicates the CIC has a local hardware block e Rem HW Block This value indicates the CIC has a remote hardware block e Loc Maint Bloc This value indicates the CIC has a local maintenance block Note You can block a CIC for maintenance by clicking Block CIC s in the CIC Management menu e Rem Maint Bloc This value indicates the CIC has a remote maintenance block Page 155 Verifying Match of CIC Configurations Span Chan line To DPC line Selecting a CIC conforming to ANSI specification only displayed in the SS7 CICs screen then clicking Circuit Verify Test in this screen s CIC Management menu will test whether this CIC s configurations are the same at both the near end or local switch and the far end or remote switch then will display the results of this test in the CVT Test screen CVT Test X Figure 4 41 CVT Test screen layout The following information appears in the CVT Test screen This line indicates the channel in the span that is the SS7 CIC being tested CIC line This line indicates the number of the SS7 CIC being tested This line indicates the Destination Point Code of a voice switch where this SS7 CIC terminates to pass voice traffic Additionally one of the following messages will appear in the CVT Test screen Translations verific
232. net configurations click a node ID from the list If you are not using an Exnet configuration the list defaults to No Exnet This field indicates the PPL files on the EXS Switch The default file is CCITT El PPL Download field This field displays the PPL files available in the Host s hard disk directory Switch Software Download screen The Switch Software Download screen enables you to download new or existing System Software PSOS s operating system to the Matrix CPU card Warning Dynamis or WCS should be contacted prior to using this option Certain versions of the Switch Software are only compatible with specific Excel hardware versions Switch Software Download x Select Node Cancel Figure 2 23 Software Download screen layout On the System Admin menu point to Software Download then click Switch Software Download to activate this screen Page 28 D E2 Host LOCALHOST Maintenance 557 ISDN Routing Options Window He Ti FA E1 PPL Download Password Management System Setup Software Download pa ini System Restart License Download Edi Gi Configuration Download c nywhere Vault Admin Figure 2 24 Switch Software Download activation Downloading Switch Software In the Switch Software Download screen s Select Node list select the node ID of the EXS Switch that will receive the System Software then click the SEND button Note
233. network route has for SS7 message exchange in relation to other SS7 network routes terminating at the same voice switch channeled in the voice network to your EXS Switch Your required input is limited to a number between 00 lowest priority and 35 highest priority Link Set list This list indicates the SS7 link set supplying this SS7 network route s SS7 link Your required input is limited to the SS7 link sets in this list Remarks field This field indicates a reminder to your personnel regarding this SS7 network route Your optional input is limited to 24 alphanumeric characters Viewing route destination attributes Once you click the SS7 Route And Destination Attributes screen s OK button the SS7 network routes you have added or changed will display in the SS7 Card screen across the row of the Route identifying this SS7 link This row divides into columns that incorporate the meanings if not the exact labels of the 557 Routea and Destination Attributes screen s parameters for the selected SS7 route In addition this row includes a Route St column that indicates in real time the state of the route and a Dest St column that indicates in real time the state of the destination The Route St column can show the following values e A This value indicates the route is available for SS7 messaging e R This value indicates that SS7 messaging on this route is restricted e U This value indicates the route is not available for
234. nformation appears in the Route List screen Route List name field This field indicates the name of the route list Your required input is limited to 11 alphanumeric characters Having named a route list you then select those resource groups in the Outgoing Resource Groups screen that can provide access to the required destination if by different routes Page 205 Note A resource group can be assigned to more than one route list SS7 Cause Code Routing Checkbox The SS7 call routing based on the out going trunk return SS7 cause code is a two part setup The first step is to configure the SS7 Cause Code table See Creating SS7 Cause Code Routing and then assign the table to the Route List The SS7 Cause Code table will only be used on out going SS7 trunks that return a cause code The SS7 Cause Code table can be configured under the Option menu selection of SS7 Cause Code Page 206 Dragging and dropping resource groups into a route list To select the appropriate resource groups and to assign them to a specific route list highlight the channels groups you want then drag and drop them into the Resource Group column of the named route list displaying in the Route Lists named route list screen Resource Groups File Configure Group Name Sig Completion Type Options 20s ISDN ISDN 207 ISDN ISDN 203 S57 SS7 Type3 210 ISDN ISDN E2 ISDN ISDN C E Tone T Linear Sequential Sequential Sequential
235. ng a DSP card must be present in El card s chassis for this kind of signaling see Figure 3 13 DSP Card Alternatively the setting up and tearing down of a voice call can occur through an exchange not in the call s channel but in a separate channel of the data messages that make up either ISDN or SS7 common channel signaling an ISDN or SS7 card must be present in El card s chassis for this kind of signaling see ISDN PRI Card or SS7 Card A given ISDN or SS7 data channel carries setup teardown messages that can control many voice channels at one time SS7 channels or links occur in El spans connected to an SS7 data network rather than to the voice network El cards can be paired with either a standard I O card a redundant I O card or a standby I O card Provided you have another El card in the same chassis paired with a standby I O card any El card you have paired with a redundant I O card can fail and its calls will be handled by the El card paired with the standby I O card In this N 1 redundancy only one El card can fail per chassis El cards paired with standard I O cards cannot be made redundant Page 63 The El Card screen enables you to view the status of an El card as well as to bring its El spans in and out of service and to give N 1 redundancy to the El card Suma a lwlim Figure 3 18 E1 Card screen layout Note The El Card screen shows no icon in the l
236. ng Switchover In the Maintenance menu point to System Update then click Transfer Files This menu option transfers the latest file configuration SYS and DAT files from the active Host to the standby Host so that both systems contain duplicate information For example when a transfer is requested the system compares the date time of each file The files that contain the most recent date time are transferred to the Host with the older date time The older file is overwritten with the new data In the Maintenance menu point to System Update then click Switch Over Forcing switchover manually switches the active Host to the standby Host in a redundant configuration This may be necessary when one Host computer is functioning improperly or when a new Host is brought on line You can only switchover from the standby Host to the active Host not vice versa Page 251 Warning It is crucial that you read this entire section prior to performing a Force switchover Performing this command forces the standby Matrix card in the EXS Switch to become active When the switchover occurs board status messages are sent from the EXS Switch to the new active Host After the board status messages have been received from the Matrix card the Host will delay approximately one minute prior to running the startup routine This can be easily monitored by watching the debug screen When a system is first brought on line Host systems active a forc
237. ng for a Resource Group All applicable post routing options are in listed in the drop down box and can be selected NOTE Once the Post Routing option is selected the Post Routing button can be clicked to go directly to configuration for that option Page 204 Route Lists to Create Alternate Routing for Calls Having grouped channels that share a destination and share the attributes required for that destination see Grouping Channels you must create a route list This route list can associate resource groups providing alternate routes to a destination specified by a call This association should include a resource group that can if necessary lead to the playing of a busy tone or a reorder tone to the caller Note A route list must have at least one resource group You can assign up to 1 000 resource groups to a route list Assigning resource groups to route list The Route List screen enables you to create a route list to which you add resource groups Route List x Route List Name A Use 557 cause code routing Cancel Figure 4 88 Route List screen layout Clicking Add List in the Route Lists menu of the Route Lists screen itself is activated by clicking the RouTE Lists button in the Main Menu Tool Bar will activate this screen Route Lists File MA Lists pal List E Resource Group elete List Rename L E i01105 101107 Figure 4 89 Route List screen activation The following i
238. ng to an entry in the Index Table To determine whether the ANI table is used is specified in the Channel Features screen see next section Creating an Index Table The Index Table Designation screen enables you to create an Index Table to which you add digits for validation Index Atrributes Code 12345678901234 Code Length 14 ca Figure 4 63 Index Table Designation screen layout Click on the ROUTE TABLES button then click on the Index Table icon on the left Next select Tables and click on Add Table Note that you can also import and export Index tables Digit Tables Digit Table 00 Rename Table Delete Table Import Table Export Table Figure 4 64 ANI Table designation screen activation Page 177 The following information appears in the Index Table Designation screen Code field This field specifies the ANI and the digits to enter For example if the code field value is 12345678901234 and the ANI is 1234567890 then the caller must enter 1234 specified Code Length field Length of digits to manually enter This can vary between 1 and 20 Adding digit lookup entries to an Index Table You can either add multiple entries though importing and exporting or you can manually enter them by performing the following Select a specific Index table by double clicking it and first displaying all tables by clicking the ANI Table s sign then click Add Table Attribut
239. nnected C A conference bridge call D Caller hung up before a connection was made call abandoned F Outsize failure reported by outgoing trunk H Hot line transfer O Not answered Callback P Announcement trunk purge Q Call was in queue but then routed to termination group R Call released from queue before being routed S Operator hung up on caller T Transferred call o W Call was no answer timed out ANI CLI Number DNIS Number Dial Number In Span amp Channel Out Span amp Channel Resource Group Outbound Start Time Billable Time Sys Duration Orig Cause Code Term Cause Code SS7 NOA O ONONO O OOOO xO 20 Sample CDR files can be provided by your E2 technical representative Write CDR Records to TCP IP Port field This field indicates when checked Yes that the Host will write CDR files to a TCP IP port Click Yes to write CDR files to a TCP IP port or click No if you choose not to output CDR files to a TCP IP port Note Output to a TCP IP port requires another computer to login as a Host client via port 9601 Third party software is required to read this file and to manipulate its data Write CDR Records to log This field indicates when checked Yes that CDRs will be saved to a file on the Host Computer s hard drive Click Yes to save CDR files on the Host Computer s hard drive or click No if you choose not to save CDR files to the Host Computer s hard drive CDR Date amp Time Format NEW New to
240. not checked C This checkbox indicates the C bit is set to 1 when checked or set to 0 when not checked D This checkbox indicates the D bit is set to 1 when checked or set to 0 when not checked Ringing Timer field Not Used checkbox Notification Tone list Note Checking A B and D will result in the commonly used bit pattern 1101 hexadecimal digit D This field indicates how many seconds of ringing occur before billing starts on this El channel Your required input is limited to a number of seconds between 18 and 120 Note When the Not Used checkbox is checked the value in this field is zero When unchecked this checkbox displays a default 30 seconds This checkbox when checked disables the Ringing Timer This list indicates how calls on this El channel are made distinctive to an operator so that operator can respond with an appropriate brand Your optional input is limited to the following choices e Beep default This value indicates the operator hears a beep tone e Zip This value indicates the operator hears a zip tone Note This list is meaningful only when this channel s Completion Type is set to Operator see Completion Type list Page 119 Viewing attributes of all El Channels Once you click the El Tone Channel Attributes screen s OK button the El channel attributes you have added or changed will display in the Tone Channels screen scrollable if the screen is more than full acr
241. ntrol This incoming type configures the incoming complete timeout at eight 8 seconds Stage 1 String 1 KP Dialed Number ST String 2 KP II ANI ST First String Contains the dialed number Second String Contains the II digits and 7 to 10 digit ANI stages 1 strings 2 digit type MFR1 method use KP and ST string 1 method use KP and ST string 2 Generate inseize acknowledgment wink 1 Receive stage 1 digits Generate wink 2 Report incoming call with address data Wait for host control Page A 17 FGB AMA Incoming Digit Format Incoming Rule This incoming type is used as an originating FGB call in an FGB access arrangement Tandem connection Calls can only be routed via the dialed number No ANI digit routing is available No confirmation wink after digits are received Switch type NTX209AB Stage 1 e String 1 KP 950WXXX ST e String 2 KP ANI ST e First String Contains the 6 digit dialed number e Second String Contains the 9 digit ANI strings 2 digit type MFR1 method use KP and ST string 1 method use KP and ST string 2 terminator ST Inseize Control Instructions Outgoing Digit Format Outseize Control Generate inseize acknowledgment Receive string address data dialed number Generate call processing event 01 Receive string 2 address data ANI ANI off hook report incoming call with digits Wait for host control message Stage 1 e String
242. nu When checked the letter M without quotes appears in the Password Management screen s User Name field Equipment Access field This field indicates when checked that the user has access to the Main Menu Toolbar s Equipment menu When checked the letter H without quotes appears in the Password Management screen s User Name field Page 16 System Setup Screen Saving Changes The System Setup screen enables you to e Select Call Detail Record CDR output options e Setup communication links for the switch alarm and redundant ports e Setup LAN connections for Ethernet communications between the Host and VRU and the Host and an Dynamis Server and e Configure settings for output of an ACD event log and a remote switch log Clicking System Setup in the System Admin menu will display the various setup screens E2 Connected to E2 Host LOCALHOST File Equipment Maintenance Ep 0 557 ISDN Routing REA BEN Password Management i System Setup Software Download gt pa S mi System Restart ti G Figure 2 12 System Setup screen activation Clicking the APPLY button activates configuration changes and does not affect calls in progress Clicking the OK or Save button activates configuration changes and exits the System Setup screen without effecting calls in progress Warning Changes made to port selections do not take effect until you click the APPLY button or the OK button Click
243. o save to the Close button to exit without saving Page 132 Add Modify an ISDN Cause Code Enter the cause code value select a cause code action from the drop down box and if a return code is applicable enter it in the User Defined field Then press the Add Modify button Delete an ISDN Cause Code Select an ISDN code by clicking on it then press the Delete button Find and ISDN Cause Code Enter the cause code value and select the Find button ISDN Cause Code Values The user will enter the ISDN cause code value between 1 and 200 in a decimal The available action drop window will be enabled If that cause code is returned the following action descript below will happen VRU Cause Code Prompt Next available route The next Resource group will be used in the Route List If the last Resource Group has been used the incoming trunk is released with the Out Going trunk s return cause code Play Busy Tone The incoming trunk is play 10 cycles of busy tone before the trunk is released Play Reorder Tone The incoming trunk is play 10 cycles of reorder tone before the trunk is released Release with Cause The incoming trunk is release with the user define cause code in the User Code field Route to VRU The incoming trunk is routed to associated VRU ISDN Branding Route List If the ISDN VRU Branding is not configured the incoming trunk is released with the Out Going trunk s return cause code
244. o view alarms generated to inform you of occurrences of conditions Minor Checking this box indicates you want to view alarms generated by conditions that could worsen and become service affecting if not corrected Major Checking this box indicates you want to view alarms generated by conditions likely to affect service adversely if not corrected Note You must check at least one of these Severity boxes or no alarms will display Type checkboxes These checkboxes indicate the locations of conditions generating alarms you want to view Your optional input is limited to Internal Checking this box indicates you want to view alarms generated within the Host and in its connection to the EXS Switch for example an internal alarm will result if the Host and EXS Switch lose their IPconnection General Checking this box indicates you want to view alarms generated anywhere in your Call Processing System and its connections to the outside world for example a general alarm will result from a reference clock lost a DSP resource blocked or an SS7 network congested Board Checking this box indicates you want to view alarms generated within processing and I O cards of your EXS Switch for example a board alarm will result from a card reset a card revision incompatibility with system software or a Host ethernet link error Span Checking this box indicates you want to view alarms generated within spans to your carriers for example a
245. of equipment in different countries E2 Connected to E2 Host LOCALHOST File Equipment Maintenance even clin 557 ISDN Routing Options Window Hel Password Management Ea Pg System Setup E1 PPL Download Software Download License Download System Restart on Configuration Download N Fm My Documents vy Vault Admin pcAnywhere Figure 2 21 E1 PPL Download screen activation You must copy custom PPL files to the Hosts hard disk directory c dynamis ppl_4x raw You must then download the files using the E7 PPL Download screen The download operation takes a file from the hard disk directory into RAM for the Host which then loads the file into the EXS Switch Select Node a gt Switch E2 Host ppl_4X directory CCITT default Download uode Figure 2 22 E1 PPL Download screen layout On the System Admin menu point to Software Download and then click E1 PPL Download to activate this screen Downloading El PPL files Page 27 Select Node list Switch field In the EJ PPL Download screen s E2 field click the custom PPL file you want to download to the EXS Switch then click the DowNLoap button A screen message notifies you when the download is complete The following fields appear in the EJ PPL Download screen This list indicates in Exnet configurations the node EXS Switch that will receive PPL files from the Host In Ex
246. only when signaling type is tone ISDN displays only when signaling type is ISDN Music Hold displays only when signaling type is tone NA Type 3 displays only when signaling type is tone NA Type 4 displays only when signaling type is tone Network displays only when signaling type is tone Pre dial displays only when signaling type is tone Reorder displays only when signaling type is tone Ringing displays only when signaling type is tone SS7 Type 3 displays only when signaling type is SS7 Tandem FGD displays only when signaling type is tone Type 1 displays only when signaling type is tone Type 2 displays only when signaling type is tone Type 3 displays only when signaling type is tone Type 4 displays only when signaling type is tone Options list This list indicates either how hunting for an available outgoing channel occurs in this group or how incoming calls hear announcements Your optional input is limited to the following choices e Linear default This value indicates that the hunt for an available outgoing channel occurs linearly or directly through up to 48 T1 or up to 60 El channels or CICs in the group that is the hunt starts at the group s first channel and stops at the first available channel each time an outgoing channel must be found e Announcement This value which displays only when signaling type is Tone indicates that calls on multiple incoming channels in the group will be queu
247. ons Window Help Password Management System Setup E1 PPL Download License Download Configuration Download So if Fm git U pcAnywhere Yault Admin My Documents Figure 2 26 License Download screen activation Downloading the LICENSE CFG file On the System Admin menu point to Software Download then click License Download In the resulting License Download screen click the Yes button to download the LICENSE CFG file to the EXS Switch Page 30 Backing up System Related Files Data files You should back up all system related files on a regular basis using the Windows NT File Manager These files are stored in the Host computer s FILES_4X subdirectory Sample data log system and E2E files are listed on the following pages Data files are identified by the DAT filename extension Data files are updated when changes are made through the Routing Tables or System Admin functions of the Host The data files within the Host are as follows CALBACKxx DAT If using the Callback application contains the VRU route list and other Callback information DNIS_xx DAT Contains user definable Digit Table information where xx is an index number used by the Trunk Assignment Digit Tables EXCLU_xx DAT Contains user definable Exclusion Table information where xx is an index number used by the Trunk Assignment Digit Tables IDS DAT Contains the conference IDs to be deleted on startup
248. oss the row of the Span Chan identifying this El channel This row divides into columns that incorporate the meanings if not the exact labels of the El Tone Channel Attributes screen s attributes for the selected El channel Note If a selected Span Chan refers instead to a TI channel columns will reflect attributes for this kind of channel Tone Channels File Configure Span Chan Incoming Type Channel In Start Dial Out Start Dial Timer Flash Tone fine 008 00 T1 Collect Digits E amp M Wink Start Wink Start gt OFF Zip fine 008 01 T1 Collect Digits E amp M wink Start Wink Start OFF Zip fine008 02 T1 Collect Digits E amp M Wink Start Wink Start OFF Zip 008 03 T1 DTMF 16 12 E amp M WinkStart Wink Start 100 OFF zip fing 008 04 T1 Collect Digits E amp M wink Start Wink Start OFF Zip fing008 05 T1 Collect Digits E amp M wink Start Wink Start OFF Zip fine 008 06 T1 Collect Digits E amp M Wink Start Wink Start OFF Zip O Beer mer sat Ta a a tS Figure 4 16 Tone Channels screen layout for E1 Channels Page 120 ISDN Configuring and Putting ISDN PRI Channels Into Service Configuring ISDN channels requires you to specify a T1 or El span that will become an ISDN PRI span holding the ISDN PRI B Channels you want in service then to assign attributes to the ISDN D Channel that will control signaling on B Channels in this and perhaps other specified T1 or El spans then to as
249. ost Rou ne OA io Sak dos 199 Adding Changing Post Routing Tables 0 0 00 ceecceeeesecssceceseeeceeeeeceeeeeceeeeceeeecneeeeeeeeeenaeees 199 Post Routing Options Strait hey ea a giese a saii aS 200 Post Routing Options Translations A acne anes tes sane aang 201 Calling Party Post Routing Opuons att cs 201 Called Party Post Routing Options usina 202 Assigning Post Routing to a Route List s Resource GTOUP coooccccoccccnonccinonanonancnononaninnnccnnnnoss 203 Route Lists to Create Alternate Routing for Calls ooonnccnnnnccninoccnonacononacononncnoncnoonnncconnnnconnncnnnns 205 Assigning resource groups to route ld pistes eae tt A ese 205 Dragging and dropping resource groups into a route liSt ooooccnnncoccnoncnononanononononnncnono noo 207 Exporting Route List Configuration mtrs did qdccdananedendevanastapeadedoearduanasede 208 Importing Route List Configuration oooonnncccnoncccnonoccnnnnnononononnnoncnnnnncnnnnnonnnnnnnnnncnncnrnncncnnncnn 208 Assigning Post Routing to a Route List s Resource Group ccceescceeeseceeesecessneeeenteeeeaees 208 Digit dable o i 210 Overview New for 200 Tecositaana aia aaa dada diria E E 210 Creating a digit tablemesinenoran Une rerae eters et torres eters ert einer ete reset etter et Presse enters arte ere tert SF 211 Adding digit lookup entries to a digit table 212 Viewing all digit lookup entries in a Digit Table ooooconnnccnnnacinonacanananonananonananonanononanaconnnacos 220 Find
250. ot ID or View by Node in the Main Menu Tool Bar s Equipment menu then a specific SS7 card will activate this screen DO 000 000 000 ANSI Immedate o 001 001 001 ANSI Immediate Figure 4 28 SS7 Stacks Attributes screen activation Note The SS7 Card screen with Stacks selected shows no icon in the leftmost column when the status of an adjacent stack on a card in service cannot be determined An X icon displays when a stack has been in service but its card has been taken out of service or when the Host was not able to configure a stack for some reason Page 135 OPC fields Spec list Remarks field MTP Pause list The following information appears in the 557 Stack Attributes screen These fields indicate the unique three part OPC Originating Point Code of one of the four possible SS7 stacks per SS7 card in your EXS Switch Your required input is limited to the point code assigned this SS7 stack in your EXS Switch by your SS7 network provider Note In SS7 networks subject to ANSI specification the leftmost field designates a specific network such as AT amp T numbered between 000 and 255 the center field designates a cluster of voice switches and packet switching STPs signal transfer points numbered between 000 and 255 the rightmost field designates a specific voice switch or STP numbered between 000 and 255 In SS7 networks subject to ITU specification the leftmost field designates a world zone suc
251. ote The letter S appears next to this card s icon in the Equipment List screen to indicate a standby state Serving This T1 card is in redundant mode and is providing service to a redundant I O card whose associated T1 card has failed Note The letter S appears next to this card s icon in the Equipment List screen to indicate a serving State If this T1 card is in a serving state no other card in the chassis can be in this state if another card is in this state this TI card cannot be in a serving state Synchronizing This T1 card is in redundant mode and is exchanging configuration data with the other T1 card Note If synchronization fails this card will become non redundant An asterisk appears next to this card s icon in the Equipment List screen to indicate a synchronizing state FAIL This T1 card has failed for an unspecified reason If resetting this card does not remove this message you must call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Note The letter F appears next to this card s icon in the Equipment List screen to indicate a failed state Memory Test line This line indicates the result of a self test at the last status update of the integrity of ROM and RAM devices on this T1 card The following messages can occur OK Test proved memory was reliable ROM CHECKSUM FAILED Test proved read only memory was unreliable You must swap the card and call Dynamis Customer Engineering imme
252. ous ISDN and SS7 signaling see Post Routing Rules This feature is optional based on whether the rule is called by a Route List s Resource Group see next step STEP 11 Assign Resource Groups to Route Lists Create lists of resource groups that automatically provide a call with alternate routes to the same destination and optionally invoke post routing rules as specified in the previous step see Route Lists Creating Alternate Routes for Calls STEP 12 Build Digit Tables Build tables that will recognize digits from both called party numbers such as Dialed Numbers DNISs and DIDs and calling party numbers such as ANIs and CLIs then translate and or route the calls to outbound Route Listes TOD Route Lists other Digit Tables or applications requiring the Dynamis Server see Building Digit Tables 95 CALL CONTROL DIAGRAMS The following 2 page diagram describes how call processing is handled by the E2 host software Key configuration information can be found by pressing ctrl f then find the figure number displayed It is recommended to be printed out or viewed at 150 zoom z Network lt gt CHANNEL FEATURES Fig 4 69 Set Default DNIS ANI Collect Carrier Code Outgoing Code6 Yes lt Network ANI D gt ANI TABLE Fig 4 61 ANI Lookup No Yes INDEX TABLE Fig 4 66 alidate Security Code PRE TRANSLATE TABLE Fig 4 57 re Translate Table Specified
253. outing is used to change Resource Group choices based on time of day and day of week The routes can be used to provide least cost routing or other applications requiring time or day sensitive routing Up to 35 entries are allowed for each TOD route Page 8 Automatic Call Distribution ACD Queues Digit Tables Routing capabilities using ACD Queues is a standard feature of the Host and can provide many enhancements to call processing ACD Queues are designed to provide automatic even call distribution between trunks or stations in a Resource Group The distribution of the calls is based on the time each trunk has been busy This feature also includes timed overflow queue sizing queue full routing and overflow routing Basic call routing uses a digit matching process of dialed digits The collected digits are looked up in the Digit Tables for a match The Digit Table provides the Route List pointer for outgoing calls such as a unique table assigned to the trunk for the duration of the call Digit translations are available for digits received on the incoming call Digits can be added changed or deleted from the match A successful match points to a Route List for outgoing trunk selection System Files and Records Data Files Log Files System Files E2E Files All configuration information is stored on the Host Computer This information is presented in the form of data files log files system files and E2E Files Data files
254. ox is checked and under Options VRU Branding the prompt configuration is set the prompt will play Route Only Unrestricted Digital Information The incoming SS7 call has in the AMI SS7_USER_SERVICES_INFO_DETAILS parameter to only use an unrestricted digital channel for routing The flag indicates the channels in this group can route this type of SS7 call Use SS7 for charge number for CPN If checked the CPN Calling Party Number provided by the SS7 signal will be used and not the ANI CLI of the caller for charging callers when using the Smart Long Distance application This must be flagged and used in conjunction with the Channel Features Network List SS7 Verify field Gain Loss area The following checkbox and lists occur in the Gain Loss area of the Outgoing Channel Attributes screen Use checkbox This box indicates when checked that amplification or attenuation is applied to audio paths of channels in this group Incoming Gain Loss list This list indicates how many decibels db to attenuate negative value or to amplify positive value the audio path of incoming channels in this group Your optional input is limited to the following choices 3 db 0 db 2 db 3 db 4 db 6 db Outgoing Gain Loss list This list indicates how many decibels db to attenuate negative value or to amplify positive value the audio path of outgoing channels in this group Your optional input is limited to t
255. p the SS7 channels by CICs See Creating CICs for SS7 Channels e Set the CIC Options e View the CIC Options e View the CIC Status e Verify a Match of CIC configurations e Test Continuity Stop the Continuity Test Step 6 Configure SS7 Cause Code Routing Configure the SS7 Cause Code table to handle call routing or playing a VRU message based on Cause Codes See Creating SS7 Cause Code Routing Step 7 Cause Code Routing to VRU Prompt If it is wished certain SS7 cause codes can cause the call to be routed to the VRU to play a prompt variable by cause code see VRU Cause Code Prompt Page 134 Creating SS7 Stacks Having put channels namely T1 channels or El channels into service see Putting Channels to from Switch into Service you must determine which of these channels will serve as links to an SS7 network Because such links are actually message carriers for one of an SS7 card s four SS7 stacks you must first configure the SS7 stack that will ultimately have links and link sets associated with it see Creating SS7 Links Assigning attributes to SS7 stack The SS7 Stack Attributes screen enables you to create an SS7 stack with which SS7 link sets SS7 links and SS7 network routes will be associated SS7 Stack Attributes mmedate El Figure 4 28 SS7 Stack Attributes screen layout Selecting Stacks then clicking the App button in the SS7 Card screen itself activated by clicking View by Type View by Sl
256. pervision propagates towards the incoming call Incoming Rule strings 2 digit type MFRI method use KP and ST string 1 method use KP and ST string 2 Inseize Control Instructions e Generate inseize acknowledgment e Receive stage N address data e Generate call processing event e Report incoming call with digits e Wait for host control message Page A 23 Appendix B Outgoing Types Overview The ANI CLI Automatic Number Identification Calling Line Identifier type configuration defines the outpulse digit configuration to be used on an outgoing call when ANI CLI is required Outgoing Types List Cell Tdm Outgoing Digit Format CIC DTMF FGD1 Outgoing Digit Format The ANI CLI types detailed in this appendix are listed in alphabetical order Most of the AN CLII types listed below include a brief description of the actual type followed by the general format A description of the stage s of that format follows This ANVCLI type uses MFR1 dialing for Cellular Tandem routing Stage 1 e String 1 KP ANI CIC Dialed Number ST First String Contains the 10 digit ANI followed by the 3 digit CIC then the 10 digit dialed number Contact your E2 technical representative if you wish to use this type This ANI CLI type provides in band ANI to those customers not supporting MFR1 dialing This type is commonly referred to as DTMF Feature Group D Digits are outpulsed using DTMF only Stage 1 e
257. r has good configuration data as well as how it was last reset One or more of the following messages might occur Reset by insertion An insertion of this ISDN PRI card in the chassis caused this card s last reset Reset by software A taking of this ISDN PRI card out of service then putting it back in service from the Host or a powering down then up of the entire chassis or a fault in this card caused this card s last reset Reset by button A push of this ISDN PRI card s RESET button caused this card s last reset OUT OF SERVICE BY HOST Someone has taken this ISDN PRI card out of service through the Host OUT OF SERVICE BY SWITCH An EX CPU card has reported this ISDN PRI card to be out of service If this card s dipswitch 3 is set to ON if another ISDN PRI card does not have this same message and if resetting this card does not remove this message you must swap this card and call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately In service This ISDN PRI card is in service CONFIG DATA INVALID The configuration data for this ISDN PRI card has been lost and has not been downloaded from the Host FAULTS LOGGED One or more faults have occurred in this ISDN PRI card You must retrieve this card s Fault Log see Querying Fault Log below then report its contents to Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately MEMORY TEST FAILED This ISDN PRI card has failed a self test of its memory You must determine whether the ca
258. rd Your required input is limited to the following choices e None default e Ring 0 e Ringl e Ring2 e Ring 3 Transmit Mode list This list indicates how this EXNET Controller card handles voice carrying packets Your required input is limited to the following choices e Receive Only This EXNET Controller card only receives voice carrying packets from the fiberoptic ring e Transmit and Receive default This EXNET Controller card both transmits and receives voice carrying packets to and from the fiberoptic ring Number of Packet list This list indicates the number of voice carrying packets carried per timeslot each timeslot representing a voice channel on the fiberoptic ring Your required input is limited to the following choices e 64 Packets default Each timeslot carries four packets and supports both El traffic and a combination of El and T1 traffic e 3 Packets Each timeslot carries three packets and supports only T1 traffic Page 90 Updating EXNET ring status Clicking EXNET Management in the Main Menu Tool Bar s Maintenance menu will query the EXNET ring to determine its current status then display this status in the EXNET Management screen EXNET Management E In Service In Service zz Q 2 o o 26 RIB Figure 3 31 EXNET Management screen layout Note The EXNET Management screen shows a green icon in the leftmost column when the ring to which the adjac
259. rd has a ROM or RAM problem see Memory Test line below CARD FAILURE This ISDN PRI card failed for an unspecified reason If resetting this card does not remove this message you must call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Page 76 Redundancy Status line This line indicates whether this ISDN PRI card was in a redundant mode that is matched with another card of the same kind in the same chassis and either communicating with it or ready to communicate with it and if so what relationship it had with the other card at the last status update One of the following messages will occur e Non redundant This ISDN PRI card is not in redundant mode e Active The ISDN PRI card is in redundant mode and is the card in control Note The letter A appears next to this card s icon in the Equipment List screen to indicate an active state e Standby This ISDN PRI card is in redundant mode and is ready to take control if an active processing card fails Note The letter S appears next to this card s icon in the Equipment List screen to indicate a standby state e Synchronizing This ISDN PRI card is in redundant mode and is exchanging configuration data with the other ISDN PRI card Note If synchronization fails this card will become non redundant An asterisk appears next to this card s icon in the Equipment List screen to indicate a synchronizing state e FAIL This ISDN PRI card has failed for an unspecif
260. rd has been isolated from the EXNET ring because the EXNET Controller card has encountered errors while receiving voice carrying packets from the TDM time division multiplexing bus in the node s midplane If resetting the EXNET Controller card does not return the node to the ring call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Node Isolated The node holding the specified EXNET Controller card has been isolated from the EXNET ring because both the card s ports have failed due either to failed light transceivers unlikely or to a dislodged fiberoptic cable connector likely or a damaged fiberoptic cable likely that prevents light transmission and or reception If reseating the suspect fiberoptic cable connector or replacing the suspect fiberoptic cable itself does not return the node to the ring call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately No Light The specified EXNET Controller card is not able to receive light on one of its ports when in normal position rather than looped back Out of Service The active EX CPU card has reported this EXNET ring to be out of service If your attempt to put this EXNET ring back into service does not succeed call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Unknown This EXNET ring is out of service for an unknown reason Call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Port A Port B columns These columns indicate the status of port A or port B on the specified EXNET Controller card On
261. reason If resetting this card does not remove this message you must call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately This line indicates whether this SS7 card was in a redundant mode that is matched with another card of the same kind in the same chassis and either communicating with it or ready to communicate with it and if so what relationship it had with the other card at the last status update One of the following messages will occur Non redundant This SS7 card is not in redundant mode Active This SS7 card is in redundant mode and is the card in control Note The letter A appears next to this card s icon in the Equipment List screen to indicate an active state Standby This SS7 card is in redundant mode and is ready to take control if the active SS7 card fails Note The letter S appears next to this card s icon in the Equipment List screen to indicate a standby state Synchronizing This SS7 card is in redundant mode and is exchanging configuration data with the other SS7 card Note If synchronization fails this card will become non redundant An asterisk appears next to this card s icon in the Equipment List screen to indicate a synchronizing state e FAIL This SS7 card has failed for an unspecified reason If resetting this card does not remove this message you must call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Note The letter F appears next to this card s icon in the Equipment List
262. reen Model line This line indicates the model of this El card Current models include 4 Span SEILC This model supports 120 digital voice channels at 64 Kbps ne SEILC This model supports 240 digital voice channels at 64 Kbps ONE 8 Span This model supports 240 digital voice channels at 64 Kbps ONE 16 Span This model supports 480 digital voice channels at 64 Kbps each Node Slot line This line indicates the node in the EXS Switch and slot in the node s chassis where this El card resides Note In a single node EXS Switch Node does not display In a multinode EXS Switch Node will display together with an automatically generated number identifying the node Last Card Status line This line indicates in MM DD YY HH MM SS format when this El card s status was last updated Card Status line This line indicates whether this El card is in service has suffered faults has good memory and or has good configuration data as well as how it was last reset One or more of the following messages might occur Reset by insertion An insertion of this El card in the chassis caused this card s last reset Reset by software A taking of this El card out of service then putting it back in service from the Host or a powering down then up of the entire chassis or a fault in this card caused this card s last reset Reset by button A push of this El card s RESET button caused this card s last reset Standby I O pres
263. reen Span 10 Channel States File Channel Span Error Monitor 1025 1048 TCS 142 010 Re Es Span Out Service In Service Figure 5 6 Span and Channel Status screen layout Clicking Span Channel States in the Maintenance menu will activate this screen E2 Connected to E2 Host LOCALHOST File Equipment Aj System Admin 557 Switch Status View Alarms Span Channel state Carrier Answer Query Raw Command My Documents pd System Update EXNET Management Logs vam Figure 5 7 Span and Channel Status screen activation Page 237 Viewing Span and Channel Status Selecting Channels To view span and channel status click a span ID in the Span list The Span and Channel Status screen displays status messages for each channel as well as a color coded icon indicating the service status of each channel A green icon indicates the channel is in service and a red icon indicates the channel is out of service The following channel status messages may appear in the Span and Channel Status screen e period Channel is out of service by the EXS Switch e 00 gt 1 05 Channel 00 in displayed span is connected to outseized channel 05 in span 1 e 00 1 05 Channel 00 in displayed span is connected to answered channel 05 in span 1 e Alarm Channel is in an alarm state caused by either an alarm or signaling failure on the span e Bridge ID xxxx Channel is bridged onto conference ID xxxx hex e Broad
264. reen enables you to view the status of a DSP card as well as to assign tone and conferencing capabilities to DSPs of the card DSP Card E DTMF Gu _MFAT Gu CPG u MFRT Ru MFAT Ru MFR Ru MFR1 Ru i DTMF Ru DTMF Ru DTMF Ru DTMF Ru Figure 3 13 DSP Card screen layout Page 49 Note The DSP Card screen shows a green icon in the leftmost column when an adjacent SIMM is in service A red icon displays when a SIMM is not in service You can activate this screen by clicking DSP Card in the Equipment List screen s View by Type mode then double clicking a listed DSP card or by clicking a listed DSP card in the Equipment List screen s View by Slot ID mode or by clicking a selected node in the Equipment List screens View by Node mode then double clicking a listed DSP card Equipment List e List by Type A 00 08 MFDSP ES 00 10 DSP ONE A 0 10 DSP ONE A 0 11 MFDSP EX CPU Card EXNET Controller Card Fan Tray ISDN Card Midplane Power Supply Card 557 Card T1 Card E e HA Figure 3 14 DSP Card screen activation View by Type mode The following information appears in the DSP Card screen Model line This line indicates the model of this DSP card Current models include e DSP ONE e MFDSP Node Slot line This line indicates the node in the EXS Switch and slot in the node s chassis where this DSP card resides Note In a single node
265. ress spare no interpretation xl Cancel Figure 4 53 Pre Translation Table Designation screen layout Selecting Pre Translation Table then clicking Add Table in the Tables menu of the Digit Tables screen itself activated by clicking the DIGIT TABLES button in the Main Menu Tool Bar will activate this screen Digit Tables Digit Table 00 File Attributes SR add Table Digit Look Rename Table 10 823 Delete Table inc 771 amp F i 617 Import Table 6038 Export Table 508 44428 Figure 4 54 Pre Translation Table designation screen activation Page 170 The following information appears in the Pre Translation Table Designation screen Table Number list This list indicates the Pre Translation tables numerical identification Table Name field Indicates the Pre Translation Table s name Your required input is limited to 19 alphanumeric characters We recommend some meaningful name Adding digit lookup entries to a Pre Translation Table You must assign attributes to it These attributes include the actual pattern of digits the Host will look for in the incoming call and will match in whole or in part with an appropriate route for that call The Pre Translation Table Attributes screen enables you to assign this and other attributes to an Pre Translation table MP re Translation Table Attributes x D For Pre Translation Table Number 2 Name Brayton Digit Lookup 018 Digit Xlate 1 011
266. roups Group channels that is the channels you have put into service that will have a common destination and signaling type See Resource Groups Grouping Channels for details Typically there will be a different Resource Group for each unique combination of carrier and signaling type STEP 3 Build Inbound Pre Translation Tables Optional Build inbound Pre Translation tables see Pre Translation Tables to translate digits before submitting to the Digit Tables for further processing This feature is optional based on whether Pre Transation tables are specified in the Assign Channel Features step below STEP 4 Build ANI Validation amp Index Tables Optional Build Tables for billing by ANI and manual default Account Code see ANI Tables and Index Tables This feature is optional based on whether in the Assign Channel Features step below the field Network is set to ANI Account and an ANI Table is specified 94 STEP 5 Build the NPA Table for Inter Intra State Determination Optional The NPA table correlates NPAs to determine if both legs of the call are in the same state see The NPA Table This feature is optional based on whether in the Assign Channel Features step below the field Lookup Type is set to DNIS Intra Inter State or ANI Intra Inter State STEP 6 Build Master Route Table for NPA NXX Routing Optional The Master Route table routes and or translates by NPANXX s
267. route is not in service An X icon displays when a route has been in service but its card has been taken out of service or when the Host was not able to configure a route for some reason The following information appears in the SS7 Route and Destination Attributes screen These fields indicate the unique three part DPC Destination Point Code of a voice switch where this SS7 network route from your EXS Switch terminates to exchange SS7 messages for control of SS7 channels called CICs see Creating CICs or SS7 Channels between that switch and your EXS Switch Your required input is limited to the point code assigned this voice switch by your SS7 network provider Note In SS7 networks subject to ANSI specification the leftmost field designates a specific network such as AT amp T numbered between 000 and 255 the center field designates a cluster of voice switches and packet switching STPs signal transfer points numbered between 000 and 255 the rightmost field designates a specific voice switch or STP numbered between 000 and 255 In SS7 networks subject to ITU specification the leftmost field designates a world zone such as Europe or Asia numbered between 0 and 7 the center field designates an region country or network in the world zone numbered between 000 and 255 the rightmost field designates a specific SS7 network switch or STP numbered between 0 and 7 Page 144 Priority field This field indicates the priority this SS7
268. route list in E2 new calls are automatically queued when all available trunks in that route list are busy or logged off if operator trunks Calls in queue will be served in order first in first out when any trunk in any trunk group of the route list becomes available idle ACD queues are designed to provide automatic even call distribution between trunks in the trunk group s of a route list The distribution of calls is based on the time each trunk has been busy By assigning an ACD queue as a last choice group in a route list all trunks in the route list change to even call distribution regardless of the hunting sequence for the trunk groups in the route list ACD queues achieve even call distribution even when calls do not go into the holding queue The ACD queue feature in E2 has many attributes Queue size limit time to overflow queue full routing and overflow routing are programmable parameters for each ACD queue ACD call processing event records are available as an output from E2 The event records are generated in real time as calls progress through the system The records can be used to provide traffic analysis for fine tuning the queuing parameters assigning operators and for other management tasks Page 195 The following diagram shows call flow decisions when an ACD queue has been placed on a route list Route To Busy Tone typical Outgoing Trunk ACD Queue Available Assigned Route To Qu
269. s Note Clicking the Ser Primary button will cause the selected span to be the one and only primary clock source for the entire EXS Switch chassis If this chassis is one of many nodes each node must get its clock separately from the same place e S This value indicates the span is the secondary source of network clocking for its EXS Switch chassis and will become the primary source if the primary source fails Note Clicking the Ser SECONDARY button will cause the selected span to be the one and only secondary clock source for the entire EXS Switch chassis If this chassis is one of many nodes each node must get its clock separately from the same place To put this span into service highlight the span s row then click the INTO SERVICE button You must specify at least one El span for every switch in the telephone network to and from which your EXS Switch directly carries calls subject to SS7 control You must also specify at least one El span for every switch in an SS7 network to and from which your EXS Switch directly exchanges SS7 control messages Note To determine whether the span is actually in service activate the Spans and Channels Status screen then select the span s Span ID in that screen s Span list see Span and Channel Status screen Page 116 Giving attributes to El channels The channels in the span are now ready to be assigned their tone signaling attributes The El Tone Channel Attributes screen enables
270. s QUERY FAuLT Loc button displays this SS7 card s Fault Log see Fault Log query with fault for an EX CPU card s Fault Log example Clearing Fault Log Clicking the SS7 Card screen s CLEAR FAULT Loc button clears this SS7 card s Fault Log and resets the number of faults to 0 0 also appears when no faults are detected on a query see Fault Log cleared or clear of faults for an EX CPU card s Fault Log example Putting SS7 card in service Clicking the SS7 Card screen s IN SERVICE button makes this SS7 card available for call processing Note If you are putting the SS7 card in service after having configured it and taken it out of service the Host will download the SS7 configuration data the card lost when you took it out of service Putting SS7 card out of service Clicking the SS7 Card screen s OUT OF SERVICE button makes this SS7 card unavailable for call processing Note You will want to take this card out of service if you need to test the card or if you discover the card is faulty Taking this card out of service automatically clears all SS7 configuration data and also takes SS7 controlled voice channels out of service Making SS7 cards non redundant Page 84 Clicking the SS7 Card screen s NON REDUNDANT button takes this SS7 card out of redundant mode Making SS7 cards redundant Clicking the SS7 Card screen s REDUNDANT button puts this SS7 card in redundant mode if a second SS7 card has been install
271. s field determines what the digits are used for routing IF the above Option field is set to Digit Table e DNIS routing is based on DNIS Thus the DNIS is used in the Digit Lookup field Translation of the ANI DNIS and II uses the corresponding ANI CLI XLATEI and II XLATE fields e ANI The called digit table performs a lookup based on the ANI Thus the ANI is used in the Digit Lookup field Translation of the ANI DNIS and II uses the corresponding ANI CLI XLATE1 and II XLATE fields A comment of up to 64 characters is for each digit table entry is now supported Page 219 Viewing all digit lookup entries in a Digit Table Once you click the Digit Table Attributes screen s OK button the digit lookup entry you have added or changed will display in the Digit Tables screen scrollable if the screen is more than full across the row of the Digit Lookup representing that digit lookup entry This row divides into columns that incorporate the meanings if not the exact labels of the Digit Table Attributes screen s attributes for the selected digit lookup entry File Tables Attributes Dt Digit Tables Dt 00 new2005 Dt 01 Qwest Routine Dt 02 new Table Digit Lookup Digit Xlate 1 TL ANI CLI Xlate Limit Opt Route Lookup Comments 2899998 222 0 Digit Table Dt new2005 ANI Dig Table Routing ANI Lookup ZE 5 ZO Cr Dt 03 time 2898978 D Route List J Qwest Dt 04 DNIS 2898968 o Route List Y Q
272. s listeners and a channel limited number of listeners if DSP ONE model or only one Conference bridging four seven speakers listeners and a channel restricted number of listeners if MFDSP model subject to A law CPA A DSP can simultaneously receive Call Progress Analysis signals subject to A law on up to 20 channels if DSP ONE model or 13 channels if MFDSP model per node of your EXS Switch CPA u default for DSP 3 on SIMM 1 DSP can simultaneously receive Call Progress Analysis signals subject to u law on up to 20 channels if DSP ONE model or 10 channels if MFDSP model per node of your EXS Switch CPG A DSP can simultaneously generate Call Progress Tone Group signals subject to A law on all channels per node of your EXS Switch Page 53 CPG u default for DSP 2 on SIMM 1 DSP can simultaneously generate Call Progress Tone Group signals subject to u law on all channels per node of your EXS Switch DTMF GA DSP can simultaneously generate DTMF signals subject to A law on all channels per node of your EXS Switch DTMF Gu default for DSPs O and 1 on SIMM 1 DSP can simultaneously generate DTMF signals subject to u law on all channels per node of your EXS Switch DTMF RA DSP can simultaneously receive DTMF signals subject to A law on up to 22 channels if DSP ONE model or 13 channels if MFDSP model per node of your EXS Switch DTMF Ru default for DSPs 0 1 2 and 3 on SIMM 0 and DSPs 0 1 2 and 3 on SIMM 3 DSP
273. s screen the Tone Channels screen itself is activated by clicking the Tone TRUNKS button in the Main Menu Tool Bar Page 109 Changing transmission timers Excel Switching Corporation configures transmission timers with values specified in AT T Publication 43801 and Bellcore TR TSY 000506 You will need to change these default values only if networks to which your channels are connected do not follow Tone Channels Configure Tone Channel Attributes Clear Attributes Edit Sig Rev Filters Wink Wink Wink y ollect Digits 3 Wink 009 05 T1 Collect et E E amp M Wink EM aana me trad mM m nas Figure 4 9 Signaling Reception Timer Attributes screen activation these specifications Warning Changing timers can stop call processing Dynamis Corporation strongly advises you to consult Dynamis Customer Engineering personnel before changing timer values Signaling Transmission Timer Attributes Figure 4 10 Signaling Transmission Timer Attributes screen layout Page 110 Selecting one or more channels of one or more T1 spans displaying in the Tone Channels screen then clicking Edit Sig Xmit Timers in this screen s Channels menu will activate the Signaling Transmission Timer Attributes screen the Tone Channels screen itself is activated by clicking the TONE TRUNKS button in the Main Menu Tool Bar Tone Channels File am Configure Tone Channel Attributes Clear Attributes
274. screen If you want to a digit table or an Pre Translation Table to become a feature of a particular channel you can drag that digit table or Pre Translation table from the Digit Tables screen to the line s representing that channel in the Channel Features screen Page 192 Time of Day Day of Week Routing Having associated resource groups that can provide alternate routes to a destination specified by a call see Creating Alternate Routes for Calls you may want to associate selected route lists with a Time of Day Table A TOD table gives you a means to route calls to selected carriers at certain times of the day to incur the least cost Note A TOD table must have at least one route list You can assign up to 35 route lists to a TOD table Adding a time of day table The Add Rename TOD Table screen enables you to create a time of day table to which you add route lists and assign a starting day and time Add Rename TOD Table Figure 4 73 Add Rename TOD Table screen layout Clicking Add in the TOD menu of the TOD Table screen itself is activated by clicking the TOD TaBLEs button in the Main Menu Tool Bar will activate this screen TOD Tables Figure 41 74 Add Rename TOD Table screen activation The following information occurs in the Add Rename TOD Table screen TOD Table Name Field This field indicates the name of the time of day table to which you will add route lists Your required input is limited to
275. select these channels and all channels in between that is the range of channels will be continuous Alternatively pressing CTRL and clicking on specific T1 channels will select only these specific channels that is the range of channels will be discontinuous Right clicking a selected T1 channel then selecting Configure Tone Channel Attributes will also activate the TI Tone Channel Attributes screen Selected channels must be on the same type of channel The attributes you select in the Tl Tone Channel Attributes screen will apply to all TI channels in the TI span s you selected in the Tone Channels screen The following information appears in the TZ Tone Channel Attributes screen This list indicates how an incoming call seizes a channel and how the call s digits are collected Your required input is limited to the choices described in Appendix A Incoming Types This list indicates the type of channel that is compatible with the configuration of equipment at the channel s far end Your required input is limited to the following choices For analog channels e DID Direct Inward Dialing This value indicates the channel routes a call made outside a company to an extension within that company without passing through an operator or attendant e DPO Dial Pulse Originating This value indicates the channel sends rotary dialing to the far end e DPT Dial Pulse Terminating This value indicates the channel receives ro
276. sents various models of the T1 card see TZ Card for details on the functionality monitorability and configurability of this kind of Card Associated with this icon is the node if a multinode EXS Switch and slot number where the specified card resides together with this card parenthetically listed span IDs Two other icons indicate you have a serious problem with a card or a disparity between the configuration file in your Host and the actual configuration in your EXS Switch x icon This icon indicates a non functioning card This card could not initialize and report itself to the EX CPU card and therefore the Host To regain this card s functionality you must replace it Page 36 5d icon This X icon indicates that a card recorded in your Host s configuration file but the card is not present in your EXS Switch This typically occurs when a person has removed a card without first stopping the software Host s configuration file and X icon Not only does the Host s configuration file record the actual distribution of components in the EXS Switch this file also holds data of configurations you have made for each of these distributed components Should you need to pull a card from the EXS Switch then reinsert it or replace it with the same model in the same location the Host will automatically download that card s configuration data to the EXS Switch to effect configuration of that card which will have lost its conf
277. sign attributes to the B Channels themselves Once you have activated a span you intend to support ISDN PRI service see Activating a TI span or Activating an El span you must associate an ISDN D Channel resource in the ISDN card itself pooling 32 such D Channel resources with this span The Add ISDN Primary D Channel screen enables you to make this association Note In an EXNET ring D Channel resources of one node s ISDN card cannot be associated with TI or El spans of another node Figure 4 17 Add ISDN Primary D Channel screen layout Clicking the App D CHAN button in the ISDN Card screen itself activated by clicking View by Type View by Slot ID or View by Node in the Main Menu Tool Bar s Equipment menu with this screen s Configure D Channel Parameters button engaged then a specific channel in a span will activate this screen Figure 4 18 Page 121 Add ISDN Primary D Channel screen activation The following information appears in the ISDN D Channel Parameters screen Span list This list indicates a span supporting ISDN PRI service Your required input is limited to the span IDs in this list Channel list This list indicates the channel in a span supporting ISDN PRI service that is the D Channel Your required input is limited either to any channel but typically channel 24 internally numbered 23 for ISDN PRI service on an actual T1 span or to channel 30 internally
278. span alarm will result from a span out of service or from an excessive burst of slips Channel Checking this box indicates you want to view alarms generated within channels of your spans for example a channel alarm will result from a PPL state machine error DSP Checking this box indicates you want to view alarms generated within the Digital Signal Processing cards of your EXS Switch for example a DSP alarm will result from DSP card taken out of service DSP SIMM Checking this box indicates you want to view alarms generated within memory modules on the Digital Signal Processing cards of your EXS Switch for e Page 234 xample a DSP SIMM alarm will result from an erased Voice Recorded Announcement System SIMM or from an inconsistent download of recorded announcements e EXS Node Checking this box indicates you want to view alarms generated within an EXNET ring for example an EXS Node alarm will result from a changed timeslot count Note You must check at least one of these Type checkboxes or no alarms will display Response checkboxes These checkboxes indicate whether you want to view alarms you have or have not acknowledged or both Note You must check at least one of these Response checkboxes or no alarms will display Clicking the View DETAILS button in the Alarms screen will display details of the alarm you select in the Alarms area Alarm Details Figure 5 5 Alarm Details screen layout The follo
279. spans or CPG A generates A law tone on outbound for CICs on El spans and at least one for CPA u receives u law tone on inbound path for CICs on T1 spans or CPA A receives A law tone on inbound path for CICs on El spans see DSP Card 57 CCR Results Figure 4 42 SS7 CCR Results screen layout The following information appears in the SS7 CCR Results screen This line indicates the channel in the span that is the SS7 CIC being tested This line indicates the number of the SS7 CIC being tested This line indicates the Destination Point Code of a voice switch where this SS7 CIC terminates to pass voice traffic Additionally one of the following messages will appear in the SS7 CCR Results screen e Successful This message indicates the continuity test succeeded e DSP Resource Allocation Failure This message indicates the continuity test failed You must configure your DSP resources to support this test see note above Page 158 Stopping Automatic Continuity Test Selecting a CIC displayed in the S 7 CICs screen that is undergoing a continuity test then clicking Continuity Stop in this screen s CIC Management menu will stop the continuity test that an SS7 stack will automatically run and endlessly repeat on this CIC when an initial continuity test has failed Stopping this automatic test preserves resources Page 159 Creating SS7 Cause Code Routing This capability allows for different SS7 call routing b
280. st and the digits to be sent to the VRU The amp character in the Announcement Number will cause the substitution of the Cause Code number into the digit string Page 161 Resource Groups Grouping Channels Having put channels namely T1 channels El channels ISDN D and B Channels or SS7 channels called CICs into service you should group those channels or channels that share a destination into Resource Groups Grouping channels with a shared destination gives you a means to distribute calls across spans in a manner that will optimize their use and justify their cost This grouping will also make it easier to assign certain attributes that channels to the same destination must share If outgoing channels you are grouping go to a carrier s equipment for example AT amp T or British Telecom you should name their group in a manner that reminds you of this carrier such as AttRG or BtRG if channels you are grouping go to other elements in your Call Processing System such as a VRU or an operator you should name their group in a manner that reminds you of their function such as VruRG or OperatorRG In addition to other resource groups you should create a resource group named BusyRG whose Completion Type is set to Busy or ReorderRG whose Completion Type is set to Reorder Either of these two resource groups should then be placed last among the resource groups you associate in Route List see Cr
281. st one DSP is configured for Call Progress Generation and requires no external hardware This completion type indicates that the call completes with a ringback tone It could be used as a completion type for calls held in queue for ACD features This completion type plays the ringback to the caller Forward call processing does take place The ringback tone is generated by the MFDSP card if at least one DSP is configured for Call Progress Generation and requires no external hardware Refer to the various sections of the manual to configure SS7 This Completion type must be used on outgoing channels that are used to complete calls from incoming channels using INC Tandem or MID Tandem as the Impulse type Tandem FGD follows the Feature Group D format except the confirmation wink is not received The call is cut through after the digits are outpulsed This completion type seizes an outgoing channel After a successful seizure ringback tone is played to the incoming call The received or translated digits are out pulsed to the distant end After outpulsing the digits the channel looks for answer supervision After answer supervision is detected from the distant end the call is cut through The calling party will not hear call progress tones This completion type should not be used for FXO type ports because as a rule FXO does not support answer supervision This completion type seizes an outgoing channel After a successful seizure ringback ton
282. startup of the Host tasks MAINT LOG Records critical events regarding logical aspects of the EXS Switch NETWORK LOG Records critical events regarding the Dynamis Server applications and the VRU OPERATOR LOG Records critical events regarding the user interface STARTUP LOG Records critical events regarding logical aspects of the EXS Switch on startup SWITCH LOG Contains normal debug log file information for call processing must be turned on off from the Maintenance menu SWITCH1 LOG Contains archived debug log file information System files are identified by the SYS filename extension The system files within the Host are as follows ACCT_4X SYS Contains ANI Account code trunk assignments Page 32 E2E files E24 SYS Contains login passwords BDHARD3X SYS Contains the board status messages and cable ID information CCC_CODE SYS Contains a list of the country codes CIC_CODE SYS Contains Carrier Identification Code CIC information DNIS_TBL SYS Contains DNIS files and trunk assignments information FILESXFE1 SYS Contains redundancy files that update the other host ISDN_B1 SYS Contains the ISDN B Channel information ISDN_D2 SYS Contains the ISDN D Channel information ISDNbmsg SYS Contains information for identically configured ISDN B Channels OPERATOR SYS Contains supervisor and attendant references PORT_5X SYS Contains all the trunk information for each span and channel PORT_TMR
283. sterisk appears next to this card s icon in the Equipment List screen to indicate a synchronizing state Page 66 e FAIL This El card has failed for an unspecified reason If resetting this card does not remove this message you must call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Note The letter F appears next to this card s icon in the Equipment List screen to indicate a failed state Memory Test line This line indicates the result of a self test at the last status update of the integrity of ROM and RAM devices on this El card The following messages can occur e OK Test proved memory was reliable e ROM CHECKSUM FAILED Test proved read only memory was unreliable You must swap the card and call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately e RAM TEST FAILED Test proved random access memory was unreliable If resetting this card does not remove this message you must call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Artwork Revision line This line indicates the revision level of this El card s circuit design Serial Number line This line indicates the serial number of this El card Software ROM line This line indicates the major then the minor revision of the ROM software that is the BIOS installed on this El card Build line This line indicates the build number of the RAM software that is the System Software sometimes called pSOS downloaded from an EX CPU card to this El card Note The
284. t particularly a release occurs Your required input is limited to the following choices e 00 User e Ol Private Network Serving Local User e 02 Public Network Serving Local User e 03 Transit Network e 04 Public Network Serving Remote User e 05 Private Network Serving Remote User e 07 International Network e OA Network Beyond Interworking Point E 08 Release Request On ISDN list This list indicates whether the Host requests a release by this D Channel when a B Channel s far end disconnects Your required input is limited to the following choices e 00 Do not send host release request on ISDN disconnect E 09 Protocol Discrim Maint Message list This list indicates how maintenance messages are passed on this D Channel Your required input is limited to the following choice e 03 Normal E 0A B Channel Encoding for Transmission This list indicates how B Channels are encoded for transmission Your required input is limited to the following choices e 00 Channel Number e 0I Slot Map NFAS Associating D Channel with up to 10 T1 Spans Instead of associating one D Channel per T1 or El span an arrangement called ISDN Facility Associated Signaling or FAS you may want the same D Channel to control signaling on up to 10 spans T1 spans only a cost effective arrangement called ISDN Non Facility Associated Signaling or NFAS in which a full NFAS group can have a D Channel B Channel Ratio of 1 239
285. t call Dynamis Customer Engineering immediately Redundancy Status line This line indicates whether this El card was in a redundant mode that is matched with another card of the same kind in the same chassis and either communicating with it or ready to communicate with it and if so what relationship it had with the other card at the last status update One of the following messages will occur Non redundant This El card is not in redundant mode Active This El card is in redundant mode and is the card in control Note The letter A appears next to this card s icon in the Equipment List screen to indicate an active state Standby This El card is in redundant mode and is ready to take control if the active El card fails Note The letter S appears next to this card s icon in the Equipment List screen to indicate a standby state Serving This El card is in redundant mode and is providing service to a redundant I O card whose associated El card has failed Note The letter S appears next to this card s icon in the Equipment List screen to indicate a serving State If this El card is in a serving state no other card in the chassis can be in this state if another card is in this state this El card cannot be in a serving state Synchronizing This El card is in redundant mode and is exchanging configuration data with the other El card Note If synchronization fails this card will become non redundant An a
286. t stream Translation of the Destination Number DNIS ANI Send the Destination Number DNIS or ANI to another digit table for translation NEW for 2007 Version 4 7 This can be done up to 16 times switching between ANI DNIS and Destination Number translation for each table Routing the call to a route list to another digit table or to the server based application TAC Callback Callback Menu ANI PIN based on Number DNIS or ANI Routing the call to a conference group as either a listener or talker Routing the call based on the Time of Day group Note You can create up to 100 digit tables numbered 0 99 Page 210 Creating a digit table Table Number list Table Name field The Digit Table Designation screen enables you to create a digit table to which you add digit lookup entries Digit Table Designation CO g a S Figure 4 94 Digit Table Designation screen layout Selecting Digit Table then clicking Add Table in the Tables menu of the Digit Tables screen itself activated by clicking the DIGIT TABLES button in the Main Menu Tool Bar will activate this screen Digit Tables File Tables Hans ld add Table E Rename Table Delete Table Import Table Export Table Figure 4 95 Digit Table Designation screen layout The following information appears in the Digit Table Designation screen This list indicates the digit table s numerical identity This field indic
287. t tables perform the following based on the destination number provided or by Dt Digit Tables Digit Lookup Digit Xlate 1 II ANI CLI Xlate De 823 198 xx 0 Dt 01 Quest Routine 771 448 xx 0 Dt 02 new Table 617 508 cc 0 Dt 03 time 603 617 cc 0 Dt 04 DNIS 508 XX 0 Dt 05 DNIS1 44428 580 xx 0 Dt 07 for 44418 508 xx 0 Dt 08 zone2 212 0 _ Dt 100 Master DefaL 2098 617 7 6038881234 0 Pt Pre translation Tables 111 xx 6617269320 0 Pt 01 Vince amp e cc 0 Pt 02 Brayton amp amp cc 0 Pt 03 Frank EB NPA Table E 00 NPA List BH ant Table Bi 00 anit A 01 aniz index Table Mo K gt Figure 4 93 Sample Digit Table Layout Limit Opt Route List Route List Route List Route List Route List Route List Route List Digit Table Route List ANI PIN Route List Route List Route E wre E 557 Span 6 E 557 span 7 E 557 span 6 E eh 00 01 RL E Tone Span 4 E 1sDN Span 3 Dt new Table E Tone Span 4 E Tone Span 4 E Tone Span 4 Lookup ANI lw the DNIS or ANI provided as specified in the new Lookup Type field Having associated resource groups that can provide alternate routes to a destination specified by a call see Creating Alternate Routes for Calls you must create one or more digit tables A digit table contains the information needed to assign a route to a call coming into the EXS Switch including manipulation of the call s digi
288. tage of address data can contain one or several digit strings such as an identification string AND along with an address string The following list identifies the acronyms characters shown in the String field e Star Character In DTMF signaling the star character separates the destination number and ANI There are no IP digits when using DTMF e KP ST Key Pulse Start Signal The standard Feature Group D method of collecting MF signals used by AT amp T and Northem Telecom e KP Key Pulse In MF tone signaling a signal preparing the EXS Switch to collect digits e ST STart Signal In MF tone signaling a signal indicating the end of collecting digits e STIP An ST with a different frequency e Wink On hook Off hook A digital pulse that changes the condition on the A and B leads on a T1 e II Informational or Info Digits The IP digits describe from where the calls are coming Page A 1 Valid T1 Incoming Types The following Incoming types are only valid when the signaling type is T1 Tone Note that the list of incoming types displayed by the software may differ if a type listed below is missing there may need to be additional development to support that type ANI 10 DNIS 7 ANI 10 DNIS 7TL Auto Terminating Collect Digits DNIS 7 ANT 10 DNIS OP Code DTMF 3 2 Sec DTMF 4 2 Sec default DTMF 4 10 Sec Note If this channel is connected to a VRU you must select DTMF 4
289. tary dialing from the far end For T1 E1 e E amp M default This value indicates the channel exchanges signals between near and far end using separate leads E amp M or digital bits A amp B Note TIf this channel is connected to a VRU you must select E amp M e FXO Grd Foreign Exchange Office Ground This value indicates the channel sends signals including a ring lead to indicate line seizure as if from subscriber end station equipment employing ground start to central office equipment Page 104 InStart Dial list Out Start Dial list FXO Loop Foreign Exchange Office Loop This value indicates the channel sends signals including a loop closure to indicate line seizure as if from subscriber end station equipment employing loop start to central office equipment FXS Grd Foreign Exchange Station Ground This value indicates the channel sends signals including talk battery and switched ringing current as if from central office to subscriber end station equipment employing ground start and receives a ring lead ground start FXS Loop Foreign Exchange Station Loop This value indicates the channel sends signals including talk battery and switched ringing current as if from central office employing loop start to subscriber end station equipment and receives a loop start seizure from a phone This list indicates how to start a channel s incoming call that is compatible with equipment at the channel s f
290. tatus then display this status in the EX CPU Card screen Querying Fault Log Clicking the EX CPU Card screen s QUERY FAULT Loc button displays this EX CPU card s Fault Log Fault Log Figure 3 22 Fault Log query with fault Clearing Fault Log Clicking the EX CPU Card screen s CLEAR FauLT Loc button clears this EX CPU card s Fault Log and resets the number of faults to 0 0 also appears when no faults are detected on a query Figure 3 23 Fault Log cleared or clear of faults Page 72 Setting Switch Time Clicking the EX CPU Card screen s SET SwITCH TIME button coordinates this EX CPU card s clock with the date and time of the Host computer s clock Note The EXS Switch s internal clock is the source of timestamps for this card s Fault Log but not for timestamps on CDRs Call Detail Records which are generated and stamped by the Host Coordinating this EX CPU card to the Host computer s clock causes all other EX CPU cards in your EXS Switch to coordinate themselves one by one with the Host computer s clock We recommend that you download one of the popular programs that sets your Host computer on a daily basis to one of the atomic clocks and that all PC components you use also synchronize their times on at least a daily basis Clocks that are not synchronized can within only a few weeks drift enough that matching up log files from the various components becomes more difficult Page 73
291. ter being changed to characterize a private paystation call e There are more Information Digit codes contact your E2 Eagle technical representative for additional codes Note The Host validates incoming Stage I digits against the STAGE_I DAT file Received I digits determined to be invalid will not be sent over a call s outgoing leg these digits are simply discarded However the Host does not validate Stage I digits you may change This field indicates an instruction for this digit lookup entry to translate network supplied Calling Party Numbers such as ANIs or CLIs that telcos can put in an incoming call s digit stream to identify the caller s origin Your optional input is to leave the field blank default Calling Party Number is sent as received over the call s outgoing leg or to enter a wholly or partially different Calling Party Number up to 20 digits to be sent over the call s outgoing leg Note The following table shows how the network supplied incoming number Calling Party Number and or Stage I digits can be translated into a different number that will accompany the destination number over the call s outgoing leg Page 216 Incoming Number Number Il ANI CLI Effect of Sent with network Xlate Translation Destination supplied Number 006032246511 CC blank Number sent as received 006032246511 6032246511 CC blank Number sent as receive
292. tering the raw command it is not necessary to enter the framing character Begin with the actual command to be sent In the command string use 00 for the sequence number DO NOT enter the checksum The Host calculates the checksum for the command being sent Status field This field indicates the EXS Switch s status response to the raw command Reply field This field indicates the EXS Switch s reply to the raw command Refer to Dynamis User Manual for the commands and associated responses when using raw commands Page 248 Switch Debug Log menu Opening Switch Log The Switch Debug Log menu enables you to start and stop logging as well as capture view and delete Switch log files that contain call processing information The Switch log file holds a maximum of 500K of data Once the Switch log file reaches the limit the file is renamed to Switchl log and saved When the new Switch log reaches the limit the file again is renamed to Switchl log and the data on the first Switch1 log file is overwritten Therefore it is important when capturing Switch log files to back up on a regular basis to prevent loss of data On the Maintenance menu point to Switch Debug Log then click Open to start logging information in the Switch log file Each time you open a Switch log file the Host generates a time date stamp revision number and open close status Each time a file is closed the Host generates a time date stamp and channel stat
293. ters screen s parameters for the selected ISDN B Channel ooo 009 02 11 011 23 01 00 009 03 11 011 23 01 o o E 009 04 T1 011 23 01 00 01 00 o 00 E 009 07 11 011 23 01 03 m m 04 01 00 Figure 4 26 ISDN B Chan s screen layout HA Page 131 ISDN Cause Code Routing This capability allows for different call routing based on the out going channel s return ISDN cause code The ISDN call routing based on the out going trunk return ISDN cause code is a two part setup e Configure the ISDN Cause Code table described below e Assign the table to the Route List see Grouping Channels The ISDN Cause Code table can be displayed by selecting the sub menu ISDN Cause Code under the GUI s Option heading Beles Hale 0 wala File Equipment Maintenance System Admin 557 ISDN Routing 254 Window Help Callback TAC RU Branding 557 Cause Code ISDN Cause Code My Documents New Folder VaultClient_ Vault Ext WADU EXE 2x Gl US ISDN Cause Code Routing ES Cause Code Action User Defined E Next Available Route fo Add Modify Find Code Delete ISDN Code Action User Code 4 Release W Cause 12 124 Play Busy Tone 2 Next Available Route 34 Next Available Route ce Figure 4 27 ISDN Cause Code Activation and Routing screens When finished adding changing and or deleting press the Save button t
294. tgoing after a delay before ringback This delay is set by the Ring_Delay variable located in the E2 INI file NOTE In the future these configurations will be set in a screen in the GUI This completion type is used with Tandem connections After outseizure and the receipt of a wink the first of two stages of digits is sent The first stage is comprised of the dialed or translated dialed number An off hook signal is then received after which the second stage of digits is outpulsed These digits are derived from the ANI or its translation The call is then cut through Page C 2 Feat Grp D ISDN Loud Bell Music Hold NA Type 3 NA Type 4 Network Operator Pre dial This completion type is the standard outgoing Feature Group D completion type which should be used in most applications The system outseizes looks for a wink sends two strings of MFRI and scans for a confirmation wink The first string is derived from the incoming II and ANI digits or their translations The second string is generated from the dialed number or its translation After receipt of the confirmation wink the incoming and outgoing are connected Refer to the various sections of the manual to configure ISDN This completion type is used with a resource group for ACD queuing The queue group needs to be set to this completion type and for FXS channels This completion type is required when building a Music On Hold route An external music source
295. than full across the row of the Offset identifying this T1 span This row divides into columns that incorporate the meanings if not the exact labels of the T7 Span Attributes screen s parameters for the selected offset In addition this row includes a Clock column that indicates whether or how the span is involved in clocking activities of the EXS Switch chassis to which the span is connected The Clock column can show the following values blank This value indicates the span takes its network clocking from some other T1 or E1 span in its EXS Switch chassis e P This value indicates the span is the primary source of network clocking for its EXS Switch chassis Note Clicking the Ser Primary button will cause the selected span to be the one and only primary clock source for the entire EXS Switch chassis If this chassis is one of many nodes each node must get its clock separately from the same place S This value indicates the span is the secondary source of network clocking for its EXS Switch chassis and will become the primary source if the primary source fails Note Clicking the Ser SECONDARY button will cause the selected span to be the one and only secondary clock source for the entire EXS Switch chassis If this chassis is one of many nodes each node must get its clock separately from the same place To put this span into service highlight the span s row then click the INTO SERVICE button Note To det
296. the revision level of this EXNET Controller card s circuit design Serial Number line This line indicates the serial number of this EXNET Controller card Software ROM line This line indicates the major then the minor revision of the ROM software that is the BIOS installed on this EXNET Controller card Build line This line indicates the build number of the RAM software that is the System Software sometimes called pSOS downloaded from an EX CPU card to this EXNET Controller card Page 88 Note The Switch Status screen displays the actual version of this software Actual configuration line Updating card status Querying Fault Log Clearing Fault Log This line indicates the identity of the EXNET ring to which this EXNET Controller card is attached whether this card transmits and receives or only receives packets and whether three or four packets are transmitted per timeslot or channel Clicking the EXNET Card screen s UPDATE STATUS button after this screen has been active for a while will query this EXNET Controller card again to determine its current status then display this status in the EXNET Card screen Clicking the EXNET Card screen s QUERY FAULT LOG button displays this EXNET Controller card s Fault Log see Fault Log query with fault for an EX CPU card s Fault Log example Clicking the EX CPU Card screen s CLEAR FAULT LOG button clears this EXNET Controller card s Fault Log and resets th
297. the system for the first time select one Host as the Server and the other Host as the Client Page 23 Host is Server Field Host is Client field The following fields appear in the Redundancy setup screen This field indicates when checked that you have designated this Host as Server This field indicates when checked that you have designated this Host as Client You must enter the IP Address of the Server Host Pass configuration changes in real time Note It is recommended that you NOT use this feature If this is checked not recommended then configuration changes you make to either host will automatically be passed to the other host While this keeps both hosts configured the same we recommend to not check this box and instead transfer the changes manually In this manner one can make changes test them and by using the manual transfer capability either update the other host or use the other host to revert both hosts to a previous configuration Also it reduces file corruption problems which would be automatically transferred to both hosts if this box is checked Page 24 Application Server Link screen This area of the System Setup screen enables you to select an Applications Protocol Interface API link to an Dynamis Server providing database applications such as Smart Calling Card or Smart Long Distance or to provide integration with other types of servers You can also select a communications port between th
298. tion to switch establisher 057 7137999 15 25 25 Connection to switch lost 05 13 1999 15 25 15 Connection to switch establishe a Figure 5 3 Alarms screen layout Clicking View Alarms in the Main Menu Tool Bar s Maintenance menu will activate this screen E Connected to E2 Host LOCALHOST Span Channel state Carrier Answer Query Raw Command My Documents pd System Update gt x EXNET Management Logs Figure 5 4 Alarms screen activation Page 232 Alarm Screen Activation The following lists fields and checkboxes appear in the Alarms screen Alarms area This area provides a scrollable structure for listing alarms row by row Alarms display only if they have occurred only if they have happened during or after the timeframe you specify in the Filters area below and only if they fit other criteria you have selected in the Filters area Severity field This field indicates how worrisome the condition generating this alarm is for the smooth running of your service Alarms can occur in three degrees of severity e Major also depicted as red LED This value indicates the condition generating the alarm is likely to affect service adversely if not corrected e Minor also depicted as yellow LED This value indicates the condition generating the alarm could worsen and become service affecting if not corrected e Informative also depicted as blue LED This value indicat
299. tions screen will apply to all CICs you selected in the SS7 CICs screen The following information appears in the SS7 CIC Options screen This line indicates the span holding the channel that is the CIC you selected in the SS7 CICs screen to be given attributes other than its defaults This line indicates the channel that is the CIC you selected in the SS7 CICs screen for this CIC group to be given attributes other than its defaults Note If you select more than one CIC in a span to be given attributes the For Span Channel line will be replaced with the line Multiple Routes This list indicates the nature of the RFS Request for Service exchanged between the EXS Switch and the Host Your required input is limited to the following choices Page 151 Glare Rule list Out Continuity Ck list CIC Service Rule list e BCD This value indicates that the RFS passed to the Host contains only SS7 message parameters for Called Party Number and Calling Party Number and that these parameters are BCD Binary Coded Decimal encoded e Raw default This value indicates that the RFS passed to the Host contains all SS7 message parameters as received This list indicates how simultaneous incoming and outgoing seizures that is requests for service of the same CIC are resolved Your required input is limited to the following choices e Drop Incoming This value indicates the incoming seizure is denied e Drop Outgoing default This
300. tributes of all SS7 links and Viewing route destination attributes Page 139 Configuring SS7 Links Having created one or more SS7 link sets network see Creating SS7 Link Sets you must associate channels you have service see Putting Channels to from Switch into Service with a link set Note You can assign up to 16 SS7 links per SS7 card depending on model You can associate as little as one SS7 link per link set Assigning attributes to SS7 links The SS7 Link Attributes screen enables you to create an SS7 link with which SS7 network routes will be associated Note In an EXNET ring SS7 links of one node s SS7 card cannot be associated with T1 or El spans of another node SS7 Link Attributes E om gfo E 00 gt APC oo0 ooo oo0 DO eo Figure 4 31 SS7 Link Attributes screen layout Page 140 Link list Sp Ch lists Link Set list SLC field Selecting Links then clicking the App button in the SS7 Card screen itself activated by clicking View by Type View by Slot ID or View by Node in the Main Menu Tool Bar s Equipment menu then a specific SS7 card will activate this screen Figure 4 32 SS7 Link Attributes screen activation for rest of SS7 Note The SS7 Card screen with Links selected shows a green icon in the leftmost column when an adjacent link is in service A red icon displays when a link is not in service An X icon displays when a link has been in service
301. ups you want in the route list and they are listed in the order you want click Save in the File menu of the Outgoing Resource Groups screen Page 207 Exporting Route List Configuration It is possible to both export and import resource group configuration information for documentation review and sophisticated configuration purposes To export all route list data select File Export from the Route Lists screen Route Lists ES Route Lists ave Resource Group Print 3 Import Exot Exit m rone sparr Figure 4 91 Export Route Lists Activation You are then prompted for a location to export the file The default file name is RouteList CSV as it is in the CSV format where the route list name is the first field and the second and additional fields correspond to the resource group s separated by commas below are an example of an exported route list file with 3 route lists and the IVR route list having 3 resource groups ISDN Span 3 ISDN Span 3 IVR RL IVR Span 1 IVR Span 2 IVR Span 3 SS7 Span 7 SS7 Span 7 Importing Route List Configuration It is recommended that you FIRST EXPORT YOUR PRESENT ROUTE LIST CONFIGURATION BEFORE IMPORTING Importing Route List Configuration will overwrite all the data ONLY if there are no errors A typical error is having the import file specify a resource group that does not exist all route list data select File Import from the Route Lists screen You are then
302. ures to Channels Overview New Features Channel Features has been significantly upgraded to expand routing and translation capabilities This includes e Translating dialed digits before presenting them to the digit table Pre Translation Table field e Use the dialed digits ANI or DNIS for lookup in the digit table or use the ANT or DNIS to determine inter intrastate routing Lookup Type field These capabilities including the inter intrastate routing are described in detail below Configuration Having put channels into service see Putting Channels to from Switch into Service or grouped channels see Grouping Channels you must assign attributes to a particular channel or set of channels that enable routing of outbound calls Having created one or more digit tables see Building Digit Tables and perhaps an Pre Translation table for a particular digit table see Building Pre Translation Tables you must assign attributes to features of a particular channel or set of channels that support of inbound calls The Channel Feature Attributes screen enables you to specify attributes of channel s features Channel Feature Attributes x For Span 12 Channel 9 Incoming Type json S Dutgoing Type z Pre Transalation Table 00 None o Lookup Type ons tt t lt ss Inter State Digit Table y Digit table 00 new2005 vw Network None i OC i ANI Table None y Answer Mode PropApt iti OC iS Release Mod
303. us Warning Close the Switch log file before accessing either the Delete or Screen On options Close the file at the end of the Debug session or the file may grow to fill up your hard disk Leaving the log file in an open state could result in a loss of data or a slowdown in call processing Closing Switch Log Deleting Switch Log Viewing Switch Log On the Maintenance menu point to Switch Debug Log then click Close to stop logging information in the Switch log file On the Maintenance menu point to Switch Debug Log then click Delete to delete Switch log file Note Make sure the Switch log file is closed before deleting On the Maintenance menu point to Switch Debug Log then click Screen ON to view call processing information on the screen If the Switch log file is open all information displayed on the screen is captured in the Switch log file If the Switch log file is closed information displays only on the screen and does not get captured in the Switch log file Note You can only view the Switch log file The Switch1 log cannot be viewed Page 249 Network Debug Log menu The Network Debug Log menu enables you to start and stop logging as well as capture view and delete network LAN debugging messages LAN messages may be messages sent to the Excel Server or messages sent to a VRU The Network log file holds a maximum of 500K of data Once the Network log file reaches the limit the file is renam
304. used in applications requiring reorigination or transfer of calls Incoming and outgoing channels in Dynamis Switching s Smart Calling Card application for example are usually be set to Park Channels to VRUs are also usually set to Park so that channels connecting to them will await further action after being disconnected from them If this channel is connected to a VIC VRU you must select Park e Release This value indicates the Host will release Channel A if Channel B both terminates the connection and is set to Release or will park Channel A if Channel B both terminates the connection and is set to Brdcast or Park the Host will release Channel A if Channel A terminates the connection and will park Channel B if Channel B is set to Brdcast or will release Channel B if Channel B is set to Park or Release This list indicates how a caller on this channel is notified that the call could not be completed due to network congestion Your required input is limited to the following choices e Annc This value indicates the caller hears an announcement when the call cannot be completed e None This value indicates the caller hears nothing when the call cannot be Page 190 completed e Tone This value indicates the caller hears a tone signal for example a fast busy when the call cannot be completed Account Code field This field indicates the artificial Calling Party Number the Host supplies this channel
305. ute Attributes Digit Lookup Digit Xlate 1 Stagell ANI CLI Xlate Limit TI Inter Intra State Routing V Routing Intra State Option RouteLit y Intra State Route T able Pates y Intra State Lookup Type PA Inter State Option RouteLit y Inter Sate Route T able fioo tst y Inter State Lookup Type y Figure 4 68 Master Route Attributes screen layout Intra InterState Box Checked Note that NPA table determines whether the call is Intrastate or Interstate see NPA Table Page 184 Intra State Routing Fields Intra State Option allows you to select any routing option but it is recommended that you select Route List or Digit Table In either case the Intra State Route Table provides a valid list of options If the Intra State Option field is set to Digit Table then the Intra State Lookup Type ANI or DNIS field may be used to look up on the ANI or DNIS respectively Inter State Routing Fields Comment Field Inter State Option allows you to select any routing option but it is recommended that you select Route List or Digit Table In either case the Inter State Route Table provides a valid list of options If the Inter State Option field is set to Digit Table then the Inter State Lookup Type ANI or DNIS field may be used to look up on the ANI or DNIS respectively A comment field supports up to 32 characters Page 185 Channel Features Assigning Feat
306. uting Tables Click on the Post Route button at the top of the screen A Figure 4 81 Post Route Button The Post Routing screen appears listing each set of post routing rules SERYER1 pcAnywhere iel ole Ela e elk E2 ALTEA to E2 Host x LOCALHOST a Fe Sn SR EA mara RAFA Post Routing Options x File Edit Post Routing Options Translations Calling Party Opti Rule Name 1 TEST 2 outline Modif Ea 3 testing Figure 4 82 Post Routing Table screen layout One can add a new set of rules by clicking on the Add button To modify existing rule click on the Rule Name and either e Click on one of the 4 tabs Post Routing Options etc or e Right click and select Modify Page 199 Post Routing Setup ES Post Routing Options Setup Calling Party Post Routing Options Record Name TEST Calling Number Type Unknown y Nature of Address no Preference y E unknown E Presentation Indicator Presentation is allowed Completion Type ISDN v I Screening Indicator User provided not screened Post Routing Options Translations Called Party Post Routing Options i DNIS Translation Called Number type Unknown y ANI Translation Called Number Plan Id Unknown y i Info Translation Presentation Indicator i Screening Indicator 00 Allowed 00 Not Screened cme Figure 4 83 Post Routing Table screen layout
307. uting as normal stages 1 strings 2 digit type MFR1 method use KP and ST String 1 method use KP and ST String 2 Page A 14 Inseize Control Instructions Feature Grp B Incoming Digit Format Incoming Rule Generate inseize acknowledgment Receive stage N address data Generate call processing event wink Report incoming call with digits Wait for host control message This incoming type receives a single string of MF digits No acknowledgment wink is required The only difference between Feature Grp B and Feature Grp B1 is the term digit used to determine that all of the digits have been sent Stage e String 1 KP Dialed Number ST strings digit type MFR1 method use term digit term digit ST_IMI Inseize Control Instructions Feature Grp B1 Incoming Digit Format Incoming Rule Inseize Control Instructions Generate inseize acknowledgment Receive stage N address data Generate call processing event wink Report incoming call with digits Wait for host control message This incoming type receives a single string of MF digits No acknowledgment wink is required Stage 1 e String 1 KP Dialed Number ST strings digit type MFR1 method use term digit term digit ST Generate inseize acknowledgment Receive stage N address data Generate call processing event wink Report incoming call with digits Wait for host control message Page A 15 Feature Grp D
308. value indicates the Host sends ANI CLI DNIS and other messages across the LAN to Dynamis Switching s Server to meet requirements of various applications ANI Account This is selected for ANI Validation Refer to Step 4 in Chapter 3 for details This specifies the ANI table to use for validation if the Network Field above is set to ANI Account This list indicates how the Host treats Answer Supervison on this channel called Channel B for discussion in relation to the channel originating the call called Channel A for discussion and to the Host itself Your required input is limited to the following choices e PropAns Propagate Answer This value indicates the Host causes the EXS Switch to propagate Channel B s answer to Channel A in order to trigger the billing clock of the switch es between the EXS Switch and the calling party e Prop Rpt Propagate and Report Answer This value indicates the Host causes the EXS Switch to propagate Channel B s answer to Channel A in order to trigger the billing clock of the switch es between the EXS Switch and the calling party and causes the EXS Switch to report Channel B s answer to the Host so the Host can trigger the EXS Switch s billing clock Page 189 Release Mode Audible Signaling list Note If this channel is connected to an VIC VRU you must select Prop Rpt e Rpt Ans Report Answer This value indicates the Host causes the EXS Switch to report Channel B
309. vice Your required input is limited to the following choices e Block default This value indicates the SS7 stack sends an SS7 Blocking BLO message Note This stack will send an SS7 Unblocking UBL message when the Host puts this CIC back in service e No Action This value indicates the SS7 stack sends no SS7 message Page 152 Alert Answer list e No Block This value indicates the SS7 stack sends no SS7 message Note This stack will send an SS7 Reset Circuit RSC message when the Host puts this CIC back in service This list indicates what SS7 message the responsible SS7 stack must receive before establishing a voice path over this CIC and generating ring to the calling party Your required input which must agree with the voice switch terminating this CIC is limited to the following choices e ACM ANM default This value indicates the SS7 stack whose ISUP is either ITU or ANSI compliant must receive an SS7 Address Complete Message ACM then an Answer Message ANM before establishing a voice path e CON This value indicates the SS7 stack whose ISUP is only ITU compliant must receive an SS7 Connect CON message before establishing a voice path Ckt Group Carrier Ind list This list indicates the nature of signaling on this CIC s physical medium Your input permitted only if this CIC is associated with an SS7 stack whose ISUP is ANSI compliant see Creating SS7 Stacks is limited to the following choi
310. vsussccessasaciideavestisdgvaceatoasadeassdvausatucsaceusdaceusnapeveaneeeneas Major Translation Enhanced XNETONE Hardware UDI do ISDN NI2 Support oscilaba Improved Backup and REStOre ic risa eo a ea a o EESE Support tor Larse Digit Tables eeren i eii A A A Enhanced Billing Ea da Hasy Upper coso e e e te ai iea a e a a r i What s New 2004 5 vecindad ii deidad 57 RUE AYORA OS Nod Integrate SS7 CPN with Smart Long Distance Application ooooooocnnccnonccancnonnononcnonncnonccnnncnnnc ns Configure Resource Group with CIP and TN ooooocccnnocononoconononononanononanonnnncconnnncnnnnncnnnnnnnnncnnnnnos Automatic Call Distribution ida Play ANI 900 Prompt to Conference Bridge veian dd i Enhanced REBT Least Cost Routing Using Digit Table Importing ooooccnnnoccnonocinonocnconnnncnnnnncnnncconancnononccnnnnccnnnos Di PP ceetetereat esate cenit as Geel dee E E System Management OOE ODIS A E veces o A E es ge OO Resource Group and Route List Configuration Tables ooonococnnccocnoncccnoncnononccononaconnnccnnnnccnnnos Hime OF Day TOD A ad e bad Automatic Call Distribution ACD QUEueS cooooooocnncnccnnonnoonnnononocnononnnnnnonnnoncononnnnnnonononccnoninnnnns A E ies System Piles and Record rifas Data Files cui ii ia A E E te SDAA ad ss ceca tetcaead gars te ta E E A N E ESP PIGS 6 ooi3 cures abit E E pila 11 2 SYSTEM ADMIN vied Cowen A eile A AAA e 10 E 10 A EN 11 Password Management SCreen riis ineert ie tiita e bli aia ot
311. west Dt 05 DNIS1 2898958 o Route List E Qwest Dt 07 for 2898938 0 Route List E Qwest Dt 08 zone2 289892 amp 0 Route Lit E Qwest ts Dt 100 Master Defar 289891 amp D Route List E Qwest Pt Pre translation Tables 289889 0 Route List E Qwest ce EH NPA Table 289888 amp o Route List E Qwest B ANI Table 289887 amp 0 Route List E Qwest I Index Table 289886 o Route List E Qwest 289885 amp 0 Route List E Qwest mij eo a E Figure 4 100 Digit Tables screen layout for digit table When you have added all the digit lookup entries you want to this digit table click Save in the File menu of the Digit Tables screen If you need to change the route list associated with a specific digit lookup entry you can edit it in the Digit Table Attributes screen or you can drag the preferred route list from the Route List screen to the line s representing the digit lookup entry in the Digit Tables screen If you want a digit table to become a feature of a particular channel see Assigning Features to Channels you can drag that digit table to the line s representing that channel in the Channel Features screen Page 220 Find Route for a Specific Destination Number As digit tables get larger it can often be quite confusing predicting which route a certain number matches To ease the problem the Find Route feature was developed To find a route open the appropriate digit table then under Attributes select
312. whom you want to give or subsequently deny access to the Host Your required case sensitive input is limited to 20 alphanumeric characters Password field This field indicates the code validating this user s access to the Host Your required case sensitive input is limited to 20 alphanumeric characters Note Your entry appears as a string of asterisks for security Confirm Password field This field indicates for a second time the code validating this user s access to the Host in order to assure the first entry was correctly made Your required case sensitive input is the same entry you made in the Password field Note Your entry appears as a string of asterisks for security If you fail to enter the same string as in the Password field you will receive an error message allowing you to enter the original password System Admin Access field This field indicates when checked that the user has access to the Main Menu Toolbar s System Admin menu When checked the letter A without quotes appears in the Password Management screen s User Name field Routing Table Access field This field indicates when checked that the user has access to the Main Menu Toolbar s Routing Table menu When checked the letter R without quotes appears in the Password Management screen s User Name field Maintenance Access field This field indicates when checked that the user has access to the Main Menu Toolbar s Maintenance me
313. will activate this screen E2 Connected to E2 Host LOCALHOST Fie Equipment Maintenance PE 0600 557 ISDN Routing Password Management g E System Setup Software Download System Restart Figure 2 9 Password Management screen activation Page 14 Adding New User To add a new user click the Password Management screen s ADD button In the resulting User Attributes screen see Figure 2 10 User Attributes screen layout enter the user s name password and access privileges Modifying User To modify user information click a user name in the Password Management screen then click the Mopiry button In the resulting User Attributes screen see Figure 2 10 User Attributes screen layout change the user s name password or access privileges Deleting User To delete a user click a user name in the Password Management screen then click the DELETE button User Attributes screen The User Attributes screen enables you to add or modify a user s name password and access privileges User Attributes m m m m Figure 2 10 User Attributes screen layout Clicking the Password Management screen s App or MopiFY button will activate the User Attributes screen Password Management Eg tu D A R M H Delete Maa Figure 2 11 User Attributes screen activation The following fields appear in the User Attributes screen Page 15 User Name field This field indicates a person to
314. wing fields appear in the Alarm Details screen Date amp Time field This field indicates when the alarm you are viewing was generated Alarm Origin field This field indicates the component in your Call Processing System that has generated the alarm you are viewing Alarm Severity field This field indicates how worrisome the condition generating this alarm is for the smooth running of your service see the Severity field above for additional information Page 235 Alarm Type field This field indicates the type of alarm you are viewing see the Type checkboxes above for additional information Alarm No field This field indicates the hexadecimal value of the alarm within the alarm type you are viewing for details see General API Messages in Dynamis Switching s Software Reference Manual Alarm Description This field indicates the nature of the alarm field Page 236 Span and Channel Status screen The Span and Channel Status screen enables you to view the status of each span and channel as well as troubleshoot errors pertaining to the Host You can also place channels in or out of service Note The Span And Channel Status screen does not display span states in real time however the Host by default updates the status every two seconds To change the default setting see Refresh Rate screen New feature Note that the full Carrier ID and Cable ID is now displayed in the upper left corner of the sc
315. witch This can be useful in verifying configuration settings This information helps isolate problems that may occur with call processing Query Channel Status Figure 5 12 Query Channel Status screen layout In the Span and Channel Status screen click the channel you want to query then click Query Status on the Channel menu to activate this screen Page 240 Span 08 Channel States File Span Error Monitor fam In Service 008 Y Span Out Service In Service Out Of Service o TT 0 Refresh Rate 03 IDLE 04 IDLE Figure 5 13 Query Channel Status screen activation The following lines appear in the Query Channel Status screen Span line This line indicates the span you select in the Span and Channel Status screen Channel line This line indicates the channel you select in the Span and Channel Status screen Channel State line This line indicates the state of the channel you have selected Channel Type line This line indicates how the specified channel is set up Set up the channel type in the Routing Tables Channel Assignments function see Chapter 4 Configuring Channels and Routes Busy Out Flag Set line This line indicates whether or not the channel can be busied out Not all channels can be busied out at this time If the flag is set to NO the channel cannot be busied out If the flag is set to YES the channel can be busied out Incoming Start Dial line This line indicates how th
316. witch to obtain the required matching configuration for this CIC CVR failed after reattempt This message indicates a reattempted verification failed and the circuit cannot be verified You may need to confer with personnel controlling the remote switch to obtain the required matching configuration for this CIC Local translation data absent This message indicates that this CIC lacks configuration data in the local switch and the circuit cannot be verified You must configure this CIC Data from received CVR Circuit verification indicator value This result message indicates the remote switch reattempted a verification that either succeeded or failed If verification failed this message also gives characteristics of the carrier glare control carrier alarm and continuity check You may need to confer with personnel controlling the remote switch to obtain the required matching configuration for this CIC Page 157 Testing Continuity Span Chan line CIC line To DPC line Selecting a CIC displayed in the SS7 CICs screen then clicking Continuity Test in this screen s CIC Management menu will manually test whether a tone created in the local switch and looped back by the remote switch has been detected in the local switch then will display the results of this test in the SS7 CCR Results screen Note This test requires you to configure at least one DSP in a node for CPG u generates u law tone on outbound path for CICs on Tl
317. xx 0 642 XX 0 XX 0 Figure 4 64 Select Default Routing To select a specific NPA NXX enter them in the fields at the top left and click on the Go To button Note below the NPA 213 and NXX 626 are selected The entry in the table is highlighted One then can click on the Configure option at the top or right click and select one of the two options Master Table 213 of x Default Option Digit Table _v 100 Master De y File Tables Configure NPA a NXX Digit Xlate i ANI CLI Xlate Limit Opt Route Lookup Inter Opt Inter Route In 213 626 XX 0 RESE 627 XX 0 M215s 628 XX 0 216 629 xx 0 Route List E Quest 217 630 XX 0 W218 631 xX 0 219 632 XX 0 220 633 xX 0 m 634 xXx 0 E nn Configure attributs CO USC AA FR n 224 637 Clear Configuration 0 M225 638 XX o i226 639 XX o i227 640 XX 0 m22 641 xx 0 M229 642 xx 0 230 643 xx 0 z m22 vila sf Figure 4 65 Master Route Attributes Selection e Clear Configuration option clears all configuration for that entry so the default is used e Configure Attributes brings up the following screen Page 182 i Master Route Attributes l Digit Lookup Digit Xlate 1 Stagell ANICLI Xlate Limit lo Inter Intra State Routing T Routing Option Route Lit y Route T able Patec y Lookup Type E Inter State Option y Inter Sate Route T able py Inter State Lookup Type y Figure 4 66 Master Route
318. y 00 18 Power Supply 00 19 Midplane chassis serial 8336 00 22 Rear Fan Tray 00 32 EX CPU 2000 OMB 00 33 EX CPU 2000 OMB 01 00 ISDN PRI 01 03 T ONE 16 Span 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 9394 95 01 04 T ONE 16 Span 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108109110111 01 05 T ONE 16 Span 112 113 114 115 116 117 118119120121 122 123 124 125 126 127 01 06 T ONE 16 Span 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142143 01 07 T ONE 16 Span 144 145 146 147 148 149150151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158159 01 10 DSP ONE 01 11 MFDSP 01 14 EXNET Controller Ring OR 4P M 15 Front Fan Trav Figure 3 3 Equipment List screen layout View by Slot ID mode Clicking List by Slot ID in the Main Menu Tool Bar s Equipment menu will activate this screen and mode E Connected to E Host File Pa Mantena List by Type Lis it ID List by Mode i te Figure 3 4 Equipment List screen activation for View by Slot ID mode Note If you are already in the Equipment List screen in another mode you can also click the View by Slot ID button to change the Equipment List screen to View by Page 39 Slot ID mode Viewing Equipment by Node In View by Node mode the Equipment List screen enables you to view equipment by node in a fiberoptic ring configuration called EXNET Equipment List Sa a WEE BRINDA o ISDN PRI 557 PQ 16 Links T ONE 16 Span 00 0
319. yed in the drop down box Intra State Digit Table list Only displays if Inter Intra State was selected in the Lookup Type field Refer to Lookup Type list above for details Only valid digit tables will be displayed in the drop down box Page 188 Digit Table list Network list ANI Table Answer Mode list Only displays if ANT or DNIS was selected in the Lookup Type field Refer to Lookup Type list above for details Only valid digit tables will be displayed in the drop down box This list indicates how call processing should be modified to meet requirements of particular Excel Switching applications Your required input is limited to the following choices None This value indicates the Host does not send messages across the LAN to Dynamis Switching Server to alter call processing OP Code This value indicates the Host sends ANI CLI DNIS and other messages across the LAN to the Dynamis Application Server to meet requirements of the Smart Long Distance application SS7 Verify This is a new feature This value indicates the Host sends the CPN Calling Party Number provided by the SS7 signaling the DNIS and other messages across the LAN to E2 Application Server to meet requirements of the Smart Long Distance application Trunk Account This value indicates the Host sends ANI CLI DNIS and channel messages across the LAN to Dynamis Switching s Server to alter call processing Verify This

E2 Host Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents